U.S. patent application number 14/846457 was filed with the patent office on 2016-08-04 for nucleic acid encoding anti-pd-l1 antibodies.
This patent application is currently assigned to GENENTECH, INC.. The applicant listed for this patent is GENENTECH, INC.. Invention is credited to Jeanne CHEUNG, Henry CHIU, Bryan IRVING, Sophie M. LEHAR, Heather MAECKER, Sanjeev MARIATHASAN, Yan WU.
Application Number | 20160222117 14/846457 |
Document ID | / |
Family ID | 42097246 |
Filed Date | 2016-08-04 |
United States Patent
Application |
20160222117 |
Kind Code |
A1 |
IRVING; Bryan ; et
al. |
August 4, 2016 |
NUCLEIC ACID ENCODING ANTI-PD-L1 ANTIBODIES
Abstract
The present application relates to nucleic acid encoding
anti-PD-L1 antibodies, which have therapeutic use to enhance T-cell
function to upregulate cell-mediated immune responses and for the
treatment of T cell dysfunctional disorders, including infection
(e.g., acute and chronic) and tumor immunity.
Inventors: |
IRVING; Bryan; (San
Francsicso, CA) ; CHIU; Henry; (San Francisco,
CA) ; MAECKER; Heather; (Palo Alto, CA) ;
MARIATHASAN; Sanjeev; (Millbrae, CA) ; LEHAR; Sophie
M.; (Montara, CA) ; WU; Yan; (Foster City,
CA) ; CHEUNG; Jeanne; (San Francisco, CA) |
|
Applicant: |
Name |
City |
State |
Country |
Type |
GENENTECH, INC. |
South San Francisco |
CA |
US |
|
|
Assignee: |
GENENTECH, INC.
South San Francisco
CA
|
Family ID: |
42097246 |
Appl. No.: |
14/846457 |
Filed: |
September 4, 2015 |
Related U.S. Patent Documents
|
|
|
|
|
|
Application
Number |
Filing Date |
Patent Number |
|
|
14610593 |
Jan 30, 2015 |
|
|
|
14846457 |
|
|
|
|
14303153 |
Jun 12, 2014 |
|
|
|
14610593 |
|
|
|
|
14062851 |
Oct 24, 2013 |
|
|
|
14303153 |
|
|
|
|
13475382 |
May 18, 2012 |
|
|
|
14062851 |
|
|
|
|
12633339 |
Dec 8, 2009 |
8217149 |
|
|
13475382 |
|
|
|
|
61121092 |
Dec 9, 2008 |
|
|
|
Current U.S.
Class: |
1/1 |
Current CPC
Class: |
A61K 2039/507 20130101;
A61P 37/02 20180101; C07K 2317/76 20130101; A61P 31/12 20180101;
C07K 2317/14 20130101; C07K 2317/52 20130101; A61P 31/10 20180101;
A61P 33/00 20180101; A61P 43/00 20180101; A61P 37/04 20180101; C07K
16/2827 20130101; A61K 45/06 20130101; A61P 31/04 20180101; C07K
2317/56 20130101; A61P 31/00 20180101; C07K 2317/74 20130101; A61K
31/7068 20130101; C07K 16/30 20130101; A61K 39/3955 20130101; C07K
2317/24 20130101; C07K 2317/71 20130101; A61K 39/39558 20130101;
A61P 37/00 20180101; A61P 35/00 20180101; C07K 2317/92 20130101;
Y02A 50/30 20180101; A61K 39/00 20130101; C07K 16/3046 20130101;
C07K 16/28 20130101; C07K 2317/567 20130101; A61K 2039/505
20130101; A61P 33/02 20180101; C07K 2317/73 20130101; C07K 16/1063
20130101; C07K 16/22 20130101; C07K 2317/565 20130101; A61K 31/7068
20130101; A61K 2300/00 20130101; A61K 39/3955 20130101; A61K
2300/00 20130101 |
International
Class: |
C07K 16/28 20060101
C07K016/28; C07K 16/30 20060101 C07K016/30 |
Claims
1. An isolated nucleic acid encoding a heavy chain variable region
polypeptide that specifically binds to PD-L1 comprising an HVR-H1,
HVR-H2 and HVR-H3 sequence, wherein: (a) the HVR-H1 sequence is
GFTFSX.sub.1SWIH (SEQ ID NO:1); (b) the HVR-H2 sequence is
AWIX.sub.2PYGGSX.sub.3YYADSVKG (SEQ ID NO:2); (c) the HVR-H3
sequence is RHWPGGFDY (SEQ ID NO:3); further wherein: X.sub.1 is D
or G; X.sub.2 is S or L; X.sub.3 is T or S.
2. The nucleic acid of claim 1 wherein X.sub.1 is D; X.sub.2 is S
and X.sub.3 is T.
3. The nucleic acid of claim 1 further comprising variable region
heavy chain framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs
according to the formula:
(HC-FR1)-(HVR-H1)-(HC-FR2)-(HVR-H2)-(HC-FR3)-(HVR-H3)-(HC-FR4).
4. The nucleic acid of claim 3 wherein the framework sequences are
human.
5. The nucleic acid of claim 4 wherein the framework sequences are
VH subgroup III consensus framework.
6. The nucleic acid of claim 5 wherein one or more of the framework
sequences is the following: TABLE-US-00025 HC-FR1 is (SEQ ID NO: 4)
EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS HC-FR2 is (SEQ ID NO: 5) WVRQAPGKGLEWV
HC-FR3 is (SEQ ID NO: 6) RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR HC-FR4 is
(SEQ ID NO: 7) WGQGTLVTVSA.
7. The nucleic acid of claim 1, further comprising a second nucleic
acid encoding a variable region light chain polypeptide comprising
an HVR-L1, HVR-L2 and HVR-L3, wherein: (a) the HVR-L1 sequence is
RASQX.sub.4X.sub.5X.sub.6TX.sub.7X.sub.8A (SEQ ID NOs:8); (b) the
HVR-L2 sequence is SASX.sub.9LX.sub.10S, and (SEQ ID NOs:9); (c)
the HVR-L3 sequence is QQX.sub.11X.sub.12X.sub.13X.sub.14PX.sub.15T
(SEQ ID NOs:10); further wherein: X.sub.4 is D or V; X.sub.5 is V
or I; X.sub.6 is S or N; X.sub.7 is A or F; X.sub.8 is V or L;
X.sub.9 is F or T; X.sub.10 is Y or A; X.sub.11 is Y, G, F, or S;
X.sub.12 is L, Y, F or W; X.sub.13 is Y, N, A, T, G, F or I;
X.sub.14 is H, V, P, T or I; X.sub.15 is A, W, R, P or T.
8. The nucleic acid of claim 7 wherein X.sub.4 is D; X.sub.5 is V;
X.sub.6 is S; X.sub.7 is A; X.sub.8 is V; X.sub.9 is F; X.sub.10 is
Y; X.sub.11 is Y; X.sub.12 is L; X.sub.13 is Y; X.sub.14 is H;
X.sub.15 is A.
9. The nucleic acid of claim 7 further comprising variable region
light chain framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs
according to the formula: (LC-FR1)-(HVR-L
1)-(LC-FR2)-(HVR-L2)-(LC-FR3)-(HVR-L3)-(LC-FR4).
10. The nucleic acid of claim 9 wherein the framework sequences are
human.
11. The nucleic acid of claim 10 wherein the framework sequences
are VL kappa I consensus framework.
12. The nucleic acid of claim 11 wherein one or more of the
framework sequences is the following: TABLE-US-00026 LC-FR1 is (SEQ
ID NO: 11) DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC; LC-FR2 is (SEQ ID NO: 12)
WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY; LC-FR3 is (SEQ ID NO: 13)
GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC; LC-FR4 is (SEQ ID NO: 14)
FGQGTKVEIKR.
13-24. (canceled)
25. An isolated nucleic acid encoding a light chain or a heavy
chain variable region sequence of an anti-PD-L1 antibody or antigen
binding fragment, wherein: (a) the heavy chain or antigen binding
fragment thereof further comprises and HVR-H1, HVR-H2 and an HVR-H3
sequence having at least 85% sequence identity to GFTFSDSWIH (SEQ
ID NO:15), AWISPYGGSTYYADSVKG (SEQ ID NO:16) and RHWPGGFDY (SEQ ID
NO:3), respectively, or (b) the light chain or antigen binding
fragment thereof further comprises an HVR-L1, HVR-L2 and an HVR-L3
sequence having at least 85% sequence identity to RASQDVSTAVA (SEQ
ID NO:17), SASFLYS (SEQ ID NO:18) and QQYLYHPAT (SEQ ID NO:19),
respectively.
26. The nucleic acid of claim 25, wherein sequence identity is
90%.
27. The nucleic acid of claim 26, wherein the sequence identity is
95%.
28. The nucleic acid of claim 25, wherein the anti-PD-L1 antibody
further comprises a VL and a VH framework region derived from a
human consensus sequence.
29. The nucleic acid of claim 28, wherein the VH sequence is
derived from a Kabat subgroup I, II, or III sequence.
30. The nucleic acid of claim 29, wherein the VH sequence is
derived from Kabat subgroup III.
31. The nucleic acid of claim 30, further wherein the heavy chain
framework sequences are juxtaposed between the HVRs according to
the formula:
(HC-FR1)-(HVR-H1)-(HC-FR2)-(HVR-H2)-(HC-FR3)-(HVR-H3)-(HC-FR4).
32. The nucleic acid of claim 31, wherein one or more of the heavy
chain framework sequences is the following: TABLE-US-00027 HC-FR1
is (SEQ ID NO: 4) EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS; HC-FR2 is (SEQ ID NO:
5) WVRQAPGKGLEWV; HC-FR3 is (SEQ ID NO: 6)
RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR; HC-FR4 is (SEQ ID NO: 7)
WGQGTLVTVSA.
33. The nucleic acid of claim 28, wherein the VL sequence is
derived from a Kabat kappa I, II, III or IV subgroup sequence.
34. The nucleic acid of claim 33, wherein the VL sequence is
derived from Kabat kappa I.
35. The nucleic acid of claim 33, further wherein the encoded
variable light chain framework sequences are juxtaposed between the
HVRs according to the formula:
(LC-FR1)-(HVR-L1)-(LC-FR2)-(HVR-L2)-(LC-FR3)-(HVR-L3)-(LC-FR4).
36. The nucleic acid of claim 35, wherein one or more of the light
chain framework sequences is the following: TABLE-US-00028 LC-FR1
is (SEQ ID NO: 11) DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC; LC-FR2 is (SEQ ID NO:
12) WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY; LC-FR3 is (SEQ ID NO: 13)
GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC,; and LC-FR4 is (SEQ ID NO: 14)
FGQGTKVEIKR.
37. The nucleic acid of claim 25, wherein the anti-PD-L1 antibody
comprises a constant region derived from a murine antibody.
38. The nucleic acid of claim 25, wherein the anti-PD-L1 antibody
comprises a constant region derived from a human antibody.
39. The nucleic acid of claim 37, wherein the constant region is
IgG2A.
40. The nucleic acid of claim 38, wherein the constant region is
IgG1.
41. The nucleic acid of claim 40, wherein the encoded antibody has
reduced or minimal effector function.
42. The nucleic acid of claim 41, wherein the minimal effector
function results from an effector-less Fc mutation.
43. The nucleic acid of claim 42, wherein the effector-less Fc
mutation is N297A.
44. The nucleic acid of claim 42, wherein the effector-less Fc
mutation is D265A/N297A.
45. An isolated nucleic acid encoding an anti-PD-L1 antibody or
antigen binding fragment thereof, wherein the antibody or antibody
fragment comprises a heavy chain and a light chain variable region
sequence, wherein: (a) the heavy chain comprises an HVR-H1, HVR-H2
and HVR-H3, wherein further: (i) the HVR-H1 sequence is
GFTFSX.sub.1SWIH (SEQ ID NO:1); (ii) the HVR-H2 sequence is
AWIX.sub.2PYGGSX.sub.3YYADSVKG (SEQ ID NO:2); (iii) the HVR-H3
sequence is RHWPGGFDY, and (SEQ ID NO:3); (b) the light chain
comprises an HVR-L1, HVR-L2 and HVR-L3, wherein further: (iv) the
HVR-L1 sequence is RASQX.sub.4X.sub.5X.sub.6TX.sub.7X.sub.8A (SEQ
ID NOs:8); (v) the HVR-L2 sequence is SASX.sub.9LX.sub.10S (SEQ ID
NOs:9); (vi) the HVR-L3 sequence is
QQX.sub.11X.sub.12X.sub.13X.sub.14PX.sub.15T (SEQ ID NOs:10);
wherein: X.sub.1 is D or G; X.sub.2 is S or L; X.sub.3 is T or S;
X.sub.4 may be D or V; X.sub.5 may be V or I; X.sub.6 may be S or
N; X.sub.7 may be A or F; X.sub.8 may be V or L; X.sub.9 may be F
or T; X.sub.10 may be Y or A; X.sub.11 may be Y, G, F, or S;
X.sub.12 may be L, Y, F or W; X.sub.13 may be Y, N, A, T, G, F or
I; X.sub.14 may be H, V, P, T or I; X.sub.15 may be A, W, R, P or
T.
46. The nucleic acid of claim 45 wherein X.sub.1 is D; X.sub.2 is S
and X.sub.3 is T.
47. The nucleic acid of claim 45, wherein X.sub.4=D, X.sub.5=V,
X.sub.6=5, X.sub.7=A and X.sub.8=V, X.sub.9=F, and X.sub.10=Y,
X.sub.11=Y, X.sub.12=L, X.sub.13=Y, X.sub.14=H and X.sub.15=A.
48. The nucleic acid of claim 45, wherein X.sub.1=D, X.sub.2=S and
X.sub.3=T, X.sub.4=D, X.sub.5=V, X.sub.6=S, X.sub.7=A and
X.sub.8=V, X.sub.9=F, and X.sub.10=Y, X.sub.11=Y, X.sub.12=L,
X.sub.13=Y, X.sub.14=H and X.sub.15=A.
49. The nucleic acid of claim 46, wherein the encoded variable
region heavy chain framework sequences are juxtaposed between the
HVRs according to the formula:
(HC-FR1)-(HVR-H1)-(HC-FR2)-(HVR-H2)-(HC-FR3)-(HVR-H3)-(HC-FR4).
50. The nucleic acid of claim 49, wherein the framework sequences
are human.
51. The nucleic acid of claim 50 wherein the framework sequences
are VH subgroup III consensus framework.
52. The nucleic acid of claim 51 wherein one or more of the
framework sequences is the following: TABLE-US-00029 HC-FR1 is (SEQ
ID NO: 4) EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS; HC-FR2 is (SEQ ID NO: 5)
WVRQAPGKGLEWV; HC-FR3 is (SEQ ID NO: 6)
RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR; HC-FR4 is (SEQ ID NO: 7)
WGQGTLVTVSA.
53. The nucleic acid of 47, wherein the encoded variable region
light chain framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs
according to the formula:
(LC-FR1)-(HVR-L1)-(LC-FR2)-(HVR-L2)-(LC-FR3)-(HVR-L3)-(LC-FR4).
54. The nucleic acid of claim 53 wherein the variable region light
chain framework sequences are VL kappa I consensus framework.
55. The nucleic acid of claim 54 wherein one or more of the
framework sequences is the following: TABLE-US-00030 LC-FR1 is (SEQ
ID NO: 11) DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC; LC-FR2 is (SEQ ID NO: 12)
WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY; LC-FR3 is (SEQ ID NO: 13)
GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC,; and LC-FR4 is (SEQ ID NO: 14)
FGQGTKVEIKR.
56. The nucleic acid of claim 48 wherein the antibody or antibody
fragment comprises: (a) variable region heavy chain framework
sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs according to the formula:
(HC-FR1)-(HVR-H1)-(HC-FR2)-(HVR-H2)-(HC-FR3)-(HVR-H3)-(HC-FR4), and
(b) variable region light chain framework sequences juxtaposed
between the HVRs according to the formula:
(LC-FR1)-(HVR-L1)-(LC-FR2)-(HVR-L2)-(LC-FR3)-(HVR-L3)-(LC-FR4).
wherein the variable heavy chain framework sequences are the
following: (i) HC-FR1 is EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS (SEQ ID NO:4);
(ii) HC-FR2 is WVRQAPGKGLEWV (SEQ ID NO:5); (iii) HC-FR3 is
RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR (SEQ ID NO:6); (iv) HC-FR4 is
WGQGTLVTVSA; and (SEQ ID NO:7); and further wherein the variable
light chain framework sequences are the following: (i) LC-FR1 is
DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC (SEQ ID NO:11); (ii) LC-FR2 is
WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY (SEQ ID NO:12); (iii) LC-FR3 is
GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC (SEQ ID NO:13); (iv) LC-FR4 is
FGQGTKVEIKR (SEQ ID NO:14).
57. The nucleic acid of claim 56 further comprising a human
constant region.
58. The nucleic acid of claim 57, wherein the constant region is
selected from the group consisting of IgG1, IgG2, IgG3 and
IgG4.
59. The nucleic acid of claim 58 wherein the constant region is
IgG1.
60. The nucleic acid of claim 59 having reduced or minimal effector
function.
61. The nucleic acid of claim 60, wherein the minimal effector
function results from an effector-less Fc mutation.
62. The nucleic acid of claim 61, wherein the effector-less Fc
mutation is N297A.
63. The nucleic acid of claim 61, wherein the effector-less Fc
mutation is D265A/N297A.
64. The nucleic acid of claim 60, wherein the minimal effector
function results from aglycosylation.
65. The nucleic acid of claim 56, further comprising a murine
constant region.
66. The nucleic acid of claim 65, wherein the constant region is
selected from the group consisting of IgG1, IgG2A, IgG2B and
IgG3.
67. The nucleic acid of claim 66, wherein the constant region is
IgG2A.
68. The nucleic acid of claim 67, which has reduced or minimal
effector function.
69. The nucleic acid of claim 68, wherein the minimal effector
function results from an effector-less Fc mutation.
70. The nucleic acid of claim 69, wherein the effector-less Fc
mutation is N297A.
71. The nucleic acid of claim 69, wherein the effector-less Fc
mutation is D265A/N297A.
72. The nucleic acid of claim 68, wherein the minimal effector
function results from aglycosylation.
73. An isolated nucleic acid encoding anti-PD-L1 antibody or
antigen binding fragment thereof, wherein the antibody or antibody
fragment comprises a heavy chain and light chain variable region
sequence, wherein: (a) the heavy chain comprises the sequence:
EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLS
CAASGFTFSDSWIHWVRQAPGKGLEWVAWISPYGGSTYYADSVKGRFTI
SADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCARRHWPGGFDYWGQGTLVTVS A (SEQ ID NO:20),
and (b) the light chain comprises the sequence:
DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC
RASQDVSTAVAWYQQKPGKAPKLLIYSASFLYSGVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTL
TISSLQPEDFATYYCQQYLYHPATFGQGTKVEIKR (SEQ ID NO:21).
74. The nucleic acid of claim 73 further comprising a human
constant region.
75. The nucleic acid of claim 74, wherein the constant region is
selected from the group consisting of IgG1, IgG2, IgG3 and
IgG4.
76. The nucleic acid of claim 75, wherein the constant region is
IgG1.
77. The nucleic acid of claim 76 having reduced or minimal effector
function.
78. The nucleic acid of claim 77, wherein the minimal effector
function results from an effector-less Fc mutation.
79. The nucleic acid of claim 78, wherein the effector-less Fc
mutation is N297A.
80. The nucleic acid of claim 78, wherein the effector-less Fc
mutation is D265A/N297A.
81. The nucleic acid of claim 77, wherein the minimal effector
function results from aglycosylation.
82. A vector comprising the nucleic acid of any of claims 1-12.
83. (canceled)
84. A vector comprising the nucleic acid of any of claims
25-44.
85. A vector comprising the nucleic acid of any of claims
45-72.
86. A vector comprising the nucleic acid of any of claims
73-81.
87. A host cell comprising the vector of claim 82.
88. A host cell comprising the vector of claim 84.
89. A host cell comprising the vector of claim 85.
90. A host cell comprising the vector of claim 86.
91. The host cell of any of claims 87-90, which is eukaryotic.
92. The host cell of claim 91, which is mammalian.
93. The host cell of claim 92, which is a Chinese Hamster Ovary
(CHO) cells.
94. The host cell of any of claims 87-90, which is prokaryotic.
95. The host cell of claim 94, which is E. coli.
96. A process for making an anti-PD-L1 antibody comprising
culturing the host cell of claim 93 under conditions suitable for
the expression of the vector encoding the anti-PD-L1 antibody or
antigen binding fragment, and recovering the antibody or fragment.
Description
RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application is a continuation of U.S. patent
application Ser. No. 14/610,593, filed on Jan. 30, 2015, which is a
continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/303,153, filed
on Jun. 12, 2014, which is a continuation of U.S. patent
application Ser. No. 14/062,851, filed on Oct. 24, 2013, which is a
continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/475,382, filed
on May 18, 2012, which is a division of U.S. patent application
Ser. No. 12/633,339, filed on Dec. 8, 2009, now issued as U.S. Pat.
No. 8,217,149, which claims the benefit of priority under 35 USC
119(e) of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/121,092 filed
Dec. 9, 2008, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by
reference in their entirety.
SEQUENCE LISTING
[0002] This application contains a Sequence Listing submitted via
EFS-Web and hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Said
ASCII copy, created on Sep. 2, 2015, is named
P04192-US-21SequenceListing.txt, and is 30,624 bytes in size.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
[0003] This invention relates generally to immune function and to
enhancing T-cell function, including the upregulation of
cell-mediated immune responses and to the treatment of T cell
dysfunctional disorders.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0004] Co-stimulation or the provision of two distinct signals to
T-cells is a widely accepted model of lymphocyte activation of
resting T lymphocytes by antigen-presenting cells (APCs). Lafferty
et al., Aust. J. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci. 53: 27-42 (1975). This model
further provides for the discrimination of self from non-self and
immune tolerance. Bretscher et al., Science 169: 1042-1049 (1970);
Bretscher, P.A., P.N.A.S. USA 96: 185-190 (1999); Jenkins et al.,
J. Exp. Med. 165: 302-319 (1987). The primary signal, or antigen
specific signal, is transduced through the T-cell receptor (TCR)
following recognition of foreign antigen peptide presented in the
context of the major histocompatibility-complex (MHC). The second
or co-stimulatory signal is delivered to T-cells by co-stimulatory
molecules expressed on antigen-presenting cells (APCs), and induce
T-cells to promote clonal expansion, cytokine secretion and
effector function. Lenschow et al., Ann. Rev. Immunol. 14:233
(1996). In the absence of co-stimulation, T-cells can become
refractory to antigen stimulation, do not mount an effective immune
response, and further may result in exhaustion or tolerance to
foreign antigens.
[0005] The simple two-signal model can be an oversimplification
because the strength of the TCR signal actually has a quantitative
influence on T-cell activation and differentiation. Viola et al.,
Science 273: 104-106 (1996); Sloan-Lancaster, Nature 363: 156-159
(1993). Moreover, T-cell activation can occur even in the absence
of co-stimulatory signal if the TCR signal strength is high. More
importantly, T-cells receive both positive and negative secondary
co-stimulatory signals. The regulation of such positive and
negative signals is critical to maximize the host's protective
immune responses, while maintaining immune tolerance and preventing
autoimmunity.
[0006] Negative secondary signals seem necessary for induction of
T-cell tolerance, while positive signals promote T-cell activation.
While the simple two-signal model still provides a valid
explanation for naive lymphocytes, a host's immune response is a
dynamic process, and co-stimulatory signals can also be provided to
antigen-exposed T-cells.
[0007] The mechanism of co-stimulation is of therapeutic interest
because the manipulation of co-stimulatory signals has shown to
provide a means to either enhance or terminate cell-based immune
response. Recently, it has been discovered that T cell dysfunction
or anergy occurs concurrently with an induced and sustained
expression of the inhibitory receptor, programmed death 1
polypeptide (PD-1). As a result, therapeutic targeting PD-1 and
other molecules which signal through interactions with PD-1, such
as programmed death ligand 1 (PD-L1) and programmed death ligand 2
(PD-L2) are an area of intense interest. The inhibition of PD-L1
signaling has been proposed as a means to enhance T cell immunity
for the treatment of cancer (e.g., tumor immunity) and infection,
including both acute and chronic (e.g., persistent) infection.
However, as an optimal therapeutic directed to a target in this
pathway has yet to be commercialized, a significant unmet medical
need exists.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0008] The present invention provides for anti-PD-L1 antibodies,
including nucleic acid encoding and compositions containing such
antibodies, and for their use to enhance T-cell function to
upregulate cell-mediated immune responses and for the treatment of
T cell dysfunctional disorders, including infection (e.g., acute
and chronic) and tumor immunity.
[0009] In one embodiment, the invention provides for an isolated
heavy chain variable region polypeptide comprising an HVR-H1,
HVR-H2 and HVR-H3 sequence, wherein:
TABLE-US-00001 (SEQ ID NO: 1) (a) the HVR-H1 sequence is
GFTFSX.sub.1SWIH; (SEQ ID NO: 2) (b) the HVR-H2 sequence is
AWIX.sub.2PYGGSX.sub.3YYADSVKG; (SEQ ID NO: 3) (c) the HVR-H3
sequence is RHWPGGFDY;
[0010] further wherein: X.sub.1 is D or G; X.sub.2 is S or L;
X.sub.3 is T or S.
[0011] In one specific aspect, X.sub.1 is D; X.sub.2 is S and
X.sub.3 is T. In another aspect, the polypeptide further comprises
variable region heavy chain framework sequences juxtaposed between
the HVRs according to the formula:
(HC-FR1)-(HVR-H1)-(HC-FR2)-(HVR-H2)-(HC-FR3)-(HVR-H3)-(HC-FR4). In
yet another aspect, the framework sequences are derived from human
consensus framework sequences. In a further aspect, the framework
sequences are VH subgroup III consensus framework. In a still
further aspect, at least one of the framework sequences is the
following:
TABLE-US-00002 (SEQ ID NO: 4) HC-FR1 is EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS
(SEQ ID NO: 5) HC-FR2 is WVRQAPGKGLEWV (SEQ ID NO: 6) HC-FR3 is
RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR (SEQ ID NO: 7) HC-FR4 is
WGQGTLVTVSA.
[0012] In a still further aspect, the heavy chain polypeptide is
further combined with a variable region light chain comprising an
HVR-L1, HVR-L2 and HVR-L3, wherein:
TABLE-US-00003 (SEQ ID NOs: 8) (a) the HVR-L1 sequence is
RASQX.sub.4X.sub.5X.sub.6TX.sub.7X.sub.8A; (SEQ ID NOs: 9) (b) the
HVR-L2 sequence is SASX.sub.9LX.sub.10S,; (SEQ ID NOs: 10) (c) the
HVR-L3 sequence is
QQX.sub.11X.sub.12X.sub.13X.sub.14PX.sub.15T;
[0013] further wherein: X.sub.4 is D or V; X.sub.5 is V or I;
X.sub.6 is S or N; X.sub.7 is A or F; X.sub.8 is V or L; X.sub.9 is
F or T; X.sub.10 is Y or A; X.sub.11 is Y, G, F, or S; X.sub.12 is
L, Y, F or W; X.sub.13 is Y, N, A, T, G, F or I; X.sub.14 is H, V,
P, T or I; X.sub.15 is A, W, R, P or T.
[0014] In a still further aspect, X.sub.4 is D; X.sub.5 is V;
X.sub.6 is 5; X.sub.7 is A; X.sub.8 is V; X.sub.9 is F; X.sub.10 is
Y; X.sub.11 is Y; X.sub.12 is L; X.sub.13 is Y; X.sub.14 is H;
X.sub.15 is A. In a still further aspect, the light chain further
comprises variable region light chain framework sequences
juxtaposed between the HVRs according to the formula:
(LC-FR1)-(HVR-L1)-(LC-FR2)-(HVR-L2)-(LC-FR3)-(HVR-L3)-(LC-FR4). In
a still further aspect, the framework sequences are derived from
human consensus framework sequences. In a still further aspect, the
framework sequences are VL kappa I consensus framework. In a still
further aspect, at least one of the framework sequence is the
following:
TABLE-US-00004 (SEQ ID NO: 11) LC-FR1 is DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC
(SEQ ID NO: 12) LC-FR2 is WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY (SEQ ID NO: 13) LC-FR3 is
GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC (SEQ ID NO: 14) LC-FR4 is
FGQGTKVEIKR.
[0015] In another embodiment, the invention provides an isolated
anti-PD-L1 antibody or antigen binding fragment comprising a heavy
chain and a light chain variable region sequence, wherein: [0016]
(a) the heavy chain comprises and HVR-H1, HVR-H2 and HVR-H3,
wherein further:
TABLE-US-00005 [0016] (SEQ ID NO: 1) (i) the HVR-H1 sequence is
GFTFSX.sub.1SWIH; (SEQ ID NO: 2) (ii) the HVR-H2 sequence is
AWIX.sub.2PYGGSX.sub.3YYADSVKG (SEQ ID NO: 3) (iii) the HVR-H3
sequence is RHWPGGFDY, and
[0017] (b) the light chain comprises and HVR-L1, HVR-L2 and HVR-L3,
wherein further:
TABLE-US-00006 [0017] (SEQ ID NOs: 8) (i) the HVR-L1 sequence is
RASQX.sub.4X.sub.5X.sub.6TX.sub.7X.sub.8A (SEQ ID NOs : 9) (ii) the
HVR-L2 sequence is SASX.sub.9LX.sub.10S; and (SEQ ID NOs: 10) (iii)
the HVR-L3 sequence is
QQX.sub.11X.sub.12X.sub.13X.sub.14PX.sub.15T;
[0018] Further wherein: X.sub.1 is D or G; X.sub.2 is S or L;
X.sub.3 is T or S; X.sub.4 is D or V; X.sub.5 is V or I; X.sub.6 is
S or N; X.sub.7 is A or F; X.sub.8 is V or L; X.sub.9 is F or T;
X.sub.10 is Y or A; X.sub.11 is Y, G, F, or S; X.sub.12 is L, Y, F
or W; X.sub.13 is Y, N, A, T, G, F or I; X.sub.14 is H, V, P, T or
I; X.sub.15 is A, W, R, P or T.
[0019] In a specific aspect, X.sub.1 is D; X.sub.2 is S and X.sub.3
is T. In another aspect, X.sub.4 is D; X.sub.5 is V; X.sub.6 is 5;
X.sub.7 is A; X.sub.8 is V; X.sub.9 is F; X.sub.10 is Y; X.sub.11
is Y; X.sub.12 is L; X.sub.13 is Y; X.sub.14 is H; X.sub.15 is A.
In yet another aspect, X.sub.1 is D; X.sub.2 is S and X.sub.3 is T,
X.sub.4 is D; X.sub.5 is V; X.sub.6 is 5; X.sub.7 is A; X.sub.8 is
V; X.sub.9 is F; X.sub.10 is Y; X.sub.11 is Y; X.sub.12 is L;
X.sub.13 is Y; X.sub.14 is H and X.sub.15 is A.
[0020] In a further aspect, the heavy chain variable region
comprises one or more framework sequences juxtaposed between the
HVRs as:
(HC-FR1)-(HVR-H1)-(HC-FR2)-(HVR-H2)-(HC-FR3)-(HVR-H3)-(HC-FR4), and
the light chain variable regions comprises one or more framework
sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs as:
(LC-FR1)-(HVR-L1)-(LC-FR2)-(HVR-L2)-(LC-FR3)-(HVR-L3)-(LC-FR4). In
a still further aspect, the framework sequences are derived from
human consensus framework sequences. In a still further aspect, the
heavy chain framework sequences are derived from a Kabat subgroup
I, II, or III sequence. In a still further aspect, the heavy chain
framework sequence is a VH subgroup III consensus framework. In a
still further aspect, one or more of the heavy chain framework
sequences is the following:
TABLE-US-00007 HC-FR1 (SEQ ID NO: 4) EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS
HC-FR2 (SEQ ID NO: 5) WVRQAPGKGLEWV HC-FR3 (SEQ ID NO: 6)
RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR HC-FR4 (SEQ ID NO: 7)
WGQGTLVTVSA.
[0021] In a still further aspect, the light chain framework
sequences are derived from a Kabat kappa I, II, II or IV subgroup
sequence. In a still further aspect, the light chain framework
sequences are VL kappa I consensus framework. In a still further
aspect, one or more of the light chain framework sequences is the
following:
TABLE-US-00008 LC-FR1 (SEQ ID NO: 11) DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC
LC-FR2 (SEQ ID NO: 12) WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY LC-FR3 (SEQ ID NO: 13)
GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC LC-FR4 (SEQ ID NO: 14)
FGQGTKVEIKR.
[0022] In a still further specific aspect, the antibody further
comprises a human or murine constant region. In a still further
aspect, the human constant region is selected from the group
consisting of IgG1, IgG2, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4. In a still further
specific aspect, the human constant region is IgG1. In a still
further aspect, the murine constant region is selected from the
group consisting of IgG1, IgG2A, IgG2B, IgG3. In a still further
aspect, the murine constant region is IgG2A. In a still further
specific aspect, the antibody has reduced or minimal effector
function. In a still further specific aspect the minimal effector
function results from an "effector-less Fc mutation" or
aglycosylation. In still a further embodiment, the effector-less Fc
mutation is an N297A or D265A/N297A substitution in the constant
region.
[0023] In yet another embodiment, the invention provides for an
anti-PD-L1 antibody comprising a heavy chain and a light chain
variable region sequence, wherein: [0024] (a) the heavy chain
further comprises and HVR-H1, HVR-H2 and an HVR-H3 sequence having
at least 85% sequence identity to GFTFSDSWIH (SEQ ID NO:15),
AWISPYGGSTYYADSVKG (SEQ ID NO:16) and RHWPGGFDY (SEQ ID NO:3),
respectively, or [0025] (b) the light chain further comprises an
HVR-L1, HVR-L2 and an HVR-L3 sequence having at least 85% sequence
identity to RASQDVSTAVA (SEQ ID NO:17), SASFLYS (SEQ ID NO:18) and
QQYLYHPAT (SEQ ID NO:19), respectively.
[0026] In a specific aspect, the sequence identity is 86%, 87%,
88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100%.
In another aspect, the heavy chain variable region comprises one or
more framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs as:
(HC-FR1)-(HVR-H1)-(HC-FR2)-(HVR-H2)-(HC-FR3)-(HVR-H3)-(HC-FR4), and
the light chain variable regions comprises one or more framework
sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs as:
(LC-FR1)-(HVR-L1)-(LC-FR2)-(HVR-L2)-(LC-FR3)-(HVR-L3)-(LC-FR4). In
yet another aspect, the framework sequences are derived from human
consensus framework sequences. In a still further aspect, the heavy
chain framework sequences are derived from a Kabat subgroup I, II,
or III sequence. In a still further aspect, the heavy chain
framework sequence is a VH subgroup III consensus framework. In a
still further aspect, one or more of the heavy chain framework
sequences is the following:
TABLE-US-00009 HC-FR1 (SEQ ID NO: 4) EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS
HC-FR2 (SEQ ID NO: 5) WVRQAPGKGLEWV HC-FR3 (SEQ ID NO: 6)
RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR HC-FR4 (SEQ ID NO: 7)
WGQGTLVTVSA.
[0027] In a still further aspect, the light chain framework
sequences are derived from a Kabat kappa I, II, II or IV subgroup
sequence. In a still further aspect, the light chain framework
sequences are VL kappa I consensus framework. In a still further
aspect, one or more of the light chain framework sequences is the
following:
TABLE-US-00010 LC-FR1 (SEQ ID NO: 11) DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC
LC-FR2 (SEQ ID NO: 12) WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY LC-FR3 (SEQ ID NO: 13)
GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC LC-FR4 (SEQ ID NO: 14)
FGQGTKVEIKR.
[0028] In a still further specific aspect, the antibody further
comprises a human or murine constant region. In a still further
aspect, the human constant region is selected from the group
consisting of IgG1, IgG2, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4. In a still further
specific aspect, the human constant region is IgG1. In a still
further aspect, the murine constant region is selected from the
group consisting of IgG1, IgG2A, IgG2B, IgG3. In a still further
aspect, the murine constant region if IgG2A. In a still further
specific aspect, the antibody has reduced or minimal effector
function. In a still further specific aspect the minimal effector
function results from an "effector-less Fc mutation" or
aglycosylation. In still a further embodiment, the effector-less Fc
mutation is an N297A or D265A/N297A substitution in the constant
region.
[0029] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for an
isolated anti-PD-L1 antibody comprising a heavy chain and a light
chain variable region sequence, wherein: [0030] (a) the heavy chain
sequence has at least 85% sequence identity to the heavy chain
sequence:
TABLE-US-00011 [0030] (SEQ ID NO: 20)
EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAASGFTFSDSWIHWVRQAPGKGLEWVA
WISPYGGSTYYADSVKGRFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR
RHWPGGFDYWGQGTLVTVSA,
or [0031] (b) the light chain sequences has at least 85% sequence
identity to the light chain sequence:
TABLE-US-00012 [0031] (SEQ ID NO: 21)
DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITCRASQDVSTAVAWYQQKPGKAPKLLIY
SASFLYSGVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYCQQYLYHPATF GQGTKVEIKR.
[0032] In a specific aspect, the sequence identity is 86%, 87%,
88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100%.
In another aspect, the heavy chain variable region comprises one or
more framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs as:
(HC-FR1)-(HVR-H1)-(HC-FR2)-(HVR-H2)-(HC-FR3)-(HVR-H3)-(HC-FR4), and
the light chain variable regions comprises one or more framework
sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs as:
(LC-FR1)-(HVR-L1)-(LC-FR2)-(HVR-L2)-(LC-FR3)-(HVR-L3)-(LC-FR4). In
yet another aspect, the framework sequences are derived from human
consensus framework sequences. In a further aspect, the heavy chain
framework sequences are derived from a Kabat subgroup I, II, or III
sequence. In a still further aspect, the heavy chain framework
sequence is a VH subgroup III consensus framework. In a still
further aspect, one or more of the heavy chain framework sequences
is the following:
TABLE-US-00013 HC-FR1 (SEQ ID NO: 4) EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS
HC-FR2 (SEQ ID NO: 5) WVRQAPGKGLEWV HC-FR3 (SEQ ID NO: 6)
RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR HC-FR4 (SEQ ID NO: 7)
WGQGTLVTVSA.
[0033] In a still further aspect, the light chain framework
sequences are derived from a Kabat kappa I, II, II or IV subgroup
sequence. In a still further aspect, the light chain framework
sequences are VL kappa I consensus framework. In a still further
aspect, one or more of the light chain framework sequences is the
following:
TABLE-US-00014 LC-FR1 (SEQ ID NO: 11) DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC
LC-FR2 (SEQ ID NO: 12) WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY LC-FR3 (SEQ ID NO: 13)
GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC LC-FR4 (SEQ ID NO: 14)
FGQGTKVEIKR.
[0034] In a still further specific aspect, the antibody further
comprises a human or murine constant region. In a still further
aspect, the human constant region is selected from the group
consisting of IgG1, IgG2, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4. In a still further
specific aspect, the human constant region is IgG1. In a still
further aspect, the murine constant region is selected from the
group consisting of IgG1, IgG2A, IgG2B, IgG3. In a still further
aspect, the murine constant region if IgG2A. In a still further
specific aspect, the antibody has reduced or minimal effector
function. In a still further specific aspect, the minimal effector
function results from production in prokaryotic cells. In a still
further specific aspect the minimal effector function results from
an "effector-less Fc mutation" or aglycosylation. In still a
further embodiment, the effector-less Fc mutation is an N297A or
D265A/N297A substitution in the constant region.
[0035] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for
compositions comprising any of the above described anti-PD-L1
antibodies in combination with at least one
pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier.
[0036] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for
isolated nucleic acid encoding a light chain or a heavy chain
variable region sequence of an anti-PD-L1 antibody, wherein: [0037]
(a) the heavy chain further comprises and HVR-H1, HVR-H2 and an
HVR-H3 sequence having at least 85% sequence identity to GFTFSDSWIH
(SEQ ID NO:15), AWISPYGGSTYYADSVKG (SEQ ID NO:16) and RHWPGGFDY
(SEQ ID NO:3), respectively, and [0038] (b) the light chain further
comprises an HVR-L1, HVR-L2 and an HVR-L3 sequence having at least
85% sequence identity to RASQDVSTAVA (SEQ ID NO:17), SASFLYS (SEQ
ID NO:18) and QQYLYHPAT (SEQ ID NO:19), respectively.
[0039] In a specific aspect, the sequence identity is 86%, 87%,
88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100%.
In aspect, the heavy chain variable region comprises one or more
framework sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs as:
(HC-FR1)-(HVR-H1)-(HC-FR2)-(HVR-H2)-(HC-FR3)-(HVR-H3)-(HC-FR4), and
the light chain variable regions comprises one or more framework
sequences juxtaposed between the HVRs as:
(LC-FR1)-(HVR-L1)-(LC-FR2)-(HVR-L2)-(LC-FR3)-(HVR-L3)-(LC-FR4). In
yet another aspect, the framework sequences are derived from human
consensus framework sequences. In a further aspect, the heavy chain
framework sequences are derived from a Kabat subgroup I, II, or III
sequence. In a still further aspect, the heavy chain framework
sequence is a VH subgroup III consensus framework. In a still
further aspect, one or more of the heavy chain framework sequences
is the following:
TABLE-US-00015 HC-FR1 (SEQ ID NO: 4) EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS
HC-FR2 (SEQ ID NO: 5) WVRQAPGKGLEWV HC-FR3 (SEQ ID NO: 6)
RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR HC-FR4 (SEQ ID NO: 7)
WGQGTLVTVSA.
[0040] In a still further aspect, the light chain framework
sequences are derived from a Kabat kappa I, II, II or IV subgroup
sequence. In a still further aspect, the light chain framework
sequences are VL kappa I consensus framework. In a still further
aspect, one or more of the light chain framework sequences is the
following:
TABLE-US-00016 LC-FR1 (SEQ ID NO: 11) DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC
LC-FR2 (SEQ ID NO: 12) WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY LC-FR3 (SEQ ID NO: 13)
GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC LC-FR4 (SEQ ID NO: 14)
FGQGTKVEIKR.
[0041] In a still further specific aspect, the antibody further
comprises a human or murine constant region. In a still further
aspect, the human constant region is selected from the group
consisting of IgG1, IgG2, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4. In a still further
specific aspect, the human constant region is IgG1. In a still
further aspect, the murine constant region is selected from the
group consisting of IgG1, IgG2A, IgG2B, IgG3. In a still further
aspect, the murine constant region if IgG2A. In a still further
specific aspect, the antibody has reduced or minimal effector
function. In a still further specific aspect, the minimal effector
function results from production in prokaryotic cells. In a still
further specific aspect the minimal effector function results from
an "effector-less Fc mutation" or aglycosylation. In still a
further aspect, the effector-less Fc mutation is an N297A or
D265A/N297A substitution in the constant region.
[0042] In a still further aspect, the nucleic acid further
comprises a vector suitable for expression of the nucleic acid
encoding any of the previously described anti-PD-L1 antibodies. In
a still further specific aspect, the vector further comprises a
host cell suitable for expression of the nucleic acid. In a still
further specific aspect, the host cell is a eukaryotic cell or a
prokaryotic cell. In a still further specific aspect, the
eukaryotic cell is a mammalian cell, such as Chinese Hamster Ovary
(CHO).
[0043] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for a
process of making an anti-PD-L1 antibody or antigen binding
fragment thereof, comprising culturing a host cell containing
nucleic acid encoding any of the previously described anti-PD-L1
antibodies or antigen-binding fragment in a form suitable for
expression, under conditions suitable to produce such antibody or
fragment, and recovering the antibody or fragment.
[0044] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for a
composition comprising an anti-PD-L1 antibody or antigen binding
fragment thereof as provided herein and at least one
pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
[0045] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides an
article of manufacture comprising a container enclosing a
therapeutically effective amount of a composition disclosed herein
and a package insert indicating use for the treatment of a T-cell
dysfunctional disorder.
[0046] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for an
article of manufacture comprising any of the above described
anti-PD-L1 compositions in combination with at least one BNCA
molecules. In one aspect, the BNCA molecules is an antibody,
antigen binding antibody fragment, BNCA oligopeptide, BNCA RNAi or
BNCA small molecule. In another aspect, the B7 negative
costimulatory molecule is selected from the group consisting of:
CTLA-4, PD-1, PD-L1, PD-L2, B7.1, B7-H3 and B7-H4.
[0047] In a still further embodiment, the article of manufacture
comprises any of the above described anti-PD-L1 compositions in
combination with a chemotherapeutic agent. In one aspect, the
chemotherapeutic agent is gemcitabine.
[0048] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for an
article of manufacture comprising any of the above described
anti-PD-L1 antibodies in combination with one or more agonists of a
positive costimulatory molecule. In one aspect, a positive
costimulatory molecule is a B7 family costimulatory molecule. In
another aspect the positive costimulatory molecule is selected from
the group consisting of: CD28, CD80, CD86, ICOS/ICOSL. In yet
another aspect, the positive costimulatory molecule is a TNFR
family costimulatory molecule. In a further aspect, the TNFR
costimulatory molecule is selected form the group consisting of:
OX40/OX40L, 4-1BB/4-1BBL, CD27/CD27L, CD30/CD30L and HVEM/LIGHT,
and soluble fragments, constructs and agonist antibodies
thereof.
[0049] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for an
article of manufacture comprising any of the above described
anti-PD-L1 antibodies in combination with one or more antibiotics.
In one aspect, the antibiotic is selected from the group consisting
of an anti-viral agent, anti-bacterial agent, anti-fungal agent,
anti-protozoan agent.
[0050] In another aspect the anti-viral agent is selected from the
group consisting of reverse transcriptase inhibitors, protease
inhibitors, integrase inhibitors, entry or fusion inhibitors,
maturation inhibitors, viral release inhibitors, immune response
enhancers, anti-viral synergistic enhancers, vaccines, hepatic
agonists and herbal therapies. In yet another aspect, the
combination comprises one or more categories of anti-viral
agents.
[0051] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for an
article of manufacture comprising any of the above described
anti-PD-L1 antibodies in combination with one or more vaccines.
[0052] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for a
method of enhancing T-cell function comprising administering an
effective amount of any of the above described anti-PD-L1
antibodies or compositions. In one aspect, the anti-PD-L1 antibody
or composition renders dysfunctional T-cells non-dysfunctional.
[0053] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides for a
method of treating a T-cell dysfunctional disorder comprising
administering a therapeutically effective amount of any of the
above described anti-PD-L1 antibodies or compositions. In one
specific aspect, the T-cell dysfunctional disorder is infection or
tumor immunity. In another aspect the infection is acute or
chronic. In another aspect, the chronic infection is persistent,
latent or slow. In yet another aspect, the chronic infection
results from a pathogen selected from the group consisting of
bacteria, virus, fungi and protozoan. In a further aspect, the
pathogen level in the host is reduced. In a still further aspect,
the method further comprises treatment with a vaccine. In a still
further aspect, the method further comprises treatment with an
antibiotic. In a still further aspect, the pathogen is a bacteria,
and the method further comprises the administration of an
antibacterial agent. In a still further aspect, the bacteria is
selected from the group consisting of: Mycobacterium spp.,
Salmonella spp., Listeria spp., Streptococcus spp., Haemophilus,
spp., Neisseria spp., Klebsiella spp., Borrelia spp., Bacterioides
fragillis, Treponema spp., and Helicobacter pylori. In a still
further aspect, the pathogen is a virus, and the method further
comprises the administration of an anti-viral agent. In a still
further aspect, the virus is selected from the group consisting of:
hepatitis-B, -C, herpes simplex virus-I, -II, human
immunodeficiency virus-I, -II, cytomegalovirus, Eppstein Barr
virus, human papillomavirus, human T lymphotrophic viruses, -I,
-II, varicella zoster. In a still further aspect, the pathogen is a
fungus, and the method further comprises the administration of an
anti-fungal agent. In a still further aspect, the disorder is
selected from the group consisting of: aspergilosis, blastomycosis,
candidiasis albicans, coccidioiodmycosis immitis, histoplasmosis,
paracoccidioiomycosis, microsporidiosis. In a still further aspect,
the pathogen is a protozoan, and the method further comprises the
administration of an anti-protozoan agent. In a still further
aspect, the disorder is selected from the group consisting of:
leishmaniasis, plasmodiosis (i.e., malaria), cryptosporidiosis,
toxoplasmosis, trypanosomiasis, and helminth infections, including
those resulting from trematodes (e.g., schistosomiasis), cestodes
(e.g., echinococcosis) and nemotodes (e.g., trchinosis, ascariasis,
filariosis and strongylodiosis).
[0054] In a still further aspect, the T-cell dysfunctional disorder
is tumor immunity. In a still further aspect, the PD-L1 antibody or
composition is combined with a treatment regimen further comprising
a traditional therapy selected from the group consisting of:
radiation therapy, chemotherapy, targeted therapy, immunotherapy,
hormonal therapy, angiogenesis inhibition and palliative care. In a
still further specific aspect, the chemotherapy treatment is
selected from the group consisting of: gemcitabine,
cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, paclitaxel, cisplatin. In a still
further specific aspect, the tumor immunity results from a cancer
selected from the group consisting of: breast, lung, colon,
ovarian, melanoma, bladder, kidney, liver, salivary, stomach,
gliomas, thyroid, thymic, epithelial, head and neck cancers,
gastric, and pancreatic cancer.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0055] FIG. 1 is a graphical illustration depicting costimulation
of T-cells by the B7 family of cell surface molecules.
[0056] FIG. 2 is a schematic showing the experimental design of the
PMEL/B16 T-cell stimulation assay.
[0057] FIG. 3 is a bar graph showing the effect of anti-PD-L1 Ab on
antigen-specific T cell function through enhanced IFN-.gamma.
production in PMEL CD8+ T cells in response to melanocyte peptide
gp100. Both the percentage of IFN-.gamma. producing CD8+ T-cells
and their levels of IFN-.gamma. production are increased during
stimulation in the presence of the anti-PD-L1 antibody.
[0058] FIG. 4 is a bar graph showing the effect of anti-PD-L1 Ab on
antigen-specific T cell function through enhancement in
proliferation of Ova-specific CD4+ T cells by the anti-PD-L1 Ab
YW243.55.S1 in a secondary stimulation with Ova-pulsed A20 B
cells/mPD-L1 APCs.
[0059] FIG. 5 is a series of FACS plots showing the enhancement in
proliferation of human CD8 T cells by anti-PD-L1 antibody
YW243.55S1 in a Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction. The percent of
proliferating cells as measured by the dilution in intensity of
CFSE is also reported.
[0060] FIG. 6 is a schematic of the experimental design of the
treatment of chronic LCMV with chimeric form of anti-PD-L1 Ab
YW243.55S70. Arrows designate the timing of the 6 doses of
anti-PD-L1 begun 14 days post infection with 2.times.10.sup.6 pfu
Clone 13 LCMV.
[0061] FIGS. 7A and 7B are graphs showing in enhanced CD8 effector
function in cells ex vivo following in vivo treatment of chronic
LCMV infection by anti-PD-L1 Ab, YW243.55.S70. Blockade of PD-L1 by
YW243.55.S70 increased degranulation of CD8.sup.+ T cells (as
measured by increase in surface CD107A) (FIG. 7A) and increased the
% IFN-gamma producing cells in response to LCMV peptide gp33 (FIG.
7B). The frequency of gp33-specific cells is revealed by staining
with H2-Db gp33 pentamers.
[0062] FIGS. 8A and 8B show the reduction in blood and tissue LCMV
titers in chronic LCMV infection following in vivo treatment with
anti-PD-L1 antibody. In FIG. 8A, viral titers from the various
indicated tissues are analyzed at Days 21 and 28, one and two weeks
after Ab treatment, respectively. In FIG. 8B, serum viral titers
are analyzed on Days 0, 7, 14, 21 and 28, with LCMV inoculation
occurring on day 0 and treatment commencing on day 14.
[0063] FIG. 9A shows a significant reduction in MC38.Ova colon
carcinoma tumor growth as a result of application of anti-PD-L1
antibody following therapeutic treatment of established tumors
(treatment begun at Day 14, when tumor is 250 mm.sup.3). FIG. 9B is
a histogram showing surface levels of PD-L1 expression on MC38.Ova
cells in tissue culture as measured by flow cytometry. PD-L2 is not
expressed by MC38.Ova cells.
[0064] FIG. 10 is a graph showing the effect of PD-L1 blockade
treatment alone and in combination with either anti-VEGF or
Gemcitabine on the growth of MC38.Ova tumors in C57BL/6 mice.
[0065] FIG. 11A-1, FIG. 11A-2, FIG. 11A-3, FIG. 11B-1, FIG. 11B-2,
and FIG. 11B-3 are the heavy and light chain variable region
sequences, respectively, of 11 anti-PD-L1 antibodies identified by
phage display. The shaded bars show CDRs with various definitions,
while the boxed areas show the extent of the HVRs.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
[0066] All references mentioned herein are specifically
incorporated by reference.
General Techniques
[0067] The practice of the present invention will employ, unless
otherwise indicated, conventional techniques of molecular biology
(including recombinant techniques), microbiology, cell biology,
biochemistry and immunology, which are within the skill of the art.
Such techniques are explained fully in the literature, such as,
Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, second edition (Sambrook et
al., 1989); Oligonucleotide Synthesis (M. J. Gait, ed., 1984);
Animal Cell Culture (R. I. Freshney, ed., 1987); Methods in
Enzymology (Academic Press, Inc.); Current Protocols in Molecular
Biology (F. M. Ausubel et al., eds 1987, and periodic updates);
PCR: The Polymerase Chain Reaction, (Mullis et al., ed., 1994); A
Practical Guide to Molecular Cloning (Perbal Bernard V., 1988);
Phage Display: A Laboratory Manual (Barbas et al., 2001).
I. HOST IMMUNITY
[0068] A. Lymphocyte Development and Activation
[0069] The two major types of lymphocytes in humans are T
(thymus-derived) and B (bone marrow derived. These cells are
derived from hematopoietic stem cells in the bone marrow and fetal
liver that have committed to the lymphoid development pathway. The
progeny of these stem cells follow divergent pathways to mature
into either B or T lymphocytes. Human B-lymphocyte development
takes place entirely within the bone marrow. T cells, on the other
hand, develop from immature precursors that leave the marrow and
travel through the bloodstream to the thymus, where they
proliferate and differentiate into mature T lymphocytes.
[0070] Mature lymphocytes that emerge from the thymus or bone
marrow are in a quiescent, or "resting" state, i.e., they are
mitotically inactive. When dispersed into the bloodstream, these
"naive" or "virgin" lymphocytes, travel into various secondary or
peripheral lymphoid organs, such as the spleen, lymph nodes or
tonsils. Most virgin lymphocytes have an inherently short life span
and die without a few days after leaving the marrow or thymus.
However, if such a cell receives signals that indicate the presence
of an antigen, they may activate and undergo successive rounds of
cell division. Some of the resulting progeny cells then revert to
the resting state to become memory lymphocytes-B and T cells that
are essentially primed for the next encounter with the stimulating
allergen. The other progeny of activated virgin lymphocytes are
effector cells, which survive for only a few days, but carry out
specific defensive activities.
[0071] Lymphocyte activation refers to an ordered series of events
through which a resting lymphocyte passes as it is stimulated to
divide and produce progeny, some of which become effector cells. A
full response includes both the induction of cell proliferation
(mitogenesis) and the expression of immunologic functions.
Lymphocytes become activated when specific ligands bind to
receptors on their surfaces. The ligands are different for T cells
and B cells, but the resulting intracellular physiological
mechanisms are similar.
[0072] Some foreign antigens themselves can induce lymphocyte
activation, especially large polymeric antigens that cross-link
surface immunoglobulins on B-cells, or other glycoproteins on
T-cells. However, most antigens are not polymeric and even direct
binding to B-cells in large numbers fail to result in activation.
These more common antigens activate B cells when they are
co-stimulated with nearby activated helper T-lymphocytes. Such
stimulation may occur from lymphokines secreted by the T-cell, but
is transmitted most efficiently by direct contact of the B cell
with T-cell surface proteins that interact with certain B-cell
surface receptors to generate a secondary signal.
[0073] B. T-Cells
[0074] T lymphocytes do not express immunoglobulins, but, instead
detect the presence of foreign substances by way of surface
proteins called T-cell receptors (TCR). These receptors recognize
antigens by either direct contact or through influencing the
activity of other immune cells. Together with macrophages, T cells
are the primary cell type involved in the cell-mediated
immunity.
[0075] Unlike B-cells, T-cells can detect foreign substances only
in specific contexts. In particular, T-lymphocytes will recognize a
foreign protein only if it first cleaved into small peptides, which
are then displayed on the surface of a second host cell, called an
antigen-presenting cell (APC). Many types of host cells can present
antigens under some conditions but certain types are more
specifically adapted for this purpose and are particularly
important in controlling T-cell activity, including macrophages and
other B-cells. Antigen presentation depends in part on specific
proteins, called major histocompatibility complex (MHC) proteins,
on the surface of the presenting cells. Thus, to stimulate
cell-mediated immunity, foreign peptides must be presented to
T-cells in combination with MHC peptides, and this combination must
be recognized by a T-cell receptor.
[0076] There are two significant T-cell subsets: cytotoxic T
lymphocytes (T.sub.c cells or CTLs) and helper T cells (T.sub.H)
cells, which can roughly be identified on the basis of cell surface
expression of the marker CD8 and CD4. T.sub.c cells are important
in viral defense, and can kill viruses directly by recognizing
certain cell surface expressed viral peptides. T.sub.H cells
promote proliferation, maturation and immunologic function of other
cell types, e.g., lymphokine secretion to control activities of B
cells, macrophages and cytotoxic T cells. Both virgin and memory
T-lymphocytes ordinarily remain in the resting state, and in this
state they do not exhibit significant helper or cytotoxic activity.
When activated, these cells undergo several rounds of mitotic
division to produce daughter cells. Some of these daughter cells
return to the resting state as memory cells, but others become
effector cells that actively express helper or cytotoxic activity.
These daughter cells resemble their parents: CD4+ cells can only
product CD4+ progeny, while CD8+ cells yield only CD8+ progeny.
Effector T-cells express cell surface markers that are not
expressed on resting T-cells, such as CD25, CD28, CD29, CD40L,
transferrin receptors and class II MHC proteins. When the
activating stimuli is withdrawn, cytotoxic or helper activity
gradually subsides over a period of several days as the effector
cells either die or revert to the resting state.
[0077] Similar to B-cell activation, T-lymphocyte responses to most
antigens also require two types of simultaneous stimuli. The first
is the antigen, which if appropriately displayed by MHC proteins on
an antigen-presenting cell, can be recognized and bound by T-cell
receptors. While this antigen-MHC complex does send a signal to the
cell interior, it is usually insufficient to result in T-cell
activation. Full activation, such as occurs with helper T-cells,
requires costimulation with other specific ligands called
costimulators that are expressed on the surface of the
antigen-presenting cell. Activation of a cytotoxic T cell, on the
other hand, generally requires IL-2, a cytokine secreted by
activated helper T cells.
[0078] C. The Immune Response
[0079] The three primary functional properties of the mammalian
immune system distinguishing it from the other body's defenses
include: (1) specificity--the ability to recognize and respond or
not to respond individually among a vast number of target
molecules, (2) discrimination--the ability to determine self from
non-self so as to peacefully coexist with all the innumerable
proteins and other organic material, yet still respond vigorously
against foreign material that is introduced to the body, and (3)
memory--the ability to be molded by experience such that subsequent
encounters with a particular foreign pathogen will provoke a more
rapid and vigorous response than what occurred at the initial
encounter. When one or more of these functions is frustrated, a
pathological condition results.
[0080] Virgin lymphocytes are continually released from the primary
lymphoid organs into the periphery, each carrying surface receptors
that enable antigen binding. Antigen binding in B cells is mediated
through surface-bound immunoglobulins, whereas in T-cells it is
mediated by T-cell receptors. When virgin lymphocytes are
activated, they proliferate, yielding daughter cells that may then
undergo further cycles of activation and proliferation. The speed
and intensity of response to a given antigen is determined largely
by clonal selection: the larger the population of daughter cells or
clones specific to a particular antigen, the greater the number of
cells that can recognize and participate in the immune response.
Every immune response is complex and intricately regulated sequence
of events involving several cell types. It is triggered when an
immunogen enters the body and encounters a specialized class of
cells called antigen-presenting cells (APCs). These APCs capture a
minute amount of the immunogen and display it in a form that can be
recognized by antigen-specific helper T-lymphocytes. The helper T
cells then become activated and, in turn, promote activation of
other classes of lymphocytes, such as B cells or cytotoxic T cells.
The activated lymphocytes then proliferate and carry out their
specific effector functions. At each stage in this process, the
lymphocytes and APCs communicate with one another through direct
contact or by secreting regulatory cytokines.
[0081] Exogenous antigens that are captured by an APC undergo a
series of alterations called antigen processing. Such processing,
especially of proteinaceous immunogens involves denaturation and
partial proteolytic digestions, so that the immunogen is cleaved
into short peptides. A limited number of the resulting peptides
then associated non-covalently with class II MHC proteins and are
transported to the APC surface, a process known as antigen
presentation. A CD4+ helper T lymphocyte that comes into direct
contact with an APC may become activated, but it will do so only if
it expressed a T-cell receptor protein that can recognize and bind
the particular peptide-MHC complex presented by the APC.
[0082] Helper T (T.sub.H) cells are the principal orchestrators of
the immune response because they are needed for activation of the
two other lymphatic effector cells: cytotoxic T (Tc) cells and
antibody secreting plasma cells. T.sub.H activation occurs early in
an immune response and requires at least two signals. One signal is
provided by binding of the T-cell antigen receptor to the antigenic
peptide-MHC complex on the APC surface that is transmitted through
the CD3 protein complex, while the second, costimulatory signal
through the APC is thought to result from binding of a separate
signal-transmitting protein on the T-cell surface with a specific
ligand on the APC. One known such interaction is the T-cell protein
CD28 and the family of APC surface proteins known as B7. Other
surface proteins pairs may also mediate costimulation. The process
of co-stimulation is described in greater detail subsequently. The
anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the present invention are believed to
enhance co-stimulation through antagonisism of a negative
costimulatory signal provided by signaling through PD-L1.
[0083] Together, the two signals induce the helper T cell to begin
secreting the cytokine interleukin-2 (IL-2) and also to begin
expressing specific high affinity IL-2 receptors on its surface.
IL-2 is a highly potent mitogenic factor for T-lymphocytes and is
essential for the proliferative response of activated T-cells. The
effect of IL-2 on the cell from which it is secreted--a phenomenon
known as an autocrine effect. It has further been shown that even
if a T-cell has received both signals, it will not proliferate if
its own surface IL-2 receptors are blocked. IL-2 can also act on
cells in the immediate vicinity, in a so-called paracrine effect.
This effect is especially important to activate Tc cells, which
generally do not produce enough IL-2 to stimulate their own
proliferation. In addition to IL-2, activated T.sub.H cells secrete
other cytokines and promote the growth, differentiation, and
functions of B-cells, macrophages and other cell types.
[0084] The contact between an APC and an antigen-specific T.sub.H
cell also has effect on the APC--one of the most important of which
is the release of IL-1. This cytokine is believed to act in an
autocrine manner to increase surface expression of class II MHC
proteins and of various adhesion molecules thereby strengthening
the binding of the T.sub.H cell and enhancing antigen presentation.
At the same time, IL-1 functions in a paracrine manner on the
T.sub.H cell to promote IL-2 secretion and IL-2 receptor
expression.
[0085] During activation of T.sub.H cells in the manner previously
described, some B-cells may also have been engaging the immunogen
through their antigen receptors, which are membrane-bound forms of
the antibodies that they will later secrete. Unlike T-cells,
B-cells recognize an immunogen in its free, unprocessed form.
Specific antigen binding provides one type of signal that can lead
to B-cell activation. A second type is provided by activated
T.sub.H cells, which express proteins that help activate the B cell
by binding to non-immunoglobulin receptors on its surface. These
T.sub.H-derived signals, which act on any B cell regardless of its
antigen specificity, are known as helper factors. These helper
factors include IL-2, IL-4 and IL-6. However, help is more
efficiently achieved through cell-cell contact, which allows
proteins on the T-cell surface to directly contact those on the B
cell. The most effect form of contact-mediated help occurs when a
protein called CD40 ligand (CD40L), which is expressed on T.sub.H
cells only after they become activated, binds to a protein called
CD40 on B cells. In a process known as by-stander activation,
contact with an activated B cell can even be sufficient to activate
resting B cells even though its surface immunoglobulins have not
engaged in antigen.
[0086] T.sub.c lymphocytes function to eradicate cells that express
foreign antigens on their surfaces, such as virus-infected host
cells. Most T.sub.c cells express CD8 rather than CD4 and hence
recognize antigens in association with class I rather than class II
MHC proteins. When a somatic cell is infected by a virus, some
immunogenic viral proteins may undergo processing within the cell,
and the resulting peptides may then appear as surface complexes
with class I MHC molecules. These peptide-MHC complexes may then be
recognized by the T-cell receptor of an antigen-specific clone,
providing one of two signals necessary for T.sub.c-cell activation.
This first signal alone induces high-affinity IL-2 receptors on the
T.sub.c cell. The second signal is furnished by IL-2 secreted from
a nearby activated T.sub.H lymphocyte. On receiving both signals,
the activated T.sub.c cell acquires cytotoxic activity, enabling it
to kill the cell to which it is bound, as well as any other cells
bearing the same peptide-MHC class I complexes. In some cases,
killing occurs because the T.sub.c releases specific toxins onto
the target cell; in others, the T.sub.c induces the target cell to
commit suicide by apoptosis. The activated T.sub.c cell also
proliferates, giving rise to additional T.sub.c cells with the same
antigen specificity.
[0087] D. Co-Stimulation by the Immunoglobulin Superfamily:
[0088] 1. B7.1/B7.2-CD28/CTLA-4
[0089] Perhaps the best characterized T-cell costimulatory pathway
is the one that signals through
B7.1(CD80)/B7.2(CD86)-CD28/CTLA-4(CD152). This signaling pathway is
critical to T-cell activation and tolerance. Karandikar et al., J.
Neuroimmunol. 89]: 10-18 (1998); Oosterwegal et al., Curr. Opin.
Immunol. 11: 294-300 (1999); Salomon et al., Annu. Rev. Immunol.
19: 225-252 (2001); Sansom, D. M., Immunol. 101: 169-177 (2000);
Chambers et al., Annu. Rev. Immunol. 19: 565-592 (2001).
[0090] B7.1 [Freeman et al., J. Exp. Med. 174]: 625-631 (1991);
Freedman et al., J. Immunol. 137: 3260-3267 (1987); Yokochi et al.,
J. Immunol. 128: 823-827 (1982)] and B7.2 [Freeman et al., Science
262: 909-911 (1993); Freeman et al., J. Exp. Med. 178: 2185-2192
(1993); Azuma et al., Nature 366: 76-79 (1993)] have dual
specificity for the two stimulatory receptors CD-28 and CTLA-4.
Aruffo et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84: 8573-8577 (1987);
Gross et al., J. Immunol. 144: 3201-3210 (1990). CD28 is
constitutively expressed on the surface of T cells [Gross et al.,
J. Immunol. 149: 380-388 (1992)], while CTLA-4, the higher affinity
receptor, has expression that is rapidly upregulated following
T-cell activation. Peach et al., J. Exp. Med. 180: 2049-2058
(1994); Linsley et al., J. Exp. Med. 176: 1595-1604 (1992); Kinsley
et al., Immunity 1: 793-801 (1994); Linsley et al., Immunity 4:
535-543 (1996). Most APC populations express B7.2 constitutively at
low levels, which is rapidly upregulated, while B7.1 is inducibly
expressed later after activation. Freeman et al., Science 262:
909-911 (1993); Hathcock et al., J. Exp. Med. 180: 631-640 (1994).
The prior expression of B7.2 and mouse knock-out data suggest that
B7.2 is the more important co-stimulatory molecule for initiating
immune responses, but otherwise the two molecules have largely
overlapping functions. McAdam et al., Immuno. Rev. 165: 631-640
(1994).
[0091] CD28 intereacts with B7.1 and B7.2 to transmit a signal that
synergizes with the TCR signal to promote T-cell activation.
Lenschow et al., Annu. Rev. Immunol. 165: 233-258 (1996);
Lanzavecchia et al., Cell 96: 1-4 (1999). In the absence of a TCR
signal, CD28 signaling does not have physiological significance.
CD28 signaling regulates the threshold for T-cell activation and
significantly decreases the number of TCR engagements needed for
T-cell activation. Viola et al., Science 273: 104-106 (1996). CD28
activation sustains T-cell responses by promoting T-cell survival
thereby enabling cytokines to initiate T-cell clonal expansion and
differentiation. Thompson et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:
1333-1337 (1989); Lucas et al., J. Immunol. 154: 5757-5768 (1995);
Shahinian et al., Science 261: 609-612 (1993); Sperling et al., J.
Immunol. 157: 3909-3917 (1996); Boise et al., Immunity 3: 87-98
(1995). CD28 also optimizes the responses of previously activated
T-cells, promoting interleukin 2 (IL-2) production and T-cell
survival. While some responses are CD28 independent, it is not yet
clear whether this is co-stimulation independence resulting from
strong antigenic simuli, or the result of dependence on other,
unknown costimulatory pathways.
[0092] CTLA-4 activation causes a negative signal, which inhibits
TCR- and CD-28 mediated signal transduction. CTLA-4 engagement
results in the inhibition of IL-2 synthesis and progression through
the cell cycle and termination of T-cell responses. Walunas et al.,
Immunity 1: 405-413 (1994); Walunas et al., J. Exp. Med. 183:
2541-2550 (1996); Krummel et al., J. Exp. Med. 182: 459-466 (1995);
Brunner et al., J. Immunol. 162: 5813-5820 (1999); Greenwald et
al., Immunity 14: 145-155 (2001). CTLA-4 plays an important role in
regulating T-cell responses, including peripheral T-cell tolerance.
While it is not clear how signaling is coordinated through CTLA-4
and CD28, some possibilities include out-competing CD28 for binding
to B7, by induction of immunosuppressive cytokines, direct
antagonism of CD28 signaling and/or TCR-mediated signaling.
[0093] As a result, the antagonism of CTLA-4 (e.g., antagonist
anti-CTLA antibodies) and or agonizing B7.1/B7.2/CD28 may be useful
to enhance immune response in the treatment of infection (e.g.,
acute and chronic) and tumor immunity.
[0094] 2. ICOS/ICOSL Signaling:
[0095] Another pathway of interaction between APC's and T-cells
occurs through ICOS (CD278) and ICOSL (B7-H2, CD275). ICOS/ICOSL
signaling promotes T-helper cell differentiation and effector
function, and is particularly important for interleukin-10 (IL-10)
production, but plays a more modest role in regulating T cell
expansion and IL-2 production, including regulatory T-cells, T cell
tolerance and autoimmunity.
[0096] In contrast with CD28, ICOS is not expressed constitutively
on naive T-cells, but is induced rapidly on T-cells after TCR
engagement. Hutloff et al., Nature 397: 263-266 (1999); Yoshinaga
et al., Nature 402: 827-832 (1999); Beier et al., Eur. J. Immunol.
30: 3707-3717 (2000); Coyle et al., Immunity 13: 95-105 (2000);
Mages et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 30: 1040-1047 (2000); McAdam et al.,
J. Immunol. 165: 5035-5040 (2000). This suggests that ICOS provides
a co-stimulatory signal to activated T cells. While co-stimulation
by CD28 enhances ICOS expression, and ICOS expression is reduced in
the absence of B7.1 and B7.2, ICOS is not entirely dependent on
CD28 signals. McAdam et al., J. Immunol. 165: 5035-5040 (2000);
Aicher et al., J. Immunol. 164: 4689-4696 (2000); Kopf et al., J.
Exp. Med. 192: 53-61 (2000). ICOS is upregulated on both T-helper
type 1 and 2 T.sub.H1 and T.sub.H2) cells during the initial phase
of differentiation, but levels remain high on T.sub.H2 cells and
decrease on T.sub.H1 cells. The expression pattern of ICOS on T
cells in germinal centers. Beier et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 30:
3707-3717 (2000); Mages et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 30: 1040-1047
(2000), indicates a role for ICOS in T-cell help for B cells.
Functional studies have confirmed this, and even expression of ICOS
has been confirmed on rat B cells, although not on other species.
Tezuka et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 276: 335-345 (2000:
McAdam et al., Nature 409: 102-105 (2001); Dong et al., Nature 409:
97-101 (2001); Dong et al., J. Immunol. 166: 3659-3662 (2001);
Tafuri et al., Nature 409: 105-109 (2001).
[0097] One role for ICOS/ICOSL signaling seems to be for regulating
cytokine production (e.g., IL-4, IL-13) by recently activated as
well as effector T cells. Hutloff et al., Nature 397: 263-266
(1999); Coyle et al., Immunity 13: 95-105 (2000); Dong et al.,
Nature 409: 97-101 (2001). In studies of allergic airway disease,
T.sub.H2 effector function, but not T.sub.H2 differentiation, is
provided by ICOS blockade. Tesciuba et al., J. Immunol. 167:
1996-2003 (2001). Indicating that ICOS can also regulate T.sub.H1
effector function, production of both T.sub.H1 and T.sub.H2
cytokines can be suppressed by ICOS-Ig fusion protein upon
reactivation in vitro. Kopf et al., J. Exp. Med. 192: 53-61
(2000).
[0098] Another potential role for ICOS relates to sustaining
T.sub.H1 responses. In an experimental model of autoimmune
encephalomyelitis (EAE) for multiple sclerosis, a T.sub.H1 disease
mediated by myelin-specific CD4.sup.+ T cells, shows that the
outcome of ICOS blockade might be distinct when costimulation is
blocked during T-cell priming, then during the effector phase of
EAE. Dong et al., Nature 409: 97-101 (2001); Rottman et al., Nature
Immunol. 2: 605-611 (2001); Sporici et al., Clin. Immunol. 100:
277-288 (2001). EAE induced by myelin oligodendrocyte glycoprotein
(MOG) is greatly exacerbated in ICOS.sup.-/- knock-out mice, with
increased production of IFN-.gamma. compared to wild type.
Similarly, ICOS blockade during induction of EAE, exacerbated the
disease also resulting in increased IFN-.gamma. production.
Therefore, ICOS blockade during priming leads to T.sub.H1
polarization of the response. Interestingly, the priming of
myelin-specific TCR transgenic T cells in vitro in the presence of
ICOS-Ig inhibited their ability to induce EAE, in stark contrast to
the results of ICOS-Ig blockade observed in vivo. Sporici et al.,
supra. The difference for the opposing outcomes in vitro and in
vivo is not yet clear, but might reflect a role for ICOS on IL-10
producing regulatory T-cells, as well as effector T cells during
ICOS blockade in vivo. Co-stimulation through IL-10 is very
effective at enhancing IL-10 production and is more effective than
co-stimulation through CD28. Hutloff et al., supra. The IL-10,
IL-12 regulatory loop is critical in regulating EAE because
IL-10-/-, but not IL4-/- mice develop exacerbated EAE. Segal et
al., J. Exp. Med. 187: 537-546 (1998).
[0099] Yet another potential role for ICOS is in enhancing T-cell
dependent B-cell humoral responses. ICOS.sup.-/- and ICOSL.sup.-/-
mice have shown that ICOS is required for T-cell dependent B cell
responses. Hutloff et al., Nature 397: 263-66 (1999); Chapoval et
al., Nat. Immunol. 2:269-74 (2001); Coyle et al., Immunity 13:
95-105 (2000); McAdam et al., Nature 4091: 102-5 (2001); Tafuri et
al., Nature 409: 105-9 (2001); Suh et al., Nat. Immunol. 4:899-906
(2003). ICOS.sup.-/- mice also show reduced germinal centers in
response to primary immunization, profound defects in germinal
center formation in response to secondary challenge, and defects in
IgG class switching. The role of ICOS in T:B cell interaction was
further validated by the identification of homozygous loss of ICOS
in T cells in patients with adult onset common variable
immunodeficiency disease. Grimbacher et al., Nat. Immunol. 4:
261-68 (2003).
[0100] As a result, agonism of ICOS/ICOSL (e.g., agonist anti-ICOS
antibodies, soluble ICOS/ICOSL ligand) may be useful to enhance
immune response in the treatment of infection (e.g., acute and
chronic) and/or tumor immunity.
[0101] 3. PD-1 Pathway:
[0102] An important negative co-stimulatory signal regulating T
cell activation is provided by programmed death--1 receptor
(PD-1)(CD279), and its ligand binding partners PD-L1 (B7-H1, CD274)
and PD-L2 (B7-DC, CD273). The negative regulatory role of PD-1 was
revealed by PD-1 knock outs (Pdcd1.sup.-/-, which are prone to
autoimmunity. Nishimura et al., Immunity 11: 141-51 (1999);
Nishimura et al., Science 291: 319-22 (2001). PD-1 is related to
CD28 and CTLA-4, but lacks the membrane proximal cysteine that
allows homodimerization. The cytoplasmic domain of PD-1 contains an
immunoreceptor tyrosine-based inhibition motif (ITIM, V/IxYxxL/V).
PD-1 only binds to PD-L1 and PD-L2. Freeman et al., J. Exp. Med.
192: 1-9 (2000); Dong et al., Nature Med. 5: 1365-1369 (1999);
Latchman et al., Nature Immunol. 2: 261-268 (2001); Tseng et al.,
J. Exp. Med. 193: 839-846 (2001).
[0103] PD-1 can be expressed on T cells, B cells, natural killer T
cells, activated monocytes and dendritic cells (DCs). PD-1 is
expressed by activated, but not by unstimulated human CD4.sup.+ and
CD8.sup.+ T cells, B cells and myeloid cells. This stands in
contrast to the more restricted expression of CD28 and CTLA-4.
Nishimura et al., Int. Immunol. 8: 773-80 (1996); Boettler et al.,
J. Vivol. 80: 3532-40 (2006). There are at least 4 variants of PD-1
that have been cloned from activated human T cells, including
transcripts lacking (i) exon 2, (ii) exon 3, (iii) exons 2 and 3 or
(iv) exons 2 through 4. Nielsen et al., Cell. Immunol. 235: 109-16
(2005). With the exception of PD-1.DELTA.ex3, all variants are
expressed at similar levels as full length PD-1 in resting
peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs). Expression of all
variants is significantly induced upon activation of human T cells
with anti-CD3 and anti-CD28. The PD-1.DELTA.ex3 variants lacks a
transmembrane domain, and resembles soluble CTLA-4, which plays an
important role in autoimmunity. Ueda et al., Nature 423: 506-11
(2003). This variant is enriched in the synovial fluid and sera of
patients with rheumatoid arthritis. Wan et al., J. Immunol. 177:
8844-50 (2006).
[0104] The two PD-1 ligands differ in their expression patterns.
PD-L1 is constitutively expressed on mouse T and B cells, CDs,
macrophages, mesenchymal stem cells and bone marrow-derived mast
cells. Yamazaki et al., J. Immunol. 169: 5538-45 (2002). PD-L1 is
expressed on a wide range of nonhematopoietic cells (e.g., cornea,
lung, vascular epithelium, liver nonparenchymal cells, mesenchymal
stem cells, pancreatic islets, placental synctiotrophoblasts,
keratinocytes, etc.) [Keir et al., Annu. Rev. Immunol. 26: 677-704
(2008)], and is upregulated on a number of cell types after
activation. Both type I and type II interferons IFN's) upregulate
PD-L1. Eppihimer et al., Microcirculation 9: 133-45 (2002);
Schreiner et al., J. Neuroimmunol. 155: 172-82 (2004). PD-L1
expression in cell lines is decreased when MyD88, TRAF6 and MEK are
inhibited. Liu et al., Blood 110: 296-304 (2007). JAK2 has also
been implicated in PD-L1 induction. Lee et al., FEBS Lett. 580:
755-62 (2006); Liu et al., Blood 110: 296-304 (2007). Loss or
inhibition of phosphatase and tensin homolog (PTEN), a cellular
phosphatase that modified phosphatidylinosital 3-kinase (PI3K) and
Akt signaling, increased post-transcriptional PD-L1 expression in
cancers. Parsa et al., Nat. Med. 13: 84-88 (2007).
[0105] PD-L2 expression is more restricted than PD-L1. PD-L2 is
inducibly expressed on DCs, macrophages, and bone marrow-derived
mast cells. PD-L2 is also expressed on about half to two-thirds of
resting peritoneal B1 cells, but not on conventional B2 B cells.
Zhong et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 37: 2405-10 (2007). PD-L2+B1 cells
bind phosphatidylcholine and may be important for innate immune
responses against bacterial antigens. Induction of PD-L2 by
IFN-.gamma. is partially dependent upon NF-.kappa.B. Liang et al.,
Eur. J. Immunol. 33: 2706-16 (2003). PD-L2 can also be induced on
monocytes and macrophages by GM-CF, IL-4 and IFN-.gamma.. Yamazaki
et al., J. Immunol. 169: 5538-45 (2002); Loke et al., PNAS
100:5336-41 (2003).
[0106] PD-1 signaling typically has a greater effect on cytokine
production than on cellular proliferation, with significant effects
on IFN-.gamma., TNF-.alpha. and IL-2 production. PD-1 mediated
inhibitory signaling also depends on the strength of the TCR
signaling, with greater inhibition delivered at low levels of TCR
stimulation. This reduction can be overcome by costimulation
through CD28 [Freeman et al., J. Exp. Med. 192: 1027-34 (2000)] or
the presence of IL-2 [Carter et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 32: 634-43
(2002)].
[0107] Evidence is mounting that signaling through PD-L1 and PD-L2
may be bidirectional. That is, in addition to modifying TCR or BCR
signaling, signaling may also be delivered back to the cells
expressing PD-L1 and PD-L2. While treatment of dendritric cells
with a naturally human anti-PD-L2 antibody isolated from a patient
with Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia was not found to upregulate
MHC II or B7 costimulatory molecules, such cells did produce
greater amount of proinflammatory cytokines, particularly
TNF-.alpha. and IL-6, and stimulated T cell proliferation. Nguyen
et al., J. Exp. Med. 196: 1393-98 (2002). Treatment of mice with
this antibody also (1) enhanced resistance to transplanted b16
melanoma and rapidly induced tumor-specific CTL. Radhakrishnan et
al., J. Immunol. 170: 1830-38 (2003); Radhakrishnan et al., Cancer
Res. 64: 4965-72 (2004); Heckman et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 37:
1827-35 (2007); (2) blocked development of airway inflammatory
disease in a mouse model of allergic asthma. Radhakrishnan et al.,
J. Immunol. 173: 1360-65 (2004); Radhakrishnan et al., J. Allergy
Clin. Immunol. 1161: 668-74 (2005).
[0108] Further evidence of reverse signaling into dendritic cells
("DC's") results from studies of bone marrow derived DC's cultured
with soluble PD-1 (PD-1 EC domain fused to Ig constant
region--"s-PD-1"). Kuipers et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 36: 2472-82
(2006). This sPD-1 inhibited DC activation and increased IL-10
production, in a manner reversible through administration of
anti-PD-1.
[0109] Additionally, several studies show a receptor for PD-L1 or
PD-L2 that is independent of PD-1. B7.1 has already been identified
as a binding partner for PD-L1. Butte et al., Immunity 27: 111-22
(2007). Chemical crosslinking studies suggest that PD-L1 and B7.1
can interact through their IgV-like domains. B7.1:PD-L1
interactions can induce an inhibitory signal into T cells. Ligation
of PD-L1 on CD4+ T cells by B7.1 or ligation of B7.1 on CD4+ T
cells by PD-L1 delivers an inhibitory signal. T cells lacking CD28
and CTLA-4 show decreased proliferation and cytokine production
when stimulated by anti-CD3 plus B7.1 coated beads. In T cells
lacking all the receptors for B7.1 (i.e., CD28, CTLA-4 and PD-L1),
T cell proliferation and cytokine production were no longer
inhibited by anti-CD3 plus B7.1 coated beads. This indicates that
B7.1 acts specifically through PD-L1 on the T-cell in the absence
of CD28 and CTLA-4. Similarly, T cells lacking PD-1 showed
decreased proliferation and cytokine production when stimulated in
the presence of anti-CD3 plus PD-L1 coated beads, demonstrating the
inhibitory effect of PD-L1 ligation on B7.1 on T cells. When T
cells lacking all known receptors for PD-L1 (i.e., no PD-1 and
B7.1), T cell proliferation was no longer impaired by anti-CD3 plus
PD-L1 coated beads. Thus, PD-L1 can exert an inhibitory effect on T
cells either through B7.1 or PD-1.
[0110] The direct interaction between B7.1 and PD-L1 suggests that
the current understanding of costimulation is incomplete, and
underscores the significance to the expression of these molecules
on T cells. Studies of PD-L1.sup.-/- T cells indicate that PD-L1 on
T cells can downregulate T cell cytokine production. Latchman et
al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 101: 10691-96 (2004). Because both
PD-L1 and B7.1 are expressed on T cells, B cells, DCs and
macrophages, there is the potential for directional interactions
between B7.1 and PD-L1 on these cells types. Additionally, PD-L1 on
non-hematopoietic cells may interact with B7.1 as well as PD-1 on T
cells, raising the question of whether PD-L1 is involved in their
regulation. One possible explanation for the inhibitory effect of
B7.1:PD-L1 interaction is that T cell PD-L1 may trap or segregate
away APC B7.1 from interaction with CD28.
[0111] As a result, the antagonism of signaling through PD-L1,
including blocking PD-L1 from interacting with either PD-1, B7.1 or
both, thereby preventing PD-L1 from sending a negative
co-stimulatory signal to T-cells and other antigen presenting cells
is likely to enhance immunity in response to infection (e.g., acute
and chronic) and tumor immunity. In addition, the anti-PD-L1
antibodies of the present invention, may be combined with
antagonists of other components of PD-1:PD-L1 signaling, for
example, antagonist anti-PD-1 and anti-PD-L2 antibodies.
[0112] 4. B7-H3
[0113] Co-stimulatory signals are also provided through B7-H3
(B7RP-2, CD276, PRO352), which is broadly expressed in lymphoid and
non-lymphoid tissues. Chapoval et al., Nat. Immunol. 2: 269-74
(2001). In humans, B7-H3 has both a 4Ig and a 2Ig variant, with the
4Ig form predominating, while the 2Ig variant predominates in the
mouse. Sun et al., J. Immunol. 168: 6294-97 (2002); Steinberger et
al., J. Immunol. 172: 2352-59 (2004); Ling et al., Genomics 82:
365-77 (2003).
[0114] Recent studies have shown that B7-H3 is both a stimulator
and an inhibitor of T cell responses. Evidence of stimulatory
activation is provided by the following: (1) In combination with
anti-CD3, B7-H3/Ig fusions costimulated CD4+ and CD8+ T cell
proliferation, and stimulated IFN-.gamma. and CD8 lytic activity,
Chapoval et al., Nat. Immunol. 2: 269-74 (2001); and (2) Injection
of B7-H3 expression plasmid into tumors of an EL-4 lymphoma model
resulted in complete regression of 50% of tumors, which was
dependent upon CD8+ T cells and NK cells. However, several recent
studies have shown an inhibitory role for this molecule.
B7-H3.sup.-/- APC knockouts show a two-fold increase in
alloreactive T cell proliferation in an MLR response. Activation of
CD4 T cells by anti-CD3 and anti-CD28 was inhibited in HLA-DR2
transfected with either form of B7-H3. Ling et al., Genomics 82:
365-77 (2003). The result was reduced proliferation and production
of IFN-.gamma., TNF-.alpha., IL-10 and GM-CSF. The reconciliation
of these studies could lie in the existence of two receptors for
B7-H3 with opposing functions, similar to how CD28 and CTLA-4
regulate signaling via B7.1 and B7.2.
[0115] As a result, the blockade of B7-H3 signaling may contribute
to enhancing immune response to infection and tumor immunity when
combined with the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention.
[0116] 5. B7-H4
[0117] The most recent addition to the B7 family is B7-H4 (B7x,
B7-S1, B7-H.5, VTCN1, PRO1291), which is a negative regulator of T
cell responses. Zang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 100
(18), 10388-10392 (2003); Watanabe et al., Nat. Immunol. 4 (7),
670-679 (2003); Prasad, et al., Immunity 18(6), 863-873 (2003);
Sica et al., Immunity 18(6), 849-861 (2003). Both human and mouse
B7-H4 are expressed broadly in both lymphoid (spleen and thymus)
and nonlymphoid organs (including lung, liver, testis, ovary,
placenta, skeletal muscle, pancreas and small intestine). B7-H4 is
not detected in normal human tissues by IHC or regulation of B7-H4
at the translational level. MC shows B7-H4 is highly expressed in
lung and ovarian tumors, and real-time polymerase chain reaction
(PCR) analysis indicate that mouse B7-H4 also is highly expressed
in prostate, lung and colon carcinoma cell lines. B7-H4 binds a yet
unknown receptor on activated, but not naive T cells that is
distinct from CTLA-4, ICOS, PD-1 and the receptor for B7-H3.
Although BTLA was initially reported to be the ligand for B7-H4,
the reported binding of B7-H4/Ig fusions to wild-type, but not
BTLA.sup.-/- cells compels the conclusion that HVEM, and not BTLA
is the unique ligand for B7-H4. Sedy et al., Nat. Immunol. 6: 90-98
(2004).
[0118] Studies with B7-H4 transfectants and immobilized B7-H4/Ig
fusions demonstrate that B7-H4 delivers a signal that inhibits
TCR-mediated CD4.sup.+ and CD8.sup.+ T cell proliferation,
cell-cycle progression in the G0/G1 phase, and IL-2 production.
Sica et al., Immunity 18: 849-61 (2003); Zang et al., PNAS 100:
10388-92 (2003); Prasad et al., Immunity 18: 863-73 (2003). B7.1
costimulation cannot overcome B7-H4/Ig induced inhibition. Blocking
anti-B7-H4 antibody increased T cell proliferation and IL-2
production in vitro. In vivo administration of anti-B7-H4 antibody
commensurate with administration of kehole limpet hemacyanin (KLH)
in complete Freund's adjuvant (CFA) led to a modest increase in
anti-KLH antibody IgM production and a two- to three-fold increase
in T cell proliferation and IL-2 production upon in vitro
restimulation with KLH, suggesting greater T cell priming in vivo
in the presence of anti-B7-H4. Anti-B7-H4 blocking antibody
markedly accelerated the onset and severity of EAE in increased
CD4.sup.+ and CD8.sup.+ T cells and CD11b.sup.+ macrophages in the
brain of anti-B7-H4 treated an autoimmune mouse model. The combined
experimental data available on B7-H4 suggest that it may
downegulate immune responses in peripheral tissues and play a role
in regulating T cell tolerance. The expression of B7-H4 may also
play a role in evasion of host immune responses in tumor immunity.
Choi et al., J. Immunol. 171: 4650-54 (2003). As a result, the
antagonism of B7-H4 may be useful to enhance immune response to
infection and tumor immunity when combined with the anti-PD-L1
antibodies of the invention.
[0119] 6. BTLA:
[0120] The B7 family member BTLA (CD272, BTLA-1) is functionally
similar to PD-1 and CTLA. Initially identified as a selective
marker for Th1 cells, BTLA is only expressed on lymphocytes.
Similar to CTLA-4, ICOS and PD-1, BTLA is induced on T cells during
activation. However, in contrast with ICOS, which remains elevated
on Th2-cells, but is downregulated in Th1 cells, BTLA remains
expressed on Th1-cells, but not Th2-cells. Similar to PD-1, BTLA is
also expressed on B-cells. Gavrieli et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res.
Commun. 312: 1236-43 (2003). However, BTLA is expressed on both
resting and activated B cells, whereas PD-1 is upregulated on
activated B cells. BTLA has two ITIM motifs.
[0121] BTLA exerts inhibitory effects on both B and T lymphocytes.
Watanabe et al., Nat. Immunol. 4: 670-79 (2003). BLTA.sup.-/- B
cells show modest response to anti-IgM, but an increased response
to anti-CD3 in vitro. Polarized BTLA.sup.-/- Th1 cells show about a
two-fold increase in proliferation in response to antigen exposure,
in vitro. In vivo, BTLA.sup.-/- mice show a three-fold increase in
hapten-specific antibody responses and enhanced susceptibility to
EAE. The phenotype of BTLA.sup.-/- mice resembles the phenotype of
PD-1.sup.-/- mice, exhibiting increased susceptibility to
autoimmunity, but more subtle phenotypes than CTLA-4.sup.-/- mice.
However, given its role as a negative regulator, blockade of BTLA
may prove useful for enhancing immune response in infection and
antitumor immunity when combined with the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of
the invention.
[0122] Interestingly, it has recently been shown that the Ig
superfamily member BTLA also interacts with the TNFR family member
HVEM. Sedy et al., Nat. Immunol. 6: 90-98 (2005); Gonzalez et al.,
Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 102: 1116-1121 (2005). HVEM is reviewed
below under TNFR Family Costimulators.
[0123] E. TNFR Family Costimulators
[0124] 1. OX40/OX40L (CD134)
[0125] OX40 (CD134, TXPG1L, TNFRSF4) and OX40L (CD134L, CD252,
GP34, TNFSF4, TXGP1) deficient mice have reduced primary CD4+
T-cell responses both to viral and common protein antigens and in
contact-sensitivity reactions. Chen et al., Immunity 11: 689-698
(1999); Kopf et al., Immunity 11: 699-708 (1999); Murata et al., J.
Exp. Med. 191: 365-374 (2000); Gramaglia et al., J. Immunol. 165:
3043-3050 (2000). Lower frequencies of antigen-specific effector T
cells are generated late in the primary response and fewer memory T
cells develop. Gramaglia et al., supra. In contrast to T cells
deficient in CD27, early proliferation is unimpaired in naive CD4+
T cell populations that are deficient in OX40. However, reduced
proliferation and marked apoptotic cell death occur 4-5 days after
activation, with the result that few T cells survive long term.
Rogers et al., Immunity 15: 445-455 (2001). With OX40-deficient
CD8+ T cells, initial cell division is unaffected, but the
accumulation of primary effector cells is markedly reduced 3-6 days
after encounter with antigen. Croft et al., Nat. Immunol. 3:
609-620 (2003).
[0126] Transgenic expression of OX40L by dendritic cells or T cells
increased the number of antigen-responding CD4+ T cells and
produces autoimmune-like symptoms that are associated with aberrant
T-cell activation. Brocker et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 29:1610-1616
(1999); Murata et al., J. Immunol. 169: 4628-4636 (2002). After
immunization, injection of agonist anti-OX40 antibodies results in
the accumulation of a greater number of antigen-reactive CD4+ T
cells at the peak of the primary response, and a concomitant
enhancement in the number of memory T cells that are generated.
Gramaglia et al., supra., Bansai-Pakala et al., Nature Med. 7:
907-912 (2001), Maxwell et al., J. Immunol. 164: 107-112 (2000);
Weatherill et al., Cell. Immunol. 209: 63-75 (2001) Enhanced
accumulation of primary effector CTLs occurs when antigen-primed
mice are treated with agonist antibody specific for OX40. De Smedt
et al., J. Immunol. 168: 661-670 (2002).
[0127] OX40 is believed to provide a late-acting signal that allow
for the survival of newly generated effector cells at the peak of
the primary immune response. There is also good evidence that OX40
functions downstream from CD28--in addition to increased expression
of OX40 mediated by CD28 signals, functional analysis of CD28
deficiency versus OX40 deficiency have shown that early primary
T-cell responses are markedly impaired in the absence of CD28
signals, but only late responses are impaired in the absence of
OX40 signals. Rogers et al., Immunity 15: 445-455 (2001); Bertram
et al., J. Immunol. 168: 3777-3785 (2002).
[0128] As a result, it is likely that activation of OX40/OX40L,
such as through the application of agonist antibodies may be useful
when combined with the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention to
treat T-cell dysfunctional disorders.
[0129] 2. 4-1BB (CD137)/4-1BBL,
[0130] Similar to OX40/OX40L, T-cells that are deficient in 4-1BB
(CD137, TNFRSF9) and 4-1BBL (TNFSF9), show fewer antigen-reactive
CD8+ T cells accumulate in primary responses when 4-1BBL is absent
and fewer memory T cells develop. DeBenedette et al., J. Immunol.
163: 4833-4841 (1999); Tan et al., J. Immunol. 163: 4859-4868
(1999); Tan et al., J. Immunol. 164: 2320-2325 (2000). Also,
blocking 4-1BBL does not alter the initial proliferative response
of CD8+ T cells, but suppresses the accumulation of effector CTLs
at the peak of the primary response after 3-6 days, owing to
apoptosis of cells that have divided several times. Cooper et al.,
Eur. J. Immunol. 32: 521-529 (2002). Agonist anti-4-1BB antibodies
and anti-4-1BBL-transfected APCs have also produced similar
results: CTL and CD4+ T-cell responses are markedly increased in
vivo. Melero et al., Nature Med. 3: 682-685 (1997); Melero et al.,
Eur. J. Immunol. 28: 1116-1121 (1998); Takahashi et al., J.
Immunol. 162: 5037-5040 (1999); Guinn et al., J. Immunol. 162:
5003-5010 (1999); Halstead et al., Nature Immunol. 3: 536-541
(2002); Takahashi et al., Immunol. Lett. 76: 183-191 (2001);
Bansal-Pakala et al., J. Immunol. 169: 5005-5009 (2002).
4-1BB-specific antibody does not alter the initial proliferative
response, supporting the conclusions from the 4-1BBL blocking
experiments and pointing to the late activity of 4-1BB in supplying
cell-survival signals.
[0131] Like OX40, 4-1BB is believed to provide a late-acting signal
that allow for the survival of newly generated effector cells at
the peak of the primary immune response. There is also good
evidence that 4-1BB functions later than CD28--in addition to
increased expression of OX40 and 4-1BB mediated by CD28 signals,
functional analysis of CD28 deficiency versus 4-1BB deficiency have
shown that early primary T-cell responses are markedly impaired in
the absence of CD28 signals, but only late responses are impaired
in the absence of OX40 signals. Rogers et al., Immunity 15: 445-455
(2001); Bertram et al., J. Immunol. 168: 3777-3785 (2002).
[0132] Agonist anti-CD137 antibody can induce tumor regression in
cancer wherein CD8+CTLs play a central role. Melero et al., Nat.
Med. 3: 682-5 (1997); Hirano et al., Cancer Res. 65(3): 1089-96
(2005). Constitutive and inducible expression of PD-L1 confers
resistance is such tumors, which is reversible upon blockade of
PD-L1. Hirano et al.
[0133] As a result, it is likely that activation of 4-1BB/4-BBL,
such as through the application of agonist antibodies, particularly
in combination with PD-L1 antagonists (e.g., anti-PD-L1 antibody)
may be useful to treat T-cell dysfunctional disorders.
[0134] 3. CD27/CD27L (CD70)
[0135] The importance of CD27 (TNFRSF7, S152) and CD27L (CD70,
TNFSF7) signaling in the initial stages of a T-cell response has
been demonstrated in in vitro blocking studies, wherein CD27/CD70
interactions were disrupted. Oshima et al., Int. Immunol. 10:
517-526 (1998); Agematsu et al., J. Immunol. 153: 1421-1429 (1994);
Hintzen et al., J. Immunol. 154: 2612-2623 (1995). T cells that
lack CD27 initially divide normally, but then proliferate poorly 3
or more days after activation. Hendriks et al., Nature Immunol. 1:
433-440 (2000). This indicates that CD27 participates in promoting
the initial expansion of the naive T-cell population, by either
early suppression of T-cell death or by acting on the cell cycle to
allow sustained division 2-3 days after activation. This is
reinforced by in vivo studies of CD27-deficient mice, in which
lower numbers of antigen-specific responses (days 4-8) and fewer
memory T cells develop over 3 or more weeks. Hendriks et al.,
supra. The expression of CD27 is upregulated early after T-cell
activation, suggesting that it mainly delivers signals that
maintain early proliferation, before the peak of the effector
response.
[0136] As a result, it is likely that activation of CD27/CD27L,
including through the application of agonist antibodies,
particularly in combination with the anti-PD-L1 antibodies
described herein, may be useful to treat T-cell dysfunctional
disorders.
[0137] 4. CD30/CD30L (CD153)
[0138] CD30 (TNFRSF8, Ki-1) and CD30L (CD153, TNFSF8) signaling is
co-stimulatory for several T-cell functions in vitro. Del Prete et
al., J. Exp. Med. 182: 1655-1661 (1995), Bowen et al., J. Immunol.
156: 442-449 (1995). Blocking reagents to CD30L suppressed the
development of Th2 cells and enhanced the development of Th1 cells
in vitro. This activity is in agreement with data showing that CD30
is preferentially expressed by Th2 cells and type 2 cytotoxic Tc2
cells. Del Prete et al., supra, Nakamura et al., J. Immunol. 158:
2090-2098 (1996). CD30 is expressed 3-4 days after the activation
of naive T cells in unpolarized primary responses. Nakamura et al.,
supra, indicating that its role is not restricted to type 2
cytokine-dominated responses.
[0139] While the exact mechanisms of CD30/CD30L signaling is
unclear, it has been suggested that it might be similar to OX40 and
4-1BB. When adoptively transferred antigen-specific CD8+ T cells
are transferred into CD30L-deficient mice, they do not accumulate
in high numbers at the peak of a primary response, and fewer memory
T cells develop. As a result, CD30 might also provide proliferation
and/or survival signals to allow the generation of high numbers of
antigen-specific T cells at the peak of primary responses.
[0140] As a result, it is likely that activation of CD27/CD27L,
including through the application of agonist antibodies,
particularly in combination with the anti-PD-L1 antibodies
described herein, may be useful to treat T-cell dysfunctional
disorders.
[0141] 5. HVEM/LIGHT
[0142] The effect of HVEM (HVEA, ATAR, LIGHTR, TNFRSF14, PRO509)
and LIGHT (CD258, HVEML, TR2, TNFSF14, PRO726) on T-cell
costimulation is complicated by 1) the ability of LIGHT to also
bind lympotoxin-.beta. receptor (LT.beta.R) and 2) HVEM to bind
soluble LT.alpha.3. Thus, any study of the effect of HVEM/LIGHT
should also take into account the effect of other binding partners
for this signaling system. Blocking LIGHT can inhibit early T-cell
proliferation and cytokine secretion in allogeneic mixed-lymphocyte
reactions (MLRs). Tamada et al., J. Immunol. 164: 4105-4110 (2000),
Kwon et al., J. Biol. Chem. 272: 14272-14276 (1997); Harrop et al.,
J. Immunol. 161: 1786-1794 (1998); Tamada et al., Nature Med. 6:
283-289 (2000). The production of pro-inflammatory cytokines is
suppressed when LIGHT is blocked in MHC-mismatched heart
allografts. Ye et al., J. Exp. Med. 195: 795-800 (2002). Moreover,
allogeneic skin grafts are rejected with delayed kinetics in
recipients that are deficient for both LIGHT and CD28. Scheu et
al., J. Exp. Med. 195: 1613-1624 (2002). The suggestion that
delayed graft rejection might indicate an early suppression of
T-cell clonal expansion or cytokine production. This conclusion is
bolstered by (i) in vitro studies showing that LIGHT-deficient
splenocytes responding to alloantigen have reduced production of
both TH1 and TH2 cytokines and weak generation of cytotoxic T
lymphocyte activity (CTL) activity [Sheu et al., supra], and (ii)
in vivo studies showing that blocking LIGHT reduces the generation
of alloreactive CTLs. Tamada et al., Nature Med. 6: 283-289
(2000).
[0143] As a result, the HVEM/LIGHT, such as through the application
of agonist antibodies, particularly in combination with the
anti-PD-L1 antibodies described herein, may be useful to treat
T-cell dysfunctional disorders.
II. DEFINITIONS
[0144] An "allergen" or "immunogen` is any molecule that can
trigger an immune response. As used herein, the term covers either
the antigenic molecule itself, or its source, such as pollen grain,
animal dander, insect venom or food product. This is contrasted
with the term antigen, which refers to a molecule that can be
specifically recognized by an immunoglobulin or T-cell receptor.
Any foreign substance capable of inducing an immune response is a
potential allergen. Many different chemicals of both natural and
synthetic origin are known to be allergenic. Complex natural
organic chemicals, especially proteins, are likely to cause
antibody-mediated allergy, whereas simple organic compounds,
inorganic chemicals, and metals more preferentially cause T-cell
mediated allergy. In some cases, the same allergen may be
responsible for more than one type of allergy. Exposure to the
allergen may be through inhalation, injection, injection, or skin
contact.
[0145] "Dysfunction" in the context of immune dysfunction, refers
to a state of immune reduced responsiveness to antigenic
stimulation. The term includes the common elements of both
exhaustion and/or anergy in which antigen recognition may occur,
but the ensuing immune response is ineffective to control infection
or tumor growth.
[0146] "Tolerance" or "immunological tolerance" is the failure of
the immune system to mount a defensive immune response to a
particular antigen. Tolerance can be natural or self, wherein the
body does not attack its own proteins and antigens, or it can be
induced, resulting from the manipulation of the immune system.
Central tolerance occurs during lymphocyte development and operates
in the thymus and bone marrow. During this process, T and B
lymphocytes that recognize self antigens are deleted before they
develop into fully immunocompetent cells. This process is most
active during fetal development, but continues throughout life as
immature lymphocytes are generated. Peripheral T-cell tolerance
refers to a functional unresponsiveness to self-antigens that are
present in peripheral tissues, and occurs after T and B cells
mature and enter the periphery. These processes include the
suppression of autoreactive cells by "regulatory" T cells and the
generation of hyporesponsiveness (anergy) in lymphocytes which
encounter antigen in the absence of the co-stimulatory signals that
accompany inflammation. "Acquired" or "induced tolerance" refers to
the immune system's adaptation to external antigens characterized
by a specific non-reactivity of the lymphoid tissues to a given
antigen that in other circumstances would likely induce
cell-mediated or humoral immunity. In adults, tolerance may be
clinically induced by repeated administration of very large doses
of antigen, or of small doses that are below the threshold required
for stimulation of an immune response, such as via intravenous or
sublingual administration of soluble antigens. Immunosuppression
also facilitates the induction of tolerance. The breakdown of self
tolerance can lead to autoimmunity.
[0147] "Enhancing T-cell function" means to induce, cause or
stimulate a T-cell to have a sustained or amplified biological
function, or renew or reactivate exhausted or inactive T-cells.
Examples of enhancing T-cell function include: increased secretion
of .gamma.-interferon from CD8.sup.+ T-cells, increased
proliferation, increased antigen responsiveness (e.g., viral or
pathogen clearance) relative to such levels before the
intervention. In one embodiment, the level of enhancement is as
least 50%, alternatively 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%, 120%, 150%,
200%. The manner of measuring this enhancement is known to one of
ordinary skill in the art.
[0148] A "T cell dysfunctional disorder" is a disorder or condition
of T-cells characterized by decreased responsiveness to antigenic
stimulation. In a particular embodiment, a T-cell dysfunctional
disorder is a disorder that is specifically associated with
inappropriate increased signaling through PD-1. In another
embodiment, T-cell dysfunctional disorder is one in which T-cells
are anergic or have decreased ability to secrete cytokines,
proliferate, or execute cytolytic activity. In a specific aspect,
the decreased responsiveness results in ineffective control of a
pathogen or tumor expressing an immunogen. Examples of T cell
dysfunctional disorders characterized by T-cell dysfunction include
unresolved acute infection, chronic infection and tumor
immunity.
[0149] "Chronic infection" refers to an infection in which an
infectious agent (e.g., pathogens such as viruses, bacteria,
protozoan parasites, fungi, or the like) has induced an immune
response in the infected host, but has not been cleared or
eliminated from that host as during an acute infection. Chronic
infections may be persistent, latent, or slow. While acute
infections are typically resolved by the immune system within a few
days or weeks (e.g., influenza), persistent infections can persist
at a relatively low level for months, years, decades, or a lifetime
(e.g., Hepatitis B). In contrast, a latent infection is
characterized by a long period of asymptomatic activity punctuated
by a period of rapidly increasing high grade infection and elevated
pathogen levels (e.g., herpes simplex). Finally, a slow infection
is one characterized by a gradual and continuous increase in
disease symptoms, such as a long period of incubation followed by a
protracted and progressive clinical course beginning after the
onset of clinical symptoms. Unlike latent and persistent
infections, slow infection may not begin with an acute period of
viral multiplication (e.g., picornaviruses infection, visnavirus,
scrapie, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease). Exemplary infectious agents
capable of inducing a chronic infection include viruses (e.g.,
cytomegalovirus, Epstein Barr virus, hepatitis B virus, hepatitis C
virus, herpes simplex virus, types I and II, human immunodeficiency
virus, types 1 and 2, human papillomavirus, human T lymphotrophic
viruses, types 1 and 2, varicella zoster virus and the like),
bacteria (e.g., Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Listeria spp.,
Klebsiella pneumoniae, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Staphylococcus
aureus, Borrelia spp., Helicobacter pylori, and the like),
protozoan parasites (e.g., Leishmania spp., Plasmodium falciparum,
Schistosoma spp., Toxoplasma spp., Trypanosoma spp., Taenia
carssiceps and the like), and fungi (e.g., Aspergillus spp.,
Candida albicans, Coccidioides immitis, Histoplasma capsulatum,
Pneumocystis carinii and the like). Additional infectious agents
include prions or misfolded proteins that affect the brain or
neuron structure by further propagating protein misfolding in these
tissues, resulting in the formation of amyloid plaques which cause
cell death, tissue damage and eventual death. Example of disease
resulting from prion infection include: Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease
and its varieties, Gerstmann-Straussler-Scheinker syndrome (GSS),
fatal familial insomnia (sFI), kuru, scrapie, Bovine spongiform
encephalopathy (BSE) in cattle (aka "mad cow" disease), and various
other animal forms of encephalopathy [e.g., transmissible mink
encephalopathy (TME), chronic wasting disease (CWD) in white-tailed
deer, elk and mule deer, feline spongiform encephalopathy, exotic
ungulate encephalopathy (EUE) in nyala, oryx and greater kudu,
spongiform encephalopathy of the ostrich].
[0150] "Tumor immunity" refers to the process in which tumors evade
immune recognition and clearance. Thus, as a therapeutic concept,
tumor immunity is "treated" when such evasion is attenuated, and
the tumors are recognized and attacked by the immune system.
Examples of tumor recognition include tumor binding, tumor
shrinkage and tumor clearance.
[0151] A "B7-negative costimulatory antagonist" ("BNCA") is an
agent that decreases, blocks, inhibits, abrogates or interferes
with the negative co-stimulatory signal mediated by or through cell
surface proteins expressed on T lymphocytes mediated by a member of
the B7 family. In one aspect, a BNCA may either alone, or in
combination with the anti-PD-1 antibodies of the invention render a
dysfunctional T-cell non-dysfunctional. In another aspect, a BNCA
may be an agent that inhibits nucleic acid or protein synthesis,
expression, signaling, and/or post-expression processing of a
B7-negative costimulatory molecule. In yet another aspect, a BNCA
is an antibody, antigen binding antibody fragment, BNCA
oligopeptide, BNCA RNAi or BNCA small molecule that decreases,
blocks, inhibits, abrogates or interferes with signal transduction
by a B7-negative costimulatory molecule. Example B7 negative
costimulatory molecules includes: CTLA-4, PD-L1, PD-1, B7.1
(expressed on T-cells), PD-L2, B7-H3 and B7-H4.
[0152] A positive costimulatory agonist is a molecule that
increases, enhances, augments or facilitates a co-stimulatory
signal mediated by or through cell surface proteins expressed on T
lymphocytes. In one aspect, a positive costimulatory molecule can
be an extracellular domain, soluble construct or agonist antibody
which activates a positive costimulatory pathway. Example positive
costimulatory molecules include the B7 superfamily molecules, e.g.,
B7.1, B7.2, CD28 and ICOS/ICOSL. Additional examples include the
TNFR family costimulatory molecules, e.g., OX40/OX40L,
41-BB/41-BBL, CD27/CD27L, CD30/CD30L and HVEM/LIGHT.
[0153] A "small molecule" or "small organic molecule" is one that
has a molecular weight below about 500 Daltons.
[0154] An "interfering RNA" "RNAi" is RNA of 10 to 50 nucleotides
in length which reduces expression of a target gene, wherein
portions of the strand are sufficiently complementary (e.g., having
at least 80% identity to the target gene). The method of RNA
interference refers to the target-specific suppression of gene
expression (i.e., "gene silencing"), occurring at a post
transcriptional level (e.g., translation), and includes all
posttranscriptional and transcriptional mechanisms of RNA mediated
inhibition of gene expression, such as those described in P. D.
Zamore, Science 296: 1265 (2002) and Hannan and Rossi, Nature 431:
371-378 (2004). As used herein, RNAi can be in the form of small
interfering RNA (siRNA), short hairpin RNA (shRNA), and/or micro
RNA (miRNA). Such RNAi molecules are often a double stranded RNA
complexes that may be expressed in the form of separate
complementary or partially complementary RNA strands. Methods are
well known in the art for designing double-stranded RNA complexes.
For example, the design and synthesis of suitable shRNA and siRNA
may be found in Sandy et al., BioTechniques 39: 215-224 (2005).
[0155] A "small interfering RNA" or siRNA is a double stranded RNA
(dsRNA) duplex of 10 to 50 nucleotides in length which reduces
expression of a target gene, wherein portions of the first strand
is sufficiently complementary (e.g., having at least 80% identity
to the target gene). siRNAs are designed specifically to avoid the
anti-viral response characterized by elevated interferon synthesis,
nonspecific protein synthesis inhibition and RNA degradation that
often results in suicide or death of the cell associated with the
use of RNAi in mammalian cells. Paddison et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci
USA 99(3):1443-8. (2002).
[0156] The term "hairpin" refers to a looping RNA structure of 7-20
nucleotides. A "short hairpin RNA" or shRNA is a single stranded
RNA 10 to 50 nucleotides in length characterized by a hairpin turn
which reduces expression of a target gene, wherein portions of the
RNA strand are sufficiently complementary (e.g., having at least
80% identity to the target gene). The term "stem-loop" refers to a
pairing between two regions of the same molecule base-pair to form
a double helix that ends in a short unpaired loop, giving a
lollipop-shaped structure.
[0157] A "micro RNA" or "miRNA" (previously known as stRNA) is a
single stranded RNA of about 10 to 70 nucleotides in length that
are initially transcribed as pre-miRNA characterized by a
"stem-loop" structure, which are subsequently processed into mature
miRNA after further processing through the RNA-induced silencing
complex (RISC).
[0158] A "BNCA interfering RNA" or "BNCA RNAi" binds, preferably
specifically, to a BNCA nucleic acid and reduces its expression.
This means the expression of the B7 negative costimulatory molecule
molecule is lower with the BNCA RNAi present as compared to
expression of the B7 negative costimulatory molecule in a control
where the BNCA RNAi is not present. BNCA RNAi may be identified and
synthesized using known methods (Shi Y., Trends in Genetics 19(1):
9-12 (2003), WO2003056012, WO2003064621, WO2001/075164,
WO2002/044321.
[0159] A "BNCA oligopeptide" is an oligopeptide that binds,
preferably specifically, to a B7 negative costimulatory
polypeptide, including a receptor, ligand or signaling component,
respectively, as described herein. Such oligopeptides may be
chemically synthesized using known oligopeptide synthesis
methodology or may be prepared and purified using recombinant
technology. Such oligopeptides are usually at least about 5 amino
acids in length, alternatively at least about 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28,
29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45,
46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62,
63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79,
80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96,
97, 98, 99, or 100 amino acids in length or more. Such
oligopeptides may be identified without undue experimentation using
well known techniques. In this regard, it is noted that techniques
for screening oligopeptide libraries for oligopeptides that are
capable of specifically binding to a polypeptide target are well
known in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,556,762, 5,750,373,
4,708,871, 4,833,092, 5,223,409, 5,403,484, 5,571,689, 5,663,143;
PCT Publication Nos. WO 84/03506 and WO84/03564; Geysen et al.,
Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA., 81:3998-4002 (1984); Geysen et al.,
Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA., 82:178-182 (1985); Geysen et al., in
Synthetic Peptides as Antigens, 130-149 (1986); Geysen et al., J.
Immunol. Meth., 102:259-274 (1987); Schoofs et al., J. Immunol.,
140:611-616 (1988), Cwirla, S. E. et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
USA, 87:6378 (1990); Lowman, H. B. et al. Biochemistry, 30:10832
(1991); Clackson, T. et al. Nature, 352: 624 (1991); Marks, J. D.
et al., J. Mol. Biol., 222:581 (1991); Kang, A. S. et al. Proc.
Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 88:8363 (1991), and Smith, G. P., Current
Opin. Biotechnol., 2:668 (1991).
[0160] A "BNCA small molecule antagonist" or "BNCA small molecule"
is an organic molecule other than an oligopeptide or antibody as
defined herein that inhibits, preferably specifically, a B7
negative costimulatory polypeptide. Such B7 negative co-stimulatory
signaling inhibition preferably renders a dysfunctional T-cell
responsive to antigen stimulation. Example BNCA small molecules may
be identified and chemically synthesized using known methodology
(see, e.g., PCT Publication Nos. WO2000/00823 and WO2000/39585).
Such BNCA small molecules are usually less than about 2000 daltons
in size, alternatively less than about 1500, 750, 500, 250 or 200
daltons in size, are capable of binding, preferably specifically,
to a B7 negative stimulatory polypeptide as described herein, and
may be identified without undue experimentation using well known
techniques. In this regard, it is noted that techniques for
screening organic molecule libraries for molecules that are capable
of binding to a polypeptide target are well known in the art (see,
e.g., PCT Publication Nos. WO00/00823 and WO00/39585).
[0161] The term "antibiotic" includes any molecule that
specifically inhibits or abolishes the growth of micro-organisms,
such as virus, bacteria, fungi or protozoa, but is non-lethal to
the host at the concentration and dosing interval administered. As
used herein, the term antibiotic includes anti-bacterial agent,
anti-viral, agent, anti-fungal agent and anti-protozoan agent. In a
specific aspect, an antibiotic is non-toxic to the host at the
administered concentration and dosing intervals. Anti-bacterial
antibiotics or anti-bacterials can be broadly classified as either
bactericidal (i.e., directly kills) or bacteriostatic (i.e.,
prevents division). Anti-bactericidal antibiotics can be further
subclassified as narrow-spectrum (i.e., only affects a small class
of subset of bacteria, e.g., gram-negative, etc.) or broad-spectrum
(i.e., affects a broad class). Examples of antibiotics include: (i)
aminoglycosides, e.g., amikacin, gentamicin, kanamycin, neomycin,
netilmicin, streptomycin, tobramycin, paromycin, (ii) ansamycins,
e.g., geldanamycin, herbimycin, (iii) carbacephems, e.g.,
loracarbef, (iv), carbapenems, e.g., ertapenum, doripenem,
imipenem/cilastatin, meropenem, (v) cephalosporins (first
generation), e.g., cefadroxil, cefazolin, cefalotin, cefalexin,
(vi) cephalosporins (second generation), e.g., ceflaclor,
cefamandole, cefoxitin, cefprozil, cefuroxime, (vi) cephalosporins
(thirdgeneration), e.g., cefixime, cefdinir, cefditoren,
cefoperazone, cefotaxime, cefpodoxime, ceftazidime, ceftibuten,
ceftizoxime, ceftriaxone, (vii) cephalosporins (fourth generation),
e.g., cefepime, (viii), cephalosporins (fifth generation), e.g.,
ceftobiprole, (ix) glycopeptides, e.g., teicoplanin, vancomycin,
(x) macrolides, e.g., axithromycin, clarithromycin, dirithromycine,
erythromycin, roxithromycin, troleandomycin, telithromycin,
spectinomycin, (xi) monobactams, e.g., axtreonam, (xii) penicilins,
e.g., amoxicillin, ampicillin, axlocillin, carbenicillin,
cloxacillin, dicloxacillin, flucloxacillin, mezlocillin,
meticillin, nafcilin, oxacillin, penicillin, peperacillin,
ticarcillin, (xiii) antibiotic polypeptides, e.g., bacitracin,
colistin, polymyxin B, (xiv) quinolones, e.g., ciprofloxacin,
enoxacin, gatifloxacin, levofloxacin, lemefloxacin, moxifloxacin,
norfloxacin, orfloxacin, trovafloxacin, (xv) sulfonamides, e.g.,
mafenide, prontosil, sulfacetamide, sulfamethizole, sulfanilamide,
sulfasalazine, sulfisoxazole, trimethoprim,
trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole (TMP-SMX), (xvi) tetracyclines, e.g.,
demeclocycline, doxycycline, minocycline, oxytetracycline,
tetracycline and (xvii) others such as arspenamine,
chloramphenicol, clindamycin, lincomycin, ethambutol, fosfomycin,
fusidic acid, furazolidone, isoniazid, linezolid, metronidazole,
mupirocin, nitrofurantoin, platensimycin, pyrazinamide,
quinupristin/dalfopristin, rifampin/rifampicin or tinidazole.
[0162] The term "antiviral agent" includes any molecule that
inhibits or abolishes the growth, morbidity and/or survival of
viruses. This includes anti-retroviral drugs such as (1) reverse
transcriptase inhibitors including for example: (a) nucleoside
analog reverse transcriptase inhibitors (NRTIs) (E.g.,
aciclovir/acyclovir (ZOVIRAX.RTM., ZOVIR.RTM.), cidofovir,
azidothymidine/zidovudine (AZT, RETROVIR.RTM.), didanosine (ddI,
VIDEX.RTM.; zalcitabine (ddC, HIVID.RTM.); stavudine (d4T,
ZERIT.RTM.; lamivudine (3TC, EPIVIR.RTM.); abacavir (ZIAGEN.RTM.);
emtricitabine (EMTRIVA.RTM.); brivudine (HELPIN.RTM.); entecavir
(BARACLUDE.RTM.); idoxuridine; viramidine (taribavirin by
ValeantPharmaceuticals), cytidine nucleoside analog polymerase
inhibitor PCI-6130, and prodrug variants (e.g., R7128) by
Pharmasset/Roche; nucleoside analog inhibitor by Merck/Isis
Pharmaceuticals--MK-0608, (b) nucleotide analog reverse
transcriptase inhibitors (NtRTIs) (E.g., tenofovir (VIREAD.RTM.);
adefovir (PREVEON.RTM., HEPSERA.RTM.); fomivirsen (VITRAVENE.RTM.);
(c) non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors, (NNRTIs),
efavirenz (SUSTIVA.RTM., STOCRIN.RTM.); nevirapine (VIRAMUNE.RTM.),
delavirdine (RESCRIPTOR.RTM.), etravirine (INTELENCE.RTM.),
loviride; non-nucleoside inhibitor of HCV RNA-dependent RNA
polymerase by ViroChem Pharma--VCH-759, non-nucleoside inhibitor of
HCV polymerase inhibitor by Pfizer--PF-868554; and (d) polymerase
inhibitors, including: RNA-dependent RNA polymerase of the
hepatitis C virus by Boehringer Ingelheim--BILB-1941, RNA
polymerase inhibitor by Roche--R1626; ACH-0137171 a replicase
inhibitor by Achillion Pharmaceuticals, R7128--polymerase inhibitor
by Roche/Pharmasset, ABT-333, and ABT-072--polymerase inhibitors by
Abbott, BI 207127--polymerase inhibitor by Boehringer Ingelheim,
PSI-7851--polymerase inhibitor by Pharmasset, ANA598--polymerase
inhibitor by Anadys Pharmaceuticals, MK-3281--polymerase inhibitor
by Merck, IDX184--polymerase inhibitor by Idenix, GSK
625433--polymerase inhibitor by Glaxo Smith Kline,
INX-189--polymerase inhibitor by Inhibitex, NM283--polymerase
inhibitor by Idenix, HCV796--polymerase inhibitor by Wyeth, GL60667
and GS9190--polymerase inhibitors by Gilead, PF-00868554 0
polymerase inhibitor by Pfizer, VCH759, VCH916, VX222 and
VX759--polymerase inhibitors by Virochem, IDX184 and
IDX375--polymerase inhibitors by Idenix, BMS650032--polymerase
inhibitor by Bristol Myers Squibb; (2) protease inhibitors
including for example: saquinavir (FOROVASE.RTM./INVIRASE.RTM.),
ritonavir (NORVIR.RTM.), indinavir (CRIXIVAN.RTM.), nelfinavir
(VIRACEPT.RTM.), amprenavir (AGENERASE.RTM.), lopinavir
(KALETRA.RTM.), atazanavir (REYATAZ.RTM.), fosamprenavir
(LEXIVA.RTM.), tipranavir (APTIVUS.RTM.), darunavir
(PREZISTA.RTM.), telapravir (VX-950); the second generation HCV
protease inhibitors by Vertex Pharmaceuticals--VX-500 and VX-813;
the NS3/4A protease inhibitor by Intermune/Roche--ITMN-191/R-7227,
boceprevir, the protease inhibitor by Schering-Plough-SCH 503034,
the HCV NS3/4A protease inbihitor by
Medivir/Tibotec--TMC435/TMC435350, ACH-1625 protease inhibitor by
Achillion Pharmaceuticals, ACH-806--protease inhibitor by
Achillion/Gilead, BI201335 and BILN 2061--protease inhibitors by
Boehringer Ingelheim, SCH 900518/SP900518 (narlaprevir)--protease
inhibitor by Schering-Plough, MK-7009--protease inhibitor by Merck,
BMS-650032, BMS-790052 and BMS-791325--protease inhibitors by
Bristol Myeres Squibb, R7227--protease inhibitor by Roche,
PHX1766--protease inhibitor by Phenomix, AVL-181--protease
inhibitor by Avila Therapeutics, biliverdin, CTS-1027--protease
inhibitor by Roche Biosciences, VX985--protease inhibitor by
Vertex, VCH-759 and VCH-917--protease inhibitors by
Virochem/Vertex, IDX-136 and 316--protease inhibitors by Idenix,
ABT-450--protease inhibitor by Abbott, VBY 376--protease inhibitor
by Virobay; (3) integrase inhibitors including for example:
raltegravir (ISENTRESS.RTM.), elvitegravir; (4) combo therapies of
nucleoside analog/nucleotide analog inhibitors, atripla
(tenofovir+embricitabine+efavirenz), combivir
(lamivudein+zidovudine), (5) entry or fusion inhibitors including
for example: maraviroc, enfuvirtide, docosanol, anti-CD4 antibody,
anti-gp120 antibody, anti-CCRS antibody, HCV NS5a antagonists: (a)
A-831, A-689 and AZD 2836 by Arrow Therapeutics, (b) BMS-790052 and
BMS-824393 by Bristol Myers Squibb, (c) GSK-625433 by Glaxo Smith
Kline, (d) NS4a antagonists ACH-1095; (5) maturation inhibitors
including for example: bevirimat and vivecon; (6) viral release
inhibitors including for example: zanamivir (RELENZA.RTM.),
oseltamivir (TAMIFLU.RTM.), arbidol; (7) immune response enhancers,
including for example interferon-.alpha. (E.g., BLX-883 and BLX 883
CR by Biolex Therapeutics, belerofon by Nautilus Biotech,
long-acting IFN-.alpha., IFN-.alpha. SR by LG Life Sciences, long
acting IFN-.alpha.2b CR and IFN-.alpha.2b XL by Flamel
Technologies, pegylated IFN-.alpha. (E.g., PEG-IFN-.alpha.-2a,
PEGASYS.RTM.; PEG-IFN-.alpha.-2b, PEGINTRON.RTM.),
IFN-.alpha.2b-Human serum albumin fusion protein (ALBUFERON.RTM.);
interferon-.beta. including IFN-.beta.-1b (BETASERON.RTM.),
interferon-.gamma. interferon.lamda., pegylated interferon.lamda.
(e.g., PEG-rIL-29 by ZymoGenetics/Novo Nordisk),
interferon-.omega./leukocyte II interferon (E.g., Intarcia
Therapeutics), toll-like receptor 7 agonists including imiquimod,
isatoribine and prodrug variants thereof (e.g., ANA-975 and
ANA-971) by Anadys Pharmaceuticals, oglufanide (IM862,
L-Glu-L-Trp-OH) and lipid- or -glycosylconjugated variants thereof
by Implicit Bioscience, NOV-205 (E.g., Molixan.RTM. --a peptidic
antiviral by Novelos Therapeutics, Inc.), the antiviral EHC18 by
Enzo Biochem, gamma-D-glutamyl-L-tryptophan (E.g., SCV-07, SciClone
Pharmaceuticals/Verta), aloferon (E.g., aloferon-1-HGVSGHGQHGVHG
(SEQ ID NO: 41), aloferon-2-GVSGHGQHGVHG (SEQ ID NO: 42)), CPG
10101--a TLR-9 agonist by Coley Pharmaceuticals/Actilon; (8)
anti-viral synergistic enchancers, i.e., little or no anti-viral
properties alone, but enhances the effect of other
anti-virals--e.g., choroquine, grapefruit juice, hydroxyurea,
leflunomide, mycophenolic acid, resveratrol, ritonavi; as well as
other anti-viral drugs such as amantadine, edoxudine, famciclovir
(FAMVIR.RTM.), penciclovir, fascarnet, fosfonet, ganciclovir
(CYTOVENE.RTM., CYMEVENE.RTM., VITRASERT.RTM.), gardasil,
ibacitabine, imunovir, moroxydine, nexavir, peramivir, pleconaril,
podophyllotoxin, ribavirin, rimantadine, trifluridine, trizivir,
tromantadine, truvada, valaciclovir, valganciclovir, vidarabine,
and interferon enhancers such as EMZ702 by Transition Therapeutics,
histamine dihydrochloride (E.g., Ceplene.RTM.+IFN-.alpha.); and (9)
miscellaneous or unclassified anti-virals such as: KPE-02003002
(Artenimol) by Kemin Pharmaceuticals, mitoquinone--a coenzyme Q10
anti-oxidant agonist by Antipodean Pharmaceuticals,
alpha-glucosydase I inhibitors (E.g., MX-3253-celgosivir by Migenix
Pharmaceuticals, castanospermine, glucocorticoid antagonists (e.g.,
HCV IRES inhibitors, mifepristone, VGX-410C by VGX
Pharmaceuticals), hepatic agonists (E.g., PYN17 by Phynova
Pharmaceuticals), anti-viral agents derived from traditional herbal
therapies, e.g., PYN18 by Phynova Pharmaceuticals, caspase
inhibitors (E.g., LB-84451--by LG Life Sciences,
emricasan--PF-03491390/IDN-6556 by Pfizer), cyclosporine analogs
that inhibit viral replication by preventing binding to cyclophilin
A (E.g., SDZ NIM 911 by Novartis, Debio-025 by Debiopharm).
[0163] The term "anti fungal agent" includes any molecule that
inhibits or abolishes the growth, morbity and/or survival of fungi.
This includes for example, (1) polyene antifungals such as
natamyin, rimocidin, filipin, nystatin, Amphotericin B, candicin;
(2) imidazoles such as miconazole, ketoconazole) (LOTRIMIN.RTM.,
econazole, bifonazole, butoconazole, fenticonazole, isoconazole,
oxiconazole, sertaconazole (ERTACZO.RTM.), sulconazole,
tioconazole, (3) triazoles such as fluconazole, itraconazole,
isavuconazole, ravuconazole posaconazole, voriconazole,
terconazole; (4) allylamines such as terbinafine (LAMISIL.RTM.),
amorolfine, naftifine (Naftin.RTM.), butenafine (LOTRIMIN
ULTRA.RTM.); (5) Echinocandins, such as anidulafungin, caspofungin,
micafungin, and other substances with anti-fungal properties such
as benzoic acid, cicclopix, flucytosine, griseofulvin, gentian
violet, haloprogin, tolnaftate (TINACTIN.RTM., DESENEX.RTM.,
AFTATE.RTM.), undecylenic acid, tea tree oil--ISO 4730 (Oil of
Melaleuca, Terpinen-4-ol type) citronella oil, lemon grass, orange
oil, palmarosa oil, patchouli, lemon myrtle, neem seed oil, Coconut
Oil.
[0164] The term "anti protozoan agent" or "anti protozoal agent"
includes any molecule that inhibits or abolishes the growth,
morbidity and/or survival or protozoan organisms. Example
anti-protozoan agents include, (1) anti-malarial agents, E.g.,
quinine, quinimax, quinidine, quinimax, chloroquine (ARALEN.RTM.),
Hydroxycloroquine (PLAQUENIL.RTM.), amodiaquine, pyrimethamine
(DARAPRIM.RTM.), sulphadoxine, proguanil, mefloquine (LARIAM.RTM.),
halofantrine, primaquine, artemesinin and it derivatives (e.g.,
artemether, artensunate, dihydroartemisinin, arteether),
clindamycin and combinations thereof; (2) protease inhibitors, and
the drugs, benznidaole, buparvaquone, carbarsone, clioquinol,
disulfiram, eflornithine, emetine, furazolidone, meglumine
antimoniate, melarsoprol, metronidazole (FLAGYL.RTM.), miltefosine,
nifurtimox, nitazoxanide, ornidazole, paromomycin sulfate,
pentamidine, pyrimethamine (DARAPRIM.RTM.), secnidazole,
tinidazole.
[0165] The term "vaccine" as used herein includes any nonpathogenic
immunogen that, when inoculated into a host, induces protective
immunity against a specific pathogen. Vaccines can take many forms.
Vaccines can be whole organisms that share important antigens with
the pathogem, but are not pathogenic themselves (e.g., cowpox).
Vaccines can also be prepared from killed (e.g., Salk polio
vaccine) or attenuated (lost ability to produce disease--e.g.,
Sabin polio vaccine). Vaccines can also be prepared from purified
macromolecules isolated from the pathogenic organism. For example,
toxoid vaccines (e.g., tetanus and diphtheria) containing the
inactive form of soluble bacterial toxin--resulting in the
production of anti-toxin antibodies, but not immunity to the intact
bacteria. Subunit vaccines (e.g., Hepatitis B) contain only a
single immunogenic protein isolated from the pathogen of interest.
Hapten conjugate vaccines attaches certain carbohydrate or
polypeptide epitopes isolated from the pathogen of interest to
immunogenic carriers, such as tetanus toxoid. These strategies
essentially use the epitopes as haptens to induce antibody
production, which then recognize the same epitope in the native
pathogen. However, to be maximally effective, such vaccines must
incorporate both B- and T-cell cell epitopes, and the T-cell
epitopes must be chosen to ensure that they can be recognized,
presented and responded to by the immune systems of the host
individuals.
[0166] DNA vaccines exploit the ability of host cells to take up
and express DNA encoding pathogenic proteins that is injected
intramuscularly.
[0167] Examples of anti-viral vaccines that can be used in
combination with the anti-PD-L1 antibodies for the methods
described herein include: HCV vaccine (virasome) by Pevion
Biotech., TG4040 (MVA-HCV by Transgene viron designed to enhance
cellular (Cytotoxic T lymphocytes CD4+ and CD8+) immune response
against NS3, NS4 and NS5B, CHRONVAC.RTM.--a codon-optimized NS3/4a
DNA vaccine by Inovio Biomedical, HCV/CpG vaccines by Novartis,
GI-5005--an HCV vaccine by Globeimmune, IC41 a mixture of synthetic
peptides having HCV CD4 and CD8 T epitopes in combination with
poly-L-arginine by Intercell.
[0168] Host responses to immunogens can be enhanced if administered
as a mixture with adjuvants. Immune adjuvants function in one or
more of the following ways: (1) prolonging retention of the
immunogen, (2) increased effective size of the immunogen (and hence
promoting phagocytosis and presentation to macrophages), (3)
stimulating the influx of macrophage or other immune cells to the
injection site, or (4) promoting local cytokine production and
other immunologic activities. Example adjuvants include: complete
Freund's adjuvant (CFA), aluminum salts, and mycobacterial derived
proteins such as muramyl di- or tri-peptides.
[0169] The term "antibody" includes monoclonal antibodies
(including full length antibodies which have an immunoglobulin Fc
region), antibody compositions with polyepitopic specificity,
multispecific antibodies (e.g., bispecific antibodies, diabodies,
and single-chain molecules, as well as antibody fragments (e.g.,
Fab, F(ab').sub.2, and Fv). The term "immunoglobulin" (Ig) is used
interchangeably with "antibody" herein.
[0170] The basic 4-chain antibody unit is a heterotetrameric
glycoprotein composed of two identical light (L) chains and two
identical heavy (H) chains. An IgM antibody consists of 5 of the
basic heterotetramer units along with an additional polypeptide
called a J chain, and contains 10 antigen binding sites, while IgA
antibodies comprise from 2-5 of the basic 4-chain units which can
polymerize to form polyvalent assemblages in combination with the J
chain. In the case of IgGs, the 4-chain unit is generally about
150,000 daltons. Each L chain is linked to an H chain by one
covalent disulfide bond, while the two H chains are linked to each
other by one or more disulfide bonds depending on the H chain
isotype. Each H and L chain also has regularly spaced intrachain
disulfide bridges. Each H chain has at the N-terminus, a variable
domain (V.sub.H) followed by three constant domains (C.sub.H) for
each of the .alpha. and .gamma. chains and four C.sub.H domains for
.mu. and .epsilon. isotypes. Each L chain has at the N-terminus, a
variable domain (V.sub.L) followed by a constant domain at its
other end. The V.sub.L is aligned with the V.sub.H and the C.sub.L
is aligned with the first constant domain of the heavy chain
(C.sub.H1). Particular amino acid residues are believed to form an
interface between the light chain and heavy chain variable domains.
The pairing of a V.sub.H and V.sub.L together forms a single
antigen-binding site. For the structure and properties of the
different classes of antibodies, see e.g., Basic and Clinical
Immunology, 8th Edition, Daniel P. Sties, Abba I. Ten and Tristram
G. Parsolw (eds), Appleton & Lange, Norwalk, Conn., 1994, page
71 and Chapter 6. The L chain from any vertebrate species can be
assigned to one of two clearly distinct types, called kappa and
lambda, based on the amino acid sequences of their constant
domains. Depending on the amino acid sequence of the constant
domain of their heavy chains (CH), immunoglobulins can be assigned
to different classes or isotypes. There are five classes of
immunoglobulins: IgA, IgD, IgE, IgG and IgM, having heavy chains
designated .alpha., .delta., .epsilon., .gamma. and .mu.,
respectively. The .gamma. and .alpha. classes are further divided
into subclasses on the basis of relatively minor differences in the
CH sequence and function, e.g., humans express the following
subclasses: IgG1, IgG2A, IgG2B, IgG3, IgG4, IgA1 and IgA2.
[0171] An "isolated" antibody is one that has been identified,
separated and/or recovered from a component of its production
environment (E.g., natural or recombinant) Preferably, the isolated
polypeptide is free of association with all other components from
its production environment. Contaminant components of its
production environment, such as that resulting from recombinant
transfected cells, are materials that would typically interfere
with research, diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the antibody, and
may include enzymes, hormones, and other proteinaceous or
non-proteinaceous solutes. In preferred embodiments, the
polypeptide will be purified: (1) to greater than 95% by weight of
antibody as determined by, for example, the Lowry method, and in
some embodiments, to greater than 99% by weight; (1) to a degree
sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of N-terminal or internal
amino acid sequence by use of a spinning cup sequenator, or (3) to
homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under non-reducing or reducing conditions
using Coomassie blue or, preferably, silver stain. Isolated
antibody includes the antibody in situ within recombinant cells
since at least one component of the antibody's natural environment
will not be present. Ordinarily, however, an isolated polypeptide
or antibody will be prepared by at least one purification step.
[0172] The "variable region" or "variable domain" of an antibody
refers to the amino-terminal domains of the heavy or light chain of
the antibody. The variable domains of the heavy chain and light
chain may be referred to as "VH" and "VL", respectively. These
domains are generally the most variable parts of the antibody
(relative to other antibodies of the same class) and contain the
antigen binding sites.
[0173] The term "variable" refers to the fact that certain segments
of the variable domains differ extensively in sequence among
antibodies. The V domain mediates antigen binding and defines the
specificity of a particular antibody for its particular antigen.
However, the variability is not evenly distributed across the
entire span of the variable domains. Instead, it is concentrated in
three segments called hypervariable regions (HVRs) both in the
light-chain and the heavy chain variable domains. The more highly
conserved portions of variable domains are called the framework
regions (FR). The variable domains of native heavy and light chains
each comprise four FR regions, largely adopting a beta-sheet
configuration, connected by three HVRs, which form loops
connecting, and in some cases forming part of, the beta-sheet
structure. The HVRs in each chain are held together in close
proximity by the FR regions and, with the HVRs from the other
chain, contribute to the formation of the antigen binding site of
antibodies (see Kabat et al., Sequences of Immunological Interest,
Fifth Edition, National Institute of Health, Bethesda, Md. (1991)).
The constant domains are not involved directly in the binding of
antibody to an antigen, but exhibit various effector functions,
such as participation of the antibody in antibody-dependent
cellular toxicity.
[0174] The term "monoclonal antibody" as used herein refers to an
antibody obtained from a population of substantially homogeneous
antibodies, i.e., the individual antibodies comprising the
population are identical except for possible naturally occurring
mutations and/or post-translation modifications (e.g.,
isomerizations, amidations) that may be present in minor amounts.
Monoclonal antibodies are highly specific, being directed against a
single antigenic site. In contrast to polyclonal antibody
preparations which typically include different antibodies directed
against different determinants (epitopes), each monoclonal antibody
is directed against a single determinant on the antigen. In
addition to their specificity, the monoclonal antibodies are
advantageous in that they are synthesized by the hybridoma culture,
uncontaminated by other immunoglobulins. The modifier "monoclonal"
indicates the character of the antibody as being obtained from a
substantially homogeneous population of antibodies, and is not to
be construed as requiring production of the antibody by any
particular method. For example, the monoclonal antibodies to be
used in accordance with the present invention may be made by a
variety of techniques, including, for example, the hybridoma method
(e.g., Kohler and Milstein., Nature, 256:495-97 (1975); Hongo et
al., Hybridoma, 14 (3): 253-260 (1995), Harlow et al., Antibodies:
A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2.sup.nd
ed. 1988); Hammerling et al., in: Monoclonal Antibodies and T-Cell
Hybridomas 563-681 (Elsevier, N.Y., 1981)), recombinant DNA methods
(see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567), phage-display technologies
(see, e.g., Clackson et al., Nature, 352: 624-628 (1991); Marks et
al., J. Mol. Biol. 222: 581-597 (1992); Sidhu et al., J. Mol. Biol.
338(2): 299-310 (2004); Lee et al., J. Mol. Biol. 340(5): 1073-1093
(2004); Fellouse, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 101(34): 12467-12472
(2004); and Lee et al., J. Immunol. Methods 284(1-2): 119-132
(2004), and technologies for producing human or human-like
antibodies in animals that have parts or all of the human
immunoglobulin loci or genes encoding human immunoglobulin
sequences (see, e.g., WO 1998/24893; WO 1996/34096; WO 1996/33735;
WO 1991/10741; Jakobovits et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:
2551 (1993); Jakobovits et al., Nature 362: 255-258 (1993);
Bruggemann et al., Year in Immunol. 7:33 (1993); U.S. Pat. Nos.
5,545,807; 5,545,806; 5,569,825; 5,625,126; 5,633,425; and
5,661,016; Marks et al., Bio/Technology 10: 779-783 (1992); Lonberg
et al., Nature 368: 856-859 (1994); Morrison, Nature 368: 812-813
(1994); Fishwild et al., Nature Biotechnol. 14: 845-851 (1996);
Neuberger, Nature Biotechnol. 14: 826 (1996); and Lonberg and
Huszar, Intern. Rev. Immunol. 13: 65-93 (1995).
[0175] The term "naked antibody" refers to an antibody that is not
conjugated to a cytotoxic moiety or radiolabel.
[0176] The terms "full-length antibody," "intact antibody" or
"whole antibody" are used interchangeably to refer to an antibody
in its substantially intact form, as opposed to an antibody
fragment. Specifically whole antibodies include those with heavy
and light chains including an Fc region. The constant domains may
be native sequence constant domains (e.g., human native sequence
constant domains) or amino acid sequence variants thereof. In some
cases, the intact antibody may have one or more effector
functions.
[0177] An "antibody fragment" comprises a portion of an intact
antibody, preferably the antigen binding and/or the variable region
of the intact antibody. Examples of antibody fragments include Fab,
Fab', F(ab').sub.2 and Fv fragments; diabodies; linear antibodies
(see U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,870, Example 2; Zapata et al., Protein
Eng. 8(10): 1057-1062 [1995]); single-chain antibody molecules and
multispecific antibodies formed from antibody fragments. Papain
digestion of antibodies produced two identical antigen-binding
fragments, called "Fab" fragments, and a residual "Fc" fragment, a
designation reflecting the ability to crystallize readily. The Fab
fragment consists of an entire L chain along with the variable
region domain of the H chain (V.sub.H), and the first constant
domain of one heavy chain (C.sub.H1). Each Fab fragment is
monovalent with respect to antigen binding, i.e., it has a single
antigen-binding site. Pepsin treatment of an antibody yields a
single large F(ab').sub.2 fragment which roughly corresponds to two
disulfide linked Fab fragments having different antigen-binding
activity and is still capable of cross-linking antigen. Fab'
fragments differ from Fab fragments by having a few additional
residues at the carboxy terminus of the C.sub.H1 domain including
one or more cysteines from the antibody hinge region. Fab'-SH is
the designation herein for Fab' in which the cysteine residue(s) of
the constant domains bear a free thiol group. F(ab').sub.2 antibody
fragments originally were produced as pairs of Fab' fragments which
have hinge cysteines between them. Other chemical couplings of
antibody fragments are also known.
[0178] The Fc fragment comprises the carboxy-terminal portions of
both H chains held together by disulfides. The effector functions
of antibodies are determined by sequences in the Fc region, the
region which is also recognized by Fc receptors (FcR) found on
certain types of cells.
[0179] "Fv" is the minimum antibody fragment which contains a
complete antigen-recognition and -binding site. This fragment
consists of a dimer of one heavy- and one light-chain variable
region domain in tight, non-covalent association. From the folding
of these two domains emanate six hypervariable loops (3 loops each
from the H and L chain) that contribute the amino acid residues for
antigen binding and confer antigen binding specificity to the
antibody. However, even a single variable domain (or half of an Fv
comprising only three HVRs specific for an antigen) has the ability
to recognize and bind antigen, although at a lower affinity than
the entire binding site.
[0180] "Single-chain Fv" also abbreviated as "sFv" or "scFv" are
antibody fragments that comprise the V.sub.H and V.sub.L antibody
domains connected into a single polypeptide chain Preferably, the
sFv polypeptide further comprises a polypeptide linker between the
V.sub.H and V.sub.L domains which enables the sFv to form the
desired structure for antigen binding. For a review of the sFv, see
Pluckthun in The Pharmacology of Monoclonal Antibodies, vol. 113,
Rosenburg and Moore eds., Springer-Verlag, New York, pp. 269-315
(1994).
[0181] "Functional fragments" of the antibodies of the invention
comprise a portion of an intact antibody, generally including the
antigen binding or variable region of the intact antibody or the Fc
region of an antibody which retains or has modified FcR binding
capability. Examples of antibody fragments include linear antibody,
single-chain antibody molecules and multispecific antibodies formed
from antibody fragments.
[0182] The term "diabodies" refers to small antibody fragments
prepared by constructing sFv fragments (see preceding paragraph)
with short linkers (about 5-10) residues) between the V.sub.H and
V.sub.L domains such that inter-chain but not intra-chain pairing
of the V domains is achieved, thereby resulting in a bivalent
fragment, i.e., a fragment having two antigen-binding sites.
Bispecific diabodies are heterodimers of two "crossover" sFv
fragments in which the V.sub.H and V.sub.L domains of the two
antibodies are present on different polypeptide chains. Diabodies
are described in greater detail in, for example, EP 404,097; WO
93/11161; Hollinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:
6444-6448 (1993).
[0183] The monoclonal antibodies herein specifically include
"chimeric" antibodies (immunoglobulins) in which a portion of the
heavy and/or light chain is identical with or homologous to
corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from a particular
species or belonging to a particular antibody class or subclass,
while the remainder of the chain(s) is(are) identical with or
homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from
another species or belonging to another antibody class or subclass,
as well as fragments of such antibodies, so long as they exhibit
the desired biological activity (U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567; Morrison
et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 81:6851-6855 (1984)). Chimeric
antibodies of interest herein include PRIMATIZED.RTM. antibodies
wherein the antigen-binding region of the antibody is derived from
an antibody produced by, e.g., immunizing macaque monkeys with an
antigen of interest. As used herein, "humanized antibody" is used a
subset of "chimeric antibodies."
[0184] "Humanized" forms of non-human (e.g., murine) antibodies are
chimeric antibodies that contain minimal sequence derived from
non-human immunoglobulin. In one embodiment, a humanized antibody
is a human immunoglobulin (recipient antibody) in which residues
from an HVR (hereinafter defined) of the recipient are replaced by
residues from an HVR of a non-human species (donor antibody) such
as mouse, rat, rabbit or non-human primate having the desired
specificity, affinity, and/or capacity. In some instances,
framework ("FR") residues of the human immunoglobulin are replaced
by corresponding non-human residues. Furthermore, humanized
antibodies may comprise residues that are not found in the
recipient antibody or in the donor antibody. These modifications
may be made to further refine antibody performance, such as binding
affinity. In general, a humanized antibody will comprise
substantially all of at least one, and typically two, variable
domains, in which all or substantially all of the hypervariable
loops correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin sequence,
and all or substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human
immunoglobulin sequence, although the FR regions may include one or
more individual FR residue substitutions that improve antibody
performance, such as binding affinity, isomerization,
immunogenicity, etc. The number of these amino acid substitutions
in the FR are typically no more than 6 in the H chain, and in the L
chain, no more than 3 The humanized antibody optionally will also
comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region
(Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin. For further
details, see, e.g., Jones et al., Nature 321:522-525 (1986);
Riechmann et al., Nature 332:323-329 (1988); and Presta, Curr. Op.
Struct. Biol. 2:593-596 (1992). See also, for example, Vaswani and
Hamilton, Ann. Allergy, Asthma & Immunol. 1:105-115 (1998);
Harris, Biochem. Soc. Transactions 23:1035-1038 (1995); Hurle and
Gross, Curr. Op. Biotech. 5:428-433 (1994); and U.S. Pat. Nos.
6,982,321 and 7,087,409.
[0185] A "human antibody" is an antibody that possesses an
amino-acid sequence corresponding to that of an antibody produced
by a human and/or has been made using any of the techniques for
making human antibodies as disclosed herein. This definition of a
human antibody specifically excludes a humanized antibody
comprising non-human antigen-binding residues. Human antibodies can
be produced using various techniques known in the art, including
phage-display libraries. Hoogenboom and Winter, J. Mol. Biol.,
227:381 (1991); Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol., 222:581 (1991). Also
available for the preparation of human monoclonal antibodies are
methods described in Cole et al., Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer
Therapy, Alan R. Liss, p. 77 (1985); Boerner et al., J. Immunol.,
147(1):86-95 (1991). See also van Dijk and van de Winkel, Curr.
Opin. Pharmacol., 5: 368-74 (2001). Human antibodies can be
prepared by administering the antigen to a transgenic animal that
has been modified to produce such antibodies in response to
antigenic challenge, but whose endogenous loci have been disabled,
e.g., immunized xenomice (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,075,181 and
6,150,584 regarding XENOMOUSE.TM. technology). See also, for
example, Li et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 103:3557-3562
(2006) regarding human antibodies generated via a human B-cell
hybridoma technology.
[0186] The term "hypervariable region," "HVR," or "HV," when used
herein refers to the regions of an antibody variable domain which
are hypervariable in sequence and/or form structurally defined
loops. Generally, antibodies comprise six HVRs; three in the VH
(H1, H2, H3), and three in the VL (L1, L2, L3). In native
antibodies, H3 and L3 display the most diversity of the six HVRs,
and H3 in particular is believed to play a unique role in
conferring fine specificity to antibodies. See, e.g., Xu et al.,
Immunity 13:37-45 (2000); Johnson and Wu, in Methods in Molecular
Biology 248:1-25 (Lo, ed., Human Press, Totowa, N.J., 2003).
Indeed, naturally occurring camelid antibodies consisting of a
heavy chain only are functional and stable in the absence of light
chain See, e.g., Hamers-Casterman et al., Nature 363:446-448
(1993); Sheriff et al., Nature Struct. Biol. 3:733-736 (1996).
[0187] A number of HVR delineations are in use and are encompassed
herein. The Kabat Complementarity Determining Regions (CDRs) are
based on sequence variability and are the most commonly used (Kabat
et al., Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, 5th Ed.
Public Health Service, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md.
(1991)). Chothia refers instead to the location of the structural
loops (Chothia and Lesk, J. Mol. Biol. 196:901-917 (1987)). The AbM
HVRs represent a compromise between the Kabat HVRs and Chothia
structural loops, and are used by Oxford Molecular's AbM antibody
modeling software. The "contact" HVRs are based on an analysis of
the available complex crystal structures. The residues from each of
these HVRs are noted below.
TABLE-US-00017 Loop Kabat AbM Chothia Contact L1 L24-L34 L24-L34
L26-L32 L30-L36 L2 L50-L56 L50-L56 L50-L52 L46-L55 L3 L89-L97
L89-L97 L91-L96 L89-L96 H1 H31-H35B H26-H35B H26-H32 H30-H35B
(Kabat Numbering) H1 H31-H35 H26-H35 H26-H32 H30-H35 (Chothia
Numbering) H2 H50-H65 H50-H58 H53-H55 H47-H58 H3 H95-H102 H95-H102
H96-H101 H93-H101
[0188] HVRs may comprise "extended HVRs" as follows: 24-36 or 24-34
(L1), 46-56 or 50-56 (L2) and 89-97 or 89-96 (L3) in the VL and
26-35 (H1), 50-65 or 49-65 (H2) and 93-102, 94-102, or 95-102 (H3)
in the VH. The variable domain residues are numbered according to
Kabat et al., supra, for each of these definitions.
[0189] The expression "variable-domain residue-numbering as in
Kabat" or "amino-acid-position numbering as in Kabat," and
variations thereof, refers to the numbering system used for
heavy-chain variable domains or light-chain variable domains of the
compilation of antibodies in Kabat et al., supra. Using this
numbering system, the actual linear amino acid sequence may contain
fewer or additional amino acids corresponding to a shortening of,
or insertion into, a FR or HVR of the variable domain. For example,
a heavy-chain variable domain may include a single amino acid
insert (residue 52a according to Kabat) after residue 52 of H2 and
inserted residues (e.g. residues 82a, 82b, and 82c, etc. according
to Kabat) after heavy-chain FR residue 82. The Kabat numbering of
residues may be determined for a given antibody by alignment at
regions of homology of the sequence of the antibody with a
"standard" Kabat numbered sequence.
[0190] "Framework" or "FR" residues are those variable-domain
residues other than the HVR residues as herein defined.
[0191] A "human consensus framework" or "acceptor human framework"
is a framework that represents the most commonly occurring amino
acid residues in a selection of human immunoglobulin VL or VH
framework sequences. Generally, the selection of human
immunoglobulin VL or VH sequences is from a subgroup of variable
domain sequences. Generally, the subgroup of sequences is a
subgroup as in Kabat et al., Sequences of Proteins of Immunological
Interest, 5.sup.th Ed. Public Health Service, National Institutes
of Health, Bethesda, Md. (1991). Examples include for the VL, the
subgroup may be subgroup kappa I, kappa II, kappa III or kappa IV
as in Kabat et al., supra. Additionally, for the VH, the subgroup
may be subgroup I, subgroup II, or subgroup III as in Kabat et al.,
supra. Alternatively, a human consensus framework can be derived
from the above in which particular residues, such as when a human
framework residue is selected based on its homology to the donor
framework by aligning the donor framework sequence with a
collection of various human framework sequences. An acceptor human
framework "derived from" a human immunoglobulin framework or a
human consensus framework may comprise the same amino acid sequence
thereof, or it may contain pre-existing amino acid sequence
changes. In some embodiments, the number of pre-existing amino acid
changes are 10 or less, 9 or less, 8 or less, 7 or less, 6 or less,
5 or less, 4 or less, 3 or less, or 2 or less.
[0192] A "VH subgroup III consensus framework" comprises the
consensus sequence obtained from the amino acid sequences in
variable heavy subgroup III of Kabat et al., supra. In one
embodiment, the VH subgroup III consensus framework amino acid
sequence comprises at least a portion or all of each of the
following sequences: EVQLVESGGGLVQPGGSLRLSCAAS (HC-FR1)(SEQ ID
NO:4), WVRQAPGKGLEWV (HC-FR2), (SEQ ID NO:5),
RFTISADTSKNTAYLQMNSLRAEDTAVYYCAR (HC-FR3, SEQ ID NO:6), WGQGTLVTVSA
(HC-FR4), (SEQ ID NO:7).
[0193] A "VL kappa I consensus framework" comprises the consensus
sequence obtained from the amino acid sequences in variable light
kappa subgroup I of Kabat et al., supra. In one embodiment, the VH
subgroup I consensus framework amino acid sequence comprises at
least a portion or all of each of the following sequences:
DIQMTQSPSSLSASVGDRVTITC (LC-FR1) (SEQ ID NO:11), WYQQKPGKAPKLLIY
(LC-FR2) (SEQ ID NO:12), GVPSRFSGSGSGTDFTLTISSLQPEDFATYYC
(LC-FR3)(SEQ ID NO:13), FGQGTKVEIKR (LC-FR4)(SEQ ID NO:14).
[0194] An "amino-acid modification" at a specified position, e.g.
of the Fc region, refers to the substitution or deletion of the
specified residue, or the insertion of at least one amino acid
residue adjacent the specified residue. Insertion "adjacent" to a
specified residue means insertion within one to two residues
thereof. The insertion may be N-terminal or C-terminal to the
specified residue. The preferred amino acid modification herein is
a substitution.
[0195] An "affinity-matured" antibody is one with one or more
alterations in one or more HVRs thereof that result in an
improvement in the affinity of the antibody for antigen, compared
to a parent antibody that does not possess those alteration(s). In
one embodiment, an affinity-matured antibody has nanomolar or even
picomolar affinities for the target antigen. Affinity-matured
antibodies are produced by procedures known in the art. For
example, Marks et al., Bio/Technology 10:779-783 (1992) describes
affinity maturation by VH- and VL-domain shuffling. Random
mutagenesis of HVR and/or framework residues is described by, for
example: Barbas et al. Proc Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 91:3809-3813
(1994); Schier et al. Gene 169:147-155 (1995); Yelton et al. J.
Immunol. 155:1994-2004 (1995); Jackson et al., J. Immunol.
154(7):3310-9 (1995); and Hawkins et al, J. Mol. Biol. 226:889-896
(1992).
[0196] As use herein, the term "specifically binds to" or is
"specific for" refers to measurable and reproducible interactions
such as binding between a target and an antibody, which is
determinative of the presence of the target in the presence of a
heterogeneous population of molecules including biological
molecules. For example, an antibody that specifically binds to a
target (which can be an epitope) is an antibody that binds this
target with greater affinity, avidity, more readily, and/or with
greater duration than it binds to other targets. In one embodiment,
the extent of binding of an antibody to an unrelated target is less
than about 10% of the binding of the antibody to the target as
measured, e.g., by a radioimmunoassay (RIA). In certain
embodiments, an antibody that specifically binds to a target has a
dissociation constant (Kd) of .ltoreq.100 nM, .ltoreq.10 nM,
.ltoreq.1 nM, or .ltoreq.0.1 nM. In certain embodiments, an
antibody specifically binds to an epitope on a protein that is
conserved among the protein from different species. In another
embodiment, specific binding can include, but does not require
exclusive binding.
[0197] A "blocking" antibody or an "antagonist" antibody is one
that inhibits or reduces a biological activity of the antigen it
binds. In some embodiments, blocking antibodies or antagonist
antibodies substantially or completely inhibit the biological
activity of the antigen. The anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention
block the signaling through PD-1 so as to restore a functional
response by T-cells from a dysfunctional state to antigen
stimulation.
[0198] An "agonist" or activating antibody is one that enhances or
initiates signaling by the antigen to which it binds. In some
embodiments, agonist antibodies cause or activate signaling without
the presence of the natural ligand.
[0199] The term "solid phase" describes a non-aqueous matrix to
which the antibody of the present invention can adhere. Examples of
solid phases encompassed herein include those formed partially or
entirely of glass (e.g., controlled pore glass), polysaccharides
(e.g., agarose), polyacrylamides, polystyrene, polyvinyl alcohol
and silicones. In certain embodiments, depending on the context,
the solid phase can comprise the well of an assay plate; in others
it is a purification column (e.g., an affinity chromatography
column). This term also includes a discontinuous solid phase of
discrete particles, such as those described in U.S. Pat. No.
4,275,149.
[0200] "Antibody effector functions" refer to those biological
activities attributable to the Fc region (a native sequence Fc
region or amino acid sequence variant Fc region) of an antibody,
and vary with the antibody isotype. Examples of antibody effector
functions include: C1q binding and complement dependent
cytotoxicity; Fc receptor binding; antibody--dependent
cell-mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC); phagocytosis; down regulation of
cell surface receptors (e.g., B cell receptors); and B cell
activation. "Reduced or minimized" antibody effector function means
that which is reduced by at least 50% (alternatively 60%, 65%, 70%,
75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%) from the wild type or
unmodified antibody. The determination of antibody effector
function is readily determinable and measurable by one of ordinary
skill in the art. In a preferred embodiment, the antibody effector
functions of complement binding, complement dependent cytotoxicity
and antibody dependent cytotoxicity are affected. In some
embodiments of the invention, effector function is eliminated
through a mutation in the constant region that eliminated
glycosylation, e.g., "effector-less mutation." In one aspect, the
effector-less mutation is an N297A or DANA mutation (D265A+N297A)
in the CH2 region. Shields et al., J. Biol. Chem. 276(9): 6591-6604
(2001). Alternatively, additional mutations resulting in reduced or
eliminated effector function include: K322A and L234A/L235A (LALA).
Alternatively, effector function can be reduced or eliminated
through production techniques, such as expression in host cells
that do not glycosylate (e.g., E. coli.) or in which result in an
altered glycolsylation pattern that is ineffective or less
effective at promoting effector function (e.g., Shinkawa et al., J.
Biol. Chem. 278(5): 3466-3473 (2003).
[0201] "Antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity" or ADCC
refers to a form of cytotoxicity in which secreted Ig bound onto Fc
receptors (FcRs) present on certain cytotoxic cells (e.g., natural
killer (NK) cells, neutrophils and macrophages) enable these
cytotoxic effector cells to bind specifically to an antigen-bearing
target cell and subsequently kill the target cell with cytotoxins.
The antibodies "arm" the cytotoxic cells and are required for
killing of the target cell by this mechanism. The primary cells for
mediating ADCC, NK cells, express Fc.gamma.RIII only, whereas
monocytes express Fc.gamma.RI, Fc.gamma.RII and Fc.gamma.RIII. Fc
expression on hematopoietic cells is summarized in Table 3 on page
464 of Ravetch and Kinet, Annu. Rev. Immunol. 9: 457-92 (1991). To
assess ADCC activity of a molecule of interest, an in vitro ADCC
assay, such as that described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,500,362 or
5,821,337 may be performed. Useful effector cells for such assays
include peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) and natural
killer (NK) cells. Alternatively, or additionally, ADCC activity of
the molecule of interest may be assessed in vivo, e.g., in an
animal model such as that disclosed in Clynes et al., PNAS USA
95:652-656 (1998).
[0202] Unless indicated otherwise herein, the numbering of the
residues in an immunoglobulin heavy chain is that of the EU index
as in Kabat et al., supra. The "EU index as in Kabat" refers to the
residue numbering of the human IgG1 EU antibody.
[0203] The term "Fc region" herein is used to define a C-terminal
region of an immunoglobulin heavy chain, including native-sequence
Fc regions and variant Fc regions. Although the boundaries of the
Fc region of an immunoglobulin heavy chain might vary, the human
IgG heavy-chain Fc region is usually defined to stretch from an
amino acid residue at position Cys226, or from Pro230, to the
carboxyl-terminus thereof. The C-terminal lysine (residue 447
according to the EU numbering system) of the Fc region may be
removed, for example, during production or purification of the
antibody, or by recombinantly engineering the nucleic acid encoding
a heavy chain of the antibody. Accordingly, a composition of intact
antibodies may comprise antibody populations with all K447 residues
removed, antibody populations with no K447 residues removed, and
antibody populations having a mixture of antibodies with and
without the K447 residue. Suitable native-sequence Fc regions for
use in the antibodies of the invention include human IgG1, IgG2
(IgG2A, IgG2B), IgG3 and IgG4.
[0204] "Fc receptor" or "FcR" describes a receptor that binds to
the Fc region of an antibody. The preferred FcR is a native
sequence human FcR. Moreover, a preferred FcR is one which binds an
IgG antibody (a gamma receptor) and includes receptors of the
Fc.gamma.RI, Fc.gamma.RII, and Fc.gamma.RIII subclasses, including
allelic variants and alternatively spliced forms of these
receptors, Fc.gamma.RII receptors include Fc.gamma.RIIA (an
"activating receptor") and Fc.gamma.RIIB (an "inhibiting
receptor"), which have similar amino acid sequences that differ
primarily in the cytoplasmic domains thereof. Activating receptor
Fc.gamma.RIIA contains an immunoreceptor tyrosine-based activation
motif (ITAM) in its cytoplasmic domain. Inhibiting receptor
Fc.gamma.RIIB contains an immunoreceptor tyrosine-based inhibition
motif (ITIM) in its cytoplasmic domain. (see M. Daeron, Annu. Rev.
Immunol. 15:203-234 (1997). FcRs are reviewed in Ravetch and Kinet,
Annu. Rev. Immunol. 9: 457-92 (1991); Capel et al., Immunomethods
4: 25-34 (1994); and de Haas et al., J. Lab. Clin. Med. 126: 330-41
(1995). Other FcRs, including those to be identified in the future,
are encompassed by the term "FcR" herein.
[0205] The term "Fc receptor" or "FcR" also includes the neonatal
receptor, FcRn, which is responsible for the transfer of maternal
IgGs to the fetus. Guyer et al., J. Immunol. 117: 587 (1976) and
Kim et al., J. Immunol. 24: 249 (1994). Methods of measuring
binding to FcRn are known (see, e.g., Ghetie and Ward, Immunol.
Today 18: (12): 592-8 (1997); Ghetie et al., Nature Biotechnology
15 (7): 637-40 (1997); Hinton et al., J. Biol. Chem. 279(8): 6213-6
(2004); WO 2004/92219 (Hinton et al.). Binding to FcRn in vivo and
serum half-life of human FcRn high-affinity binding polypeptides
can be assayed, e.g., in transgenic mice or transfected human cell
lines expressing human FcRn, or in primates to which the
polypeptides having a variant Fc region are administered. WO
2004/42072 (Presta) describes antibody variants which improved or
diminished binding to FcRs. See also, e.g., Shields et al., J.
Biol. Chem. 9(2): 6591-6604 (2001).
[0206] "Effector cells" are leukocytes which express one or more
FcRs and perform effector functions. In one aspect, the effector
cells express at least Fc.gamma.RIII and perform ADCC effector
function. Examples of human leukocytes which mediate ADCC include
peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC), natural killer (NK)
cells, monocytes, cytotoxic T cells and neutrophils. The effector
cells may be isolated from a native source, e.g., blood. Effector
cells generally are lymphocytes associated with the effector phase,
and function to produce cytokines (helper T cells), killing cells
in infected with pathogens (cytotoxic T cells) or secreting
antibodies (differentiated B cells).
[0207] "Complement dependent cytotoxicity" or "CDC" refers to the
lysis of a target cell in the presence of complement. Activation of
the classical complement pathway is initiated by the binding of the
first component of the complement system (C1q) to antibodies (of
the appropriate subclass) which are bound to their cognate antigen.
To assess complement activation, a CDC assay, e.g., as described in
Gazzano-Santoro et al., J. Immunol. Methods 202: 163 (1996), may be
performed. Antibody variants with altered Fc region amino acid
sequences and increased or decreased C1q binding capability are
described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,194,551B1 and WO99/51642. The contents
of those patent publications are specifically incorporated herein
by reference. See, also, Idusogie et al. J. Immunol. 164: 4178-4184
(2000).
[0208] The N-glycosylation site in IgG is at Asn297 in the CH2
domain. The present invention also provides compositions of an
antigen-binding, humanized antibody having an Fc region with
reduced or no effector function. One manner in which this can be
accomplished is an A297N substitution, which has previously been
shown to abolish complement binding and effector function
("effector-less Fc mutant") in an anti-CD20 antibody. Idusgie et
al., supra. As a result of this mutation, the production of
anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the present inventions containing this Fc
mutation in mammalian cells such as CHO will not have any
glycosylation and, which in turn results in reduced or minimal
effector function. Alternatively, antibody effector function may be
eliminated without CH2 substitution by expression in non-mammalian
cells such as E. Coli.
[0209] "Binding affinity" generally refers to the strength of the
sum total of non-covalent interactions between a single binding
site of a molecule (e.g., an antibody) and its binding partner
(e.g., an antigen). Unless indicated otherwise, as used herein,
"binding affinity" refers to intrinsic binding affinity that
reflects a 1:1 interaction between members of a binding pair (e.g.,
antibody and antigen). The affinity of a molecule X for its partner
Y can generally be represented by the dissociation constant (Kd).
Affinity can be measured by common methods known in the art,
including those described herein. Low-affinity antibodies generally
bind antigen slowly and tend to dissociate readily, whereas
high-affinity antibodies generally bind antigen faster and tend to
remain bound longer. A variety of methods of measuring binding
affinity are known in the art, any of which can be used for
purposes of the present invention. Specific illustrative and
exemplary embodiments for measuring binding affinity are described
in the following.
[0210] The "Kd" or "Kd value" according to this invention is in one
embodiment measured by a radiolabeled antigen binding assay (RIA)
performed with the Fab version of the antibody and antigen molecule
as described by the following assay that measures solution binding
affinity of Fabs for antigen by equilibrating Fab with a minimal
concentration of (.sup.125I)-labeled antigen in the presence of a
titration series of unlabeled antigen, then capturing bound antigen
with an anti-Fab antibody-coated plate (Chen, et al., (1999) J. Mol
Biol 293:865-881). To establish conditions for the assay,
microtiter plates (Dynex) are coated overnight with 5 ug/ml of a
capturing anti-Fab antibody (Cappel Labs) in 50 mM sodium carbonate
(pH 9.6), and subsequently blocked with 2% (w/v) bovine serum
albumin in PBS for two to five hours at room temperature
(approximately 23.degree. C.). In a non-adsorbant plate (Nunc
#269620), 100 pM or 26 pM [.sup.125I]-antigen are mixed with serial
dilutions of a Fab of interest (consistent with assessement of an
anti-VEGF antibody, Fab-12, in Presta et al., (1997) Cancer Res.
57:4593-4599). The Fab of interest is then incubated overnight;
however, the incubation may continue for a longer period (e.g., 65
hours) to insure that equilibrium is reached. Thereafter, the
mixtures are transferred to the capture plate for incubation at
room temperature for one hour. The solution is then removed and the
plate washed eight times with 0.1% Tween-20 in PBS. When the plates
have dried, 150 ul/well of scintillant (MicroScint-20; Packard) is
added, and the plates are counted on a Topcount gamma counter
(Packard) for ten minutes. Concentrations of each Fab that give
less than or equal to 20% of maximal binding are chosen for use in
competitive binding assays.
[0211] According to another embodiment, the Kd is measured by using
surface-plasmon resonance assays using a BIACORE.RTM.-2000 or a
BIACORE.RTM.-3000 instrument (BIAcore, Inc., Piscataway, N.J.) at
25.degree. C. with immobilized antigen CM5 chips at .about.10
response units (RU). Briefly, carboxymethylated dextran biosensor
chips (CM5, BIAcore Inc.) are activated with
N-ethyl-N'-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-carbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC)
and N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) according to the supplier's
instructions. Antigen is diluted with 10 mM sodium acetate, pH 4.8,
to 5 .mu.g/ml (.about.0.2 .mu.M) before injection at a flow rate of
5 .mu.L/minute to achieve approximately 10 response units (RU) of
coupled protein. Following the injection of antigen, 1 M
ethanolamine is injected to block unreacted groups. For kinetics
measurements, two-fold serial dilutions of Fab (0.78 nM to 500 nM)
are injected in PBS with 0.05% TWEEN 20.TM. surfactant (PBST) at
25.degree. C. at a flow rate of approximately 25 .mu.L/min.
Association rates (k.sub.on) and dissociation rates (k.sub.off) are
calculated using a simple one-to-one Langmuir binding model
(BIAcore.RTM. Evaluation Software version 3.2) by simultaneously
fitting the association and dissociation sensorgrams. The
equilibrium dissociation constant (Kd) is calculated as the ratio
k.sub.off/k.sub.on. See, e.g., Chen et al., J. Mol. Biol.
293:865-881 (1999). If the on-rate exceeds 10.sup.6M.sup.-1
s.sup.-1 by the surface-plasmon resonance assay above, then the
on-rate can be determined by using a fluorescent quenching
technique that measures the increase or decrease in
fluorescence-emission intensity (excitation=295 nm; emission=340
nm, 16 nm band-pass) at 25.degree. C. of a 20 nM anti-antigen
antibody (Fab form) in PBS, pH 7.2, in the presence of increasing
concentrations of antigen as measured in a spectrometer, such as a
stop-flow-equipped spectrophotometer (Aviv Instruments) or a
8000-series SLM-AMINCO.TM. spectrophotometer (ThermoSpectronic)
with a stirred cuvette.
[0212] An "on-rate," "rate of association," "association rate," or
"k.sub.on" according to this invention can also be determined as
described above using a BIACORE.RTM.-2000 or a BIACORE.RTM.-3000
system (BIAcore, Inc., Piscataway, N.J.) at 25.degree. C. with
immobilized antigen CM5 chips at about 10 response units (RU).
Briefly, carboxymethylated dextran biosensor ships (CM5, BIAcore
Inc.) are activated with N-ethyl-N'-(3-dimethylamino
propyl)-carbodiimide hydrochloride (ECD) and N-hydroxysuccinimide
(NHS) according to the supplier's instructions. Antigen is diluted
with 10 mM sodium acetate, ph 4.8, into 5 mg/ml (.apprxeq.0.2 mM)
before injection at a flow rate of 5 ml/min. to achieve
approximately 10 response units (RU) of coupled protein. Following
the injection of antigen, 1M ethanolamine is added to block
unreacted groups. For kinetics measurements, two-fold serial
dilutions of Fab (0.78 nM to 500 nM) are injected in PBS with 0.05%
Tween 20 (PBST) at 25.degree. C. at a flow rate of approximately 25
ul/min. Association rates (k.sub.on) and dissociation rates
(k.sub.off) are calculated using a simple one-to-one Langmuir
binding model (BIAcore Evaluation Software version 3.2) by
simultaneous fitting the association and dissociation sensorgram.
The equilibrium dissociation constant (Kd) was calculated as the
ratio k.sub.off/k.sub.on. See, e.g., Chen, Y., et al., (1999) J.
Mol Biol 293:865-881. However, if the on-rate exceeds
10.sup.6M.sup.-1 S.sup.-1 by the surface plasmon resonance assay
above, then the on-rate is preferably determined by using a
fluorescent quenching technique that measures the increase or
decrease in fluorescence emission intensity (excitation=295 nm;
emission=340 nm, 16 nm band-pass) at 25.degree. C. of a 20 nM
anti-antigen antibody (Fab form) in PBS, pH 7.2, in the presence of
increasing concentrations of antigen as measured in a spectrometer,
such as a stop-flow equipped spectrophometer (Aviv Instruments) or
a 8000-series SLM-Aminco spectrophotometer (ThermoSpectronic) with
a stirred cuvette.
[0213] The phrase "substantially reduced," or "substantially
different," as used herein, denotes a sufficiently high degree of
difference between two numeric values (generally one associated
with a molecule and the other associated with a
reference/comparator molecule) such that one of skill in the art
would consider the difference between the two values to be of
statistical significance within the context of the biological
characteristic measured by said values (e.g., Kd values). The
difference between said two values is, for example, greater than
about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater
than about 40%, and/or greater than about 50% as a function of the
value for the reference/comparator molecule.
[0214] The term "substantially similar" or "substantially the
same," as used herein, denotes a sufficiently high degree of
similarity between two numeric values (for example, one associated
with an antibody of the invention and the other associated with a
reference/comparator antibody), such that one of skill in the art
would consider the difference between the two values to be of
little or no biological and/or statistical significance within the
context of the biological characteristic measured by said values
(e.g., Kd values). The difference between said two values is, for
example, less than about 50%, less than about 40%, less than about
30%, less than about 20%, and/or less than about 10% as a function
of the reference/comparator value.
[0215] "Percent (%) amino acid sequence identity" and "homology"
with respect to a peptide, polypeptide or antibody sequence are
defined as the percentage of amino acid residues in a candidate
sequence that are identical with the amino acid residues in the
specific peptide or polypeptide sequence, after aligning the
sequences and introducing gaps, if necessary, to achieve the
maximum percent sequence identity, and not considering any
conservative substitutions as part of the sequence identity.
Alignment for purposes of determining percent amino acid sequence
identity can be achieved in various ways that are within the skill
in the art, for instance, using publicly available computer
software such as BLAST, BLAST-2, ALIGN or MEGALIGN.TM. (DNASTAR)
software. Those skilled in the art can determine appropriate
parameters for measuring alignment, including any algorithms needed
to achieve maximal alignment over the full length of the sequences
being compared. For purposes herein, however, % amino acid sequence
identity values are generated using the sequence comparison
computer program ALIGN-2, authored by Genentech, Inc. The source
code of ALIGN-2 has been filed with user documentation in the U.S.
Copyright Office, Washington D.C., 20559, where it is registered
under U.S. Copyright Registration No. TXU510087. The ALIGN-2
program is publicly available through Genentech, Inc., South San
Francisco, Calif. The ALIGN-2 program should be compiled for use on
a UNIX operating system, preferably digital UNIX V4.0D. All
sequence comparison parameters are set by the ALIGN-2 program and
do not vary.
[0216] In situations where ALIGN-2 is employed for amino acid
sequence comparisons, the % amino acid sequence identity of a given
amino acid sequence A to, with, or against a given amino acid
sequence B (which can alternatively be phrased as a given amino
acid sequence A that has or comprises a certain % amino acid
sequence identity to, with, or against a given amino acid sequence
B) is calculated as follows:
100 times the fraction X/Y
where X is the number of amino acid residues scored as identical
matches by the sequence alignment program ALIGN-2 in that program's
alignment of A and B, and where Y is the total number of amino acid
residues in B. It will be appreciated that where the length of
amino acid sequence A is not equal to the length of amino acid
sequence B, the % amino acid sequence identity of A to B will not
equal the % amino acid sequence identity of B to A.
[0217] Unless specifically stated otherwise, all % amino acid
sequence identity values used herein are obtained as described in
the immediately preceding paragraph using the ALIGN-2 computer
program.
[0218] An "isolated" nucleic acid molecule encoding the antibodies
herein is a nucleic acid molecule that is identified and separated
from at least one contaminant nucleic acid molecule with which it
is ordinarily associated in the environment in which it was
produced. Preferably, the isolated nucleic acid is free of
association with all components associated with the production
environment. The isolated nucleic acid molecules encoding the
polypeptides and antibodies herein is in a form other than in the
form or setting in which it is found in nature. Isolated nucleic
acid molecules therefore are distinguished from nucleic acid
encoding the polypeptides and antibodies herein existing naturally
in cells.
[0219] The term "control sequences" refers to DNA sequences
necessary for the expression of an operably linked coding sequence
in a particular host organism. The control sequences that are
suitable for prokaryotes, for example, include a promoter,
optionally an operator sequence, and a ribosome binding site.
Eukaryotic cells are known to utilize promoters, polyadenylation
signals, and enhancers.
[0220] Nucleic acid is "operably linked" when it is placed into a
functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence. For
example, DNA for a presequence or secretory leader is operably
linked to DNA for a polypeptide if it is expressed as a preprotein
that participates in the secretion of the polypeptide; a promoter
or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence if it affects
the transcription of the sequence; or a ribosome binding site is
operably linked to a coding sequence if it is positioned so as to
facilitate translation. Generally, "operably linked" means that the
DNA sequences being linked are contiguous, and, in the case of a
secretory leader, contiguous and in reading phase. However,
enhancers do not have to be contiguous. Linking is accomplished by
ligation at convenient restriction sites. If such sites do not
exist, the synthetic oligonucleotide adaptors or linkers are used
in accordance with conventional practice.
[0221] The term "epitope tagged" when used herein refers to a
chimeric polypeptide comprising a polypeptide or antibody described
herein fused to a "tag polypeptide". The tag polypeptide has enough
residues to provide an epitope against which an antibody can be
made, yet is short enough such that it does not interfere with
activity of the polypeptide to which it is fused. The tag
polypeptide preferably also is fairly unique so that the antibody
does not substantially cross-react with other epitopes. Suitable
tag polypeptides generally have at least six amino acid residues
and usually between about 8 and 50 amino acid residues (preferably,
between about 10 and 20 amino acid residues).
[0222] As used herein, the term "immunoadhesin" designates
antibody-like molecules which combine the binding specificity of a
heterologous protein (an "adhesion") with the effector functions of
immunoglobulin constant domains. Structurally, the immunoadhesins
comprise a fusion of an amino acid sequence with the desired
binding specificity which is other than the antigen recognition and
binding site of an antibody (i.e., is "heterologous"), and an
immunoglobulin constant domain sequence. The adhesin part of an
immunoadhesin molecule typically is a contiguous amino acid
sequence comprising at least the binding site of a receptor or a
ligand. The immunoglobulin constant domain sequence in the
immunoadhesin may be obtained from any immunoglobulin, such as
IgG-1, IgG-2 (including IgG2A and IgG2B), IgG-3, or IgG-4 subtypes,
IgA (including IgA-1 and IgA-2), IgE, IgD or IgM. The Ig fusions
preferably include the substitution of a domain of a polypeptide or
antibody described herein in the place of at least one variable
region within an Ig molecule. In a particularly preferred
embodiment, the immunoglobulin fusion includes the hinge, CH2 and
CH3, or the hinge, CH1, CH2 and CH3 regions of an IgG1 molecule.
For the production of immunoglobulin fusions see also U.S. Pat. No.
5,428,130 issued Jun. 27, 1995. For example, useful immunoadhesins
as second medicaments useful for combination therapy herein include
polypeptides that comprise the extracellular or PD-1 binding
portions of PD-L1 or PD-L2, or vice versa, fused to a constant
domain of an immunoglobulin sequence.
[0223] A "fusion protein" and a "fusion polypeptide" refer to a
polypeptide having two portions covalently linked together, where
each of the portions is a polypeptide having a different properly.
The property may be a biological property, such as activity in
vitro or in vivo. The property may also be simple chemical or
physical property, such as binding to a target molecule, catalysis
of a reaction, etc. The two portions may be linked directly by a
single peptide bond or through a peptide linker will be in reading
frame with each other.
[0224] A "stable" formulation is one in which the protein therein
essentially retains its physical and chemical stability and
integrity upon storage. Various analytical techniques for measuring
protein stability are available in the art and are reviewed in
Peptide and Protein Drug Delivery, 247-301, Vincent Lee Ed., Marcel
Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., Pubs. (1991) and Jones, A. Adv. Drug
Delivery Rev. 10: 29-90 (1993). Stability can be measured at a
selected temperature for a selected time period. For rapid
screening, the formulation may be kept at 40.degree. C. for 2 weeks
to 1 month, at which time stability is measured. Where the
formulation is to be stored at 2-8.degree. C., generally the
formulation should be stable at 30.degree. C. or 40.degree. C. for
at least 1 month and/or stable at 2-8.degree. C. for at least 2
years. Where the formulation is to be stored at 30.degree. C.,
generally the formulation should be stable for at least 2 years at
30.degree. C. and/or stable at 40.degree. C. for at least 6 months.
For example, the extent of aggregation during storage can be used
as an indicator of protein stability. Thus, a "stable" formulation
may be one wherein less than about 10% and preferably less than
about 5% of the protein are present as an aggregate in the
formulation. In other embodiments, any increase in aggregate
formation during storage of the formulation can be determined.
[0225] A "reconstituted" formulation is one which has been prepared
by dissolving a lyophilized protein or antibody formulation in a
diluent such that the protein is dispersed throughout. The
reconstituted formulation is suitable for administration (e.g.
subscutaneous administration) to a patient to be treated with the
protein of interest and, in certain embodiments of the invention,
may be one which is suitable for parenteral or intravenous
administration.
[0226] An "isotonic" formulation is one which has essentially the
same osmotic pressure as human blood. Isotonic formulations will
generally have an osmotic pressure from about 250 to 350 mOsm. The
term "hypotonic" describes a formulation with an osmotic pressure
below that of human blood. Correspondingly, the term "hypertonic"
is used to describe a formulation with an osmotic pressure above
that of human blood. Isotonicity can be measured using a vapor
pressure or ice-freezing type osmometer, for example. The
formulations of the present invention are hypertonic as a result of
the addition of salt and/or buffer.
[0227] "Carriers" as used herein include pharmaceutically
acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers that are nontoxic
to the cell or mammal being exposed thereto at the dosages and
concentrations employed. Often the physiologically acceptable
carrier is an aqueous pH buffered solution. Examples of
physiologically acceptable carriers include buffers such as
phosphate, citrate, and other organic acids; antioxidants including
ascorbic acid; low molecular weight (less than about 10 residues)
polypeptide; proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin, or
immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone;
amino acids such as glycine, glutamine, asparagine, arginine or
lysine; monosaccharides, disaccharides, and other carbohydrates
including glucose, mannose, or dextrins; chelating agents such as
EDTA; sugar alcohols such as mannitol or sorbitol; salt-forming
counterions such as sodium; and/or nonionic surfactants such as
TWEEN.TM., polyethylene glycol (PEG), and PLURONICS.TM..
[0228] A "package insert" refers to instructions customarily
included in commercial packages of medicaments that contain
information about the indications customarily included in
commercial packages of medicaments that contain information about
the indications, usage, dosage, administration, contraindications,
other medicaments to be combined with the packaged product, and/or
warnings concerning the use of such medicaments, etc.
[0229] A "pharmaceutically acceptable acid" includes inorganic and
organic acids which are non toxic at the concentration and manner
in which they are formulated. For example, suitable inorganic acids
include hydrochloric, perchloric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic, nitric,
sulfuric, sulfonic, sulfinic, sulfanilic, phosphoric, carbonic,
etc. Suitable organic acids include straight and branched-chain
alkyl, aromatic, cyclic, cycloaliphatic, arylaliphatic,
heterocyclic, saturated, unsaturated, mono, di- and tri-carboxylic,
including for example, formic, acetic, 2-hydroxyacetic,
trifluoroacetic, phenylacetic, trimethylacetic, t-butyl acetic,
anthranilic, propanoic, 2-hydroxypropanoic, 2-oxopropanoic,
propandioic, cyclopentanepropionic, cyclopentane propionic,
3-phenylpropionic, butanoic, butandioic, benzoic,
3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic, 2-acetoxy-benzoic, ascorbic, cinnamic,
lauryl sulfuric, stearic, muconic, mandelic, succinic, embonic,
fumaric, malic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, malonic, lactic, citric,
tartaric, glycolic, glyconic, gluconic, pyruvic, glyoxalic, oxalic,
mesylic, succinic, salicylic, phthalic, palmoic, palmeic,
thiocyanic, methanesulphonic, ethanesulphonic,
1,2-ethanedisulfonic, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic, benzenesulphonic,
4-chorobenzenesulfonic, napthalene-2-sulphonic, p-toluenesulphonic,
camphorsulphonic, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2]-oct-2-ene-1-carboxylic,
glucoheptonic, 4,4'-methylenebis-3-(hydroxy-2-ene-1-carboxylic
acid), hydroxynapthoic.
[0230] "Pharmaceutically-acceptable bases" include inorganic and
organic bases which are non-toxic at the concentration and manner
in which they are formulated. For example, suitable bases include
those formed from inorganic base forming metals such as lithium,
sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, ammonium, iron, zinc,
copper, manganese, aluminum, N-methylglucamine, morpholine,
piperidine and organic nontoxic bases including, primary, secondary
and tertiary amines, substituted amines, cyclic amines and basic
ion exchange resins, [e.g., N(R').sub.4.sup.+ (where R' is
independently H or C.sub.1-4 alkyl, e.g., ammonium, Tris)], for
example, isopropylamine, trimethylamine, diethylamine,
triethylamine, tripropylamine, ethanolamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol,
trimethamine, dicyclohexylamine, lysine, arginine, histidine,
caffeine, procaine, hydrabamine, choline, betaine, ethylenediamine,
glucosamine, methylglucamine, theobromine, purines, piperazine,
piperidine, N-ethylpiperidine, polyamine resins and the like.
Particularly preferred organic non-toxic bases are isopropylamine,
diethylamine, ethanolamine, trimethamine, dicyclohexylamine,
choline, and caffeine. Additional pharmaceutically acceptable acids
and bases useable with the present invention include those which
are derived from the amino acids, for example, histidine, glycine,
phenylalanine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, lysine and
asparagine.
[0231] "Pharmaceutically acceptable" buffers and salts include
those derived from both acid and base addition salts of the above
indicated acids and bases. Specific buffers and/or salts include
histidine, succinate and acetate.
[0232] A "pharmaceutically acceptable sugar" is a molecule which,
when combined with a protein of interest, significantly prevents or
reduces chemical and/or physical instability of the protein upon
storage. When the formulation is intended to be lyophilized and
then reconstituted, "pharmaceutically acceptable sugars" may also
be known as a "lyoprotectant". Exemplary sugars and their
corresponding sugar alcohols include: an amino acid such as
monosodium glutamate or histidine; a methylamine such as betaine; a
lyotropic salt such as magnesium sulfate; a polyol such as
trihydric or higher molecular weight sugar alcohols, e.g. glycerin,
dextran, erythritol, glycerol, arabitol, xylitol, sorbitol, and
mannitol; propylene glycol; polyethylene glycol; PLURONICS.RTM.;
and combinations thereof. Additional exemplary lyoprotectants
include glycerin and gelatin, and the sugars mellibiose,
melezitose, raffinose, mannotriose and stachyose. Examples of
reducing sugars include glucose, maltose, lactose, maltulose,
iso-maltulose and lactulose. Examples of non-reducing sugars
include non-reducing glycosides of polyhydroxy compounds selected
from sugar alcohols and other straight chain polyalcohols.
Preferred sugar alcohols are monoglycosides, especially those
compounds obtained by reduction of disaccharides such as lactose,
maltose, lactulose and maltulose. The glycosidic side group can be
either glucosidic or galactosidic. Additional examples of sugar
alcohols are glucitol, maltitol, lactitol and iso-maltulose. The
preferred pharmaceutically-acceptable sugars are the non-reducing
sugars trehalose or sucrose. Pharmaceutically acceptable sugars are
added to the formulation in a "protecting amount" (e.g.
pre-lyophilization) which means that the protein essentially
retains its physical and chemical stability and integrity during
storage (e.g., after reconstitution and storage).
[0233] The "diluent" of interest herein is one which is
pharmaceutically acceptable (safe and non-toxic for administration
to a human) and is useful for the preparation of a liquid
formulation, such as a formulation reconstituted after
lyophilization. Exemplary diluents include sterile water,
bacteriostatic water for injection (BWFI), a pH buffered solution
(e.g. phosphate-buffered saline), sterile saline solution, Ringer's
solution or dextrose solution. In an alternative embodiment,
diluents can include aqueous solutions of salts and/or buffers.
[0234] A "preservative" is a compound which can be added to the
formulations herein to reduce bacterial activity. The addition of a
preservative may, for example, facilitate the production of a
multi-use (multiple-dose) formulation. Examples of potential
preservatives include octadecyldimethylbenzyl ammonium chloride,
hexamethonium chloride, benzalkonium chloride (a mixture of
alkylbenzyldimethylammonium chlorides in which the alkyl groups are
long-chain compounds), and benzethonium chloride. Other types of
preservatives include aromatic alcohols such as phenol, butyl and
benzyl alcohol, alkyl parabens such as methyl or propyl paraben,
catechol, resorcinol, cyclohexanol, 3-pentanol, and m-cresol. The
most preferred preservative herein is benzyl alcohol.
[0235] "Treatment" refers to clinical intervention designed to
alter the natural course of the individual or cell being treated,
and can be performed either for prophylaxis or during the course of
clinical pathology. Desirable effects of treatment include
preventing occurrence or recurrence of disease, preventing
metastasis, decreasing the rate of disease progression,
ameliorating or palliating the disease state, and remission or
improved prognosis. In some embodiments, antibodies of the
invention are used to delay development of a disease or disorder. A
subject is successfully "treated", for example, using the apoptotic
anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention if one or more symptoms
associated with a T-cell dysfunctional disorder is mitigated.
[0236] An "effective amount" refers to at least an amount
effective, at dosages and for periods of time necessary, to achieve
the desired or indicated effect, including a therapeutic or
prophylactic result. For example, an effective amount of the
anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the present invention is at least the
minimum concentration that results in inhibition of signaling from
PD-L1, either through PD-1 on T-cells or B7.1 on other APCs or
both.
[0237] A "therapeutically effective amount" is at least the minimum
concentration required to effect a measurable improvement or
prevention of a particular disorder. A therapeutically effective
amount herein may vary according to factors such as the disease
state, age, sex, and weight of the patient, and the ability of the
antibody to elicit a desired response in the individual. A
therapeutically effective amount is also one in which any toxic or
detrimental effects of the antibody are outweighed by the
therapeutically beneficial effects. For example, a therapeutically
effective amount of the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the present
invention is at least the minimum concentration that results in
inhibition of at least one symptom of a T cell dysfunctional
disorder.
[0238] A "prophylactically effective amount" refers to an amount
effective, at the dosages and for periods of time necessary, to
achieve the desired prophylactic result. For example, a
prophylactically effective amount of the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of
the present invention is at least the minimum concentration that
prevents or attenuates the development of at least one symptom of a
T cell dysfunctional disorder.
[0239] "Chronic" administration refers to administration of the
medicament(s) in a continuous as opposed to acute mode, so as to
main the initial therapeutic effect (activity) for an extended
period of time. "Intermittent" administration is treatment that is
not consecutively done without interruption, but rather is cyclic
in nature.
[0240] "Mammal" for purposes of treatment refers to any animal
classified as a mammal, including humans, domestic and farm
animals, and zoo, sports, or pet animals, such as dogs, horses,
rabbits, cattle, pigs, hamsters, gerbils, mice, ferrets, rats,
cats, etc. Preferably, the mammal is human.
[0241] The term "pharmaceutical formulation" refers to a
preparation that is in such form as to permit the biological
activity of the active ingredient to be effective, and that
contains no additional components that are unacceptably toxic to a
subject to which the formulation would be administered. Such
formulations are sterile.
[0242] A "sterile" formulation is aseptic or free from all living
microorganisms and their spores.
[0243] The term "about" as used herein refers to the usual error
range for the respective value readily known to the skilled person
in this technical field.
[0244] An "autoimmune disorder" is a disease or disorder arising
from and directed against an individual's own tissues or organs or
a co-segregation or manifestation thereof or resulting condition
therefrom. Autoimmune diseases can be an organ-specific disease
(i.e., the immune response is specifically directed against an
organ system such as the endocrine system, the hematopoietic
system, the skin, the cardiopulmonary system, the gastrointestinal
and liver systems, the renal system, the thyroid, the ears, the
neuromuscular system, the central nervous system, etc.) or a
systemic disease that can affect multiple organ systems (for
example, systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE), rheumatoid arthritis
(RA), polymyositis, etc.). Preferred such diseases include
autoimmune rheumatologic disorders (such as, for example, RA,
Sjogren's syndrome, scleroderma, lupus such as SLE and lupus
nephritis, polymyositis-dermatomyositis, cryoglobulinemia,
anti-phospholipid antibody syndrome, and psoriatic arthritis),
autoimmune gastrointestinal and liver disorders (such as, for
example, inflammatory bowel diseases (e.g., ulcerative colitis and
Crohn's disease), autoimmune gastritis and pernicious anemia,
autoimmune hepatitis, primary biliary cirrhosis, primary sclerosing
cholangitis, and celiac disease), vasculitis (such as, for example,
ANCA-negative vasculitis and ANCA-associated vasculitis, including
Churg-Strauss vasculitis, Wegener's granulomatosis, and microscopic
polyangiitis), autoimmune neurological disorders (such as, for
example, multiple sclerosis, opsoclonus myoclonus syndrome,
myasthenia gravis, neuromyelitis optica, Parkinson's disease,
Alzheimer's disease, and autoimmune polyneuropathies), renal
disorders (such as, for example, glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture's
syndrome, and Berger's disease), autoimmune dermatologic disorders
(such as, for example, psoriasis, urticaria, hives, pemphigus
vulgaris, bullous pemphigoid, and cutaneous lupus erythematosus),
hematologic disorders (such as, for example, thrombocytopenic
purpura, thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura, post-transfusion
purpura, and autoimmune hemolytic anemia), atherosclerosis,
uveitis, autoimmune hearing diseases (such as, for example, inner
ear disease and hearing loss), Behcet's disease, Raynaud's
syndrome, organ transplant, and autoimmune endocrine disorders
(such as, for example, diabetic-related autoimmune diseases such as
insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM), Addison's disease, and
autoimmune thyroid disease (e.g., Graves' disease and
thyroiditis)). More preferred such diseases include, for example,
RA, ulcerative colitis, ANCA-associated vasculitis, lupus, multiple
sclerosis, Sjogren's syndrome, Graves' disease, IDDM, pernicious
anemia, thyroiditis, and glomerulonephritis.
[0245] The term "cytotoxic agent" as used herein refers to a
substance that inhibits or prevents the function of cells and/or
causes destruction of cells. The term includes radioactive isotopes
(e.g. At.sup.211, I.sup.131, I.sup.125, Y.sup.90, Re.sup.186,
Re.sup.188, Sm.sup.153, Bi.sup.212, P.sup.32 and radioactive
isotopes of Lu), and toxins such as small-molecule toxins or
enzymatically active toxins of bacterial, fungal, plant or animal
origin, or fragments thereof.
[0246] A "chemotherapeutic agent" is a chemical compound useful in
the treatment of cancer. Examples of chemotherapeutic agents
include alkylating agents such as thiotepa and cyclophosphamide
(CYTOXAN.RTM.); alkyl sulfonates such as busulfan, improsulfan, and
piposulfan; aziridines such as benzodopa, carboquone, meturedopa,
and uredopa; ethylenimines and methylamelamines including
altretamine, triethylenemelamine, trietylenephosphoramide,
triethiylenethiophosphoramide and trimethylolomelamine; acetogenins
(especially bullatacin and bullatacinone);
delta-9-tetrahydrocannabinol (dronabinol, MARINOL.RTM.);
beta-lapachone; lapachol; colchicines; betulinic acid; a
camptothecin (including the synthetic analogue topotecan
(HYCAMTIN.RTM.), CPT-11 (irinotecan, CAMPTOSAR.RTM.),
acetylcamptothecin, scopolectin, and 9-aminocamptothecin);
bryostatin; pemetrexed; callystatin; CC-1065 (including its
adozelesin, carzelesin and bizelesin synthetic analogues);
podophyllotoxin; podophyllinic acid; teniposide; cryptophycins
(particularly cryptophycin 1 and cryptophycin 8); dolastatin;
duocarmycin (including the synthetic analogues, KW-2189 and
CB1-TM1); eleutherobin; pancratistatin; TLK-286; CDP323, an oral
alpha-4 integrin inhibitor; a sarcodictyin; spongistatin; nitrogen
mustards such as chlorambucil, chlornaphazine, cholophosphamide,
estramustine, ifosfamide, mechlorethamine, mechlorethamine oxide
hydrochloride, melphalan, novembichin, phenesterine, prednimustine,
trofosfamide, uracil mustard; nitrosureas such as carmustine,
chlorozotocin, fotemustine, lomustine, nimustine, and ranimnustine;
antibiotics such as the enediyne antibiotics (e. g., calicheamicin,
especially calicheamicin gamma1I and calicheamicin omegaI1 (see,
e.g., Nicolaou et al., Angew. Chem Intl. Ed. Engl., 33: 183-186
(1994)); dynemicin, including dynemicin A; an esperamicin; as well
as neocarzinostatin chromophore and related chromoprotein enediyne
antibiotic chromophores), aclacinomysins, actinomycin, authramycin,
azaserine, bleomycins, cactinomycin, carabicin, carminomycin,
carzinophilin, chromomycinis, dactinomycin, daunorubicin,
detorubicin, 6-diazo-5-oxo-L-norleucine, doxorubicin (including
ADRIAMYCIN.RTM., morpholino-doxorubicin,
cyanomorpholino-doxorubicin, 2-pyrrolino-doxorubicin, doxorubicin
HCl liposome injection (DOXIL.RTM.) and deoxydoxorubicin),
epirubicin, esorubicin, idarubicin, marcellomycin, mitomycins such
as mitomycin C, mycophenolic acid, nogalamycin, olivomycins,
peplomycin, potfiromycin, puromycin, quelamycin, rodorubicin,
streptonigrin, streptozocin, tubercidin, ubenimex, zinostatin,
zorubicin; anti-metabolites such as methotrexate, gemcitabine
(GEMZAR.RTM.), tegafur (UFTORAL.RTM.), capecitabine (XELODA.RTM.),
an epothilone, and 5-fluorouracil (5-FU); folic acid analogues such
as denopterin, methotrexate, pteropterin, trimetrexate; purine
analogs such as fludarabine, 6-mercaptopurine, thiamiprine,
thioguanine; pyrimidine analogs such as ancitabine, azacitidine,
6-azauridine, carmofur, cytarabine, dideoxyuridine, doxifluridine,
enocitabine, floxuridine, and imatinib (a 2-phenylaminopyrimidine
derivative), as well as other c-Kit inhibitors; anti-adrenals such
as aminoglutethimide, mitotane, trilostane; folic acid replenisher
such as frolinic acid; aceglatone; aldophosphamide glycoside;
aminolevulinic acid; eniluracil; amsacrine; bestrabucil;
bisantrene; edatraxate; defofamine; demecolcine; diaziquone;
elfornithine; elliptinium acetate; etoglucid; gallium nitrate;
hydroxyurea; lentinan; lonidainine; maytansinoids such as
maytansine and ansamitocins; mitoguazone; mitoxantrone; mopidanmol;
nitraerine; pentostatin; phenamet; pirarubicin; losoxantrone;
2-ethylhydrazide; procarbazine; PSK.RTM. polysaccharide complex
(JHS Natural Products, Eugene, Oreg.); razoxane; rhizoxin;
sizofiran; spirogermanium; tenuazonic acid; triaziquone;
2,2',2''-trichlorotriethylamine; trichothecenes (especially T-2
toxin, verracurin A, roridin A and anguidine); urethan; vindesine
(ELDISINE.RTM., FILDESIN.RTM.); dacarbazine; mannomustine;
mitobronitol; mitolactol; pipobroman; gacytosine; arabinoside
("Ara-C"); thiotepa; taxoids, e.g., paclitaxel (TAXOL.RTM.),
albumin-engineered nanoparticle formulation of paclitaxel
(ABRAXANE.TM.), and doxetaxel (TAXOTERE.RTM.); chloranbucil;
6-thioguanine; mercaptopurine; methotrexate; platinum analogs such
as cisplatin and carboplatin; vinblastine (VELBAN.RTM.); platinum;
etoposide (VP-16); ifosfamide; mitoxantrone; vincristine
(ONCOVIN.RTM.); oxaliplatin; leucovovin; vinorelbine
(NAVELBINE.RTM.); novantrone; edatrexate; daunomycin; aminopterin;
ibandronate; topoisomerase inhibitor RFS 2000;
difluorometlhylornithine (DMFO); retinoids such as retinoic acid;
pharmaceutically acceptable salts, acids or derivatives of any of
the above; as well as combinations of two or more of the above such
as CHOP, an abbreviation for a combined therapy of
cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, vincristine, and prednisolone, and
FOLFOX, an abbreviation for a treatment regimen with oxaliplatin
(ELOXATIN.TM.) combined with 5-FU and leucovovin. A particularly
preferred chemotherapeutic agent useful in combination with the
anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention, especially in the treatment
of tumor immunity is gemcitabine.
[0247] Also included in this definition are anti-hormonal agents
that act to regulate, reduce, block, or inhibit the effects of
hormones that can promote the growth of cancer, and are often in
the form of systemic, or whole-body treatment. They may be hormones
themselves. Examples include anti-estrogens and selective estrogen
receptor modulators (SERMs), including, for example, tamoxifen
(including NOLVADEX.RTM. tamoxifen), raloxifene (EVISTA.RTM.),
droloxifene, 4-hydroxytamoxifen, trioxifene, keoxifene, LY117018,
onapristone, and toremifene (FARESTON.RTM.); anti-progesterones;
estrogen receptor down-regulators (ERDs); estrogen receptor
antagonists such as fulvestrant (FASLODEX.RTM.); agents that
function to suppress or shut down the ovaries, for example,
leutinizing hormone-releasing hormone (LHRH) agonists such as
leuprolide acetate (LUPRON.RTM. and ELIGARD.RTM.), goserelin
acetate, buserelin acetate and tripterelin; anti-androgens such as
flutamide, nilutamide and bicalutamide; and aromatase inhibitors
that inhibit the enzyme aromatase, which regulates estrogen
production in the adrenal glands, such as, for example,
4(5)-imidazoles, aminoglutethimide, megestrol acetate
(MEGASE.RTM.), exemestane (AROMASIN.RTM.), formestanie, fadrozole,
vorozole (RIVISOR.RTM.), letrozole (FEMARA.RTM.), and anastrozole
(ARIMIDEX.RTM.). In addition, such definition of chemotherapeutic
agents includes bisphosphonates such as clodronate (for example,
BONEFOS.RTM. or OSTAC.RTM.), etidronate (DIDROCAL.RTM.), NE-58095,
zoledronic acid/zoledronate (ZOMETA.RTM.), alendronate
(FOSAMAX.RTM.), pamidronate (AREDIA.RTM.), tiludronate
(SKELID.RTM.), or risedronate (ACTONEL.RTM.); as well as
troxacitabine (a 1,3-dioxolane nucleoside cytosine analog);
anti-sense oligonucleotides, particularly those that inhibit
expression of genes in signaling pathways implicated in abherant
cell proliferation, such as, for example, PKC-alpha, Raf, H-Ras,
and epidermal growth factor receptor (EGF-R); vaccines such as
THERATOPE.RTM. vaccine and gene therapy vaccines, for example,
ALLOVECTIN.RTM. vaccine, LEUVECTIN.RTM. vaccine, and VAXID.RTM.
vaccine; topoisomerase 1 inhibitor (e.g., LURTOTECAN.RTM.); an
anti-estrogen such as fulvestrant; a Kit inhibitor such as imatinib
or EXEL-0862 (a tyrosine kinase inhibitor); EGFR inhibitor such as
erlotinib or cetuximab; an anti-VEGF inhibitor such as bevacizumab;
arinotecan; rmRH (e.g., ABARELIX.RTM.); lapatinib and lapatinib
ditosylate (an ErbB-2 and EGFR dual tyrosine kinase small-molecule
inhibitor also known as GW572016); 17AAG (geldanamycin derivative
that is a heat shock protein (Hsp) 90 poison), and pharmaceutically
acceptable salts, acids or derivatives of any of the above.
[0248] A "growth-inhibitory agent" refers to a compound or
composition that inhibits growth of a cell, which growth depends on
receptor activation either in vitro or in vivo. Thus, the
growth-inhibitory agent includes one that significantly reduces the
percentage of receptor-dependent cells in S phase. Examples of
growth-inhibitory agents include agents that block cell-cycle
progression (at a place other than S phase), such as agents that
induce G1 arrest and M-phase arrest. Classical M-phase blockers
include the vincas and vinca alkaloids (vincristine and
vinblastine), taxanes, and topoisomerase II inhibitors such as
doxorubicin, epirubicin, daunorubicin, etoposide, and bleomycin.
Those agents that arrest G1 also spill over into S-phase arrest,
for example, DNA alkylating agents such as tamoxifen, prednisone,
dacarbazine, mechlorethamine, cisplatin, methotrexate,
5-fluorouracil, and ara-C. Further information can be found in The
Molecular Basis of Cancer, Mendelsohn and Israel, eds., Chapter 1,
entitled "Cell cycle regulation, oncogenes, and antineoplastic
drugs" by Murakami et al. (WB Saunders: Philadelphia, 1995),
especially p. 13. The taxanes (paclitaxel and docetaxel) are
anticancer drugs both derived from the yew tree. Docetaxel
(TAXOTERE.RTM., Rhone-Poulenc Rorer), derived from the European
yew, is a semisynthetic analogue of paclitaxel (TAXOL.RTM.,
Bristol-Myers Squibb).
[0249] The term "cytokine" is a generic term for proteins released
by one cell population that act on another cell as intercellular
mediators. Examples of such cytokines are lymphokines, monokines;
interleukins (ILs) such as IL-1, IL-1.alpha., IL-2, IL-3, IL-4,
IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-11, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15 . . .
IL-35, including PROLEUKIN.RTM. rIL-2; a tumor-necrosis factor such
as TNF-.alpha. or TNF-.beta.; and other polypeptide factors
including LIF and kit ligand (KL), while the term "interleukin" has
now essentially become a synonym for cytokine. As used herein, the
term cytokine includes proteins from natural sources or from
recombinant cell culture and biologically active equivalents of the
native-sequence cytokines, including synthetically produced
small-molecule entities and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives
and salts thereof. Cytokines can be classified on the proximal
location of the intended target, wherein autocrine refers to action
on the same cell from which it is secreted, paracrine refers to
action restricted to the immediate vicinity into which the cytokine
is secreted, and endocrine refers to action in distant regions of
the body. Immune cytokines can also be classified by whether they
enhance a type I response, (e.g., IFN-.gamma., TGF-.beta. etc),
which favor cellular immunity or a type II response (IL-4, IL-10,
IL-13, etc.), which favor antibody or humoral immunity. Immune
cytokines play roles in co-stimulation, maturation, proliferation,
activation, inflammation, growth, differentiation, cytokines
production and secretion, survival of various immune cells.
[0250] The term "hormone" refers to polypeptide hormones, which are
generally secreted by glandular organs with ducts. Included among
the hormones are, for example, growth hormone such as human growth
hormone, N-methionyl human growth hormone, and bovine growth
hormone; parathyroid hormone; thyroxine; insulin; proinsulin;
relaxin; estradiol; hormone-replacement therapy; androgens such as
calusterone, dromostanolone propionate, epitiostanol, mepitiostane,
or testolactone; prorelaxin; glycoprotein hormones such as follicle
stimulating hormone (FSH), thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), and
luteinizing hormone (LH); prolactin, placental lactogen, mouse
gonadotropin-associated peptide, gonadotropin-releasing hormone;
inhibin; activin; mullerian-inhibiting substance; and
thrombopoietin. As used herein, the term hormone includes proteins
from natural sources or from recombinant cell culture and
biologically active equivalents of the native-sequence hormone,
including synthetically produced small-molecule entities and
pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives and salts thereof.
III. MODES FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0251] A. Humanization Using Phage Display
[0252] The hypervariable region-grafted variants described herein
were generated by Kunkel mutagenesis of nucleic acid encoding the
human acceptor sequences, using a separate oligonucleotide for each
hypervariable region. Kunkel et al., Methods Enzymol. 154:367-382
(1987). Appropriate changes can be introduced within the framework
and/or hypervariable region using routine techniques, to correct
and re-establish proper hypervariable region-antigen
interactions.
[0253] Phage(mid) display (also referred to herein as phage
display) can be used as a convenient and fast method for generating
and screening many different potential variant antibodies in a
library generated by sequence randomization. However, other methods
for making and screening altered antibodies are available to the
skilled person.
[0254] Phage(mid) display (also referred to herein as phage display
in some contexts) can be used as a convenient and fast method for
generating and screening many different potential variant
antibodies in a library generated by sequence randomization.
However, other methods for making and screening altered antibodies
are available to the skilled person.
[0255] Phage(mid) display technology has provided a powerful tool
for generating and selecting novel proteins which bind to a ligand,
such as an antigen. Using the techniques of phage(mid) display
allows the generation of large libraries of protein variants which
can be rapidly sorted for those sequences that bind to a target
molecule with high affinity. Nucleic acids encoding variant
polypeptides are generally fused to a nucleic acid sequence
encoding a viral coat protein, such as the gene III protein or the
gene VIII protein. Monovalent phagemid display systems where the
nucleic acid sequence encoding the protein or polypeptide is fused
to a nucleic acid sequence encoding a portion of the gene III
protein have been developed. (Bass, S., Proteins, 8:309 (1990);
Lowman and Wells, Methods: A Companion to Methods in Enzymology,
3:205 (1991)). In a monovalent phagemid display system, the gene
fusion is expressed at low levels and wild type gene III proteins
are also expressed so that infectivity of the particles is
retained. Methods of generating peptide libraries and screening
those libraries have been disclosed in many patents (e.g. U.S. Pat.
No. 5,723,286, U.S. Pat. No. 5,432,018, U.S. Pat. No. 5,580,717,
U.S. Pat. No. 5,427,908 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,498,530).
[0256] Libraries of antibodies or antigen binding polypeptides have
been prepared in a number of ways including by altering a single
gene by inserting random DNA sequences or by cloning a family of
related genes. Methods for displaying antibodies or antigen binding
fragments using phage(mid) display have been described in U.S. Pat.
Nos. 5,750,373, 5,733,743, 5,837,242, 5,969,108, 6,172,197,
5,580,717, and 5,658,727. The library is then screened for
expression of antibodies or antigen binding proteins with the
desired characteristics.
[0257] Methods of substituting an amino acid of choice into a
template nucleic acid are well established in the art, some of
which are described herein. For example, hypervariable region
residues can be substituted using the Kunkel method. See, e.g.,
Kunkel et al., Methods Enzymol. 154:367-382 (1987).
[0258] The sequence of oligonucleotides includes one or more of the
designed codon sets for the hypervariable region residues to be
altered. A codon set is a set of different nucleotide triplet
sequences used to encode desired variant amino acids. Codon sets
can be represented using symbols to designate particular
nucleotides or equimolar mixtures of nucleotides as shown in below
according to the TUB code.
TABLE-US-00018 IUB CODES G (Guanine) Y (C or T) H (A or C or T) A
(Adenine) M (A or C) B (C or G or T) T (Thymine) K (G or T) V (A or
C or G) C (Cytosine) S (C or G) D (A or G or T) R (A or G) W (A or
T) N (A or C or G or T) For example, in the codon set DVK, D can be
nucleotides A or G or T; V can be A or G or C; and K can be G or T.
This codon set can present 18 different codons and can encode amino
acids Ala, Trp, Tyr, Lys, Thr, Asn, Lys, Ser, Arg, Asp, Glu, Gly,
and Cys.
[0259] Oligonucleotide or primer sets can be synthesized using
standard methods. A set of oligonucleotides can be synthesized, for
example, by solid phase synthesis, containing sequences that
represent all possible combinations of nucleotide triplets provided
by the codon set and that will encode the desired group of amino
acids. Synthesis of oligonucleotides with selected nucleotide
"degeneracy" at certain positions is well known in that art. Such
sets of nucleotides having certain codon sets can be synthesized
using commercial nucleic acid synthesizers (available from, for
example, Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.), or can be
obtained commercially (for example, from Life Technologies,
Rockville, Md.). Therefore, a set of oligonucleotides synthesized
having a particular codon set will typically include a plurality of
oligonucleotides with different sequences, the differences
established by the codon set within the overall sequence.
Oligonucleotides, as used according to the invention, have
sequences that allow for hybridization to a variable domain nucleic
acid template and also can include restriction enzyme sites for
cloning purposes.
[0260] In one method, nucleic acid sequences encoding variant amino
acids can be created by oligonucleotide-mediated mutagenesis. This
technique is well known in the art as described by Zoller et al.
Nucleic Acids Res. 10:6487-6504(1987). Briefly, nucleic acid
sequences encoding variant amino acids are created by hybridizing
an oligonucleotide set encoding the desired codon sets to a DNA
template, where the template is the single-stranded form of the
plasmid containing a variable region nucleic acid template
sequence. After hybridization, DNA polymerase is used to synthesize
an entire second complementary strand of the template that will
thus incorporate the oligonucleotide primer, and will contain the
codon sets as provided by the oligonucleotide set.
[0261] Generally, oligonucleotides of at least 25 nucleotides in
length are used. An optimal oligonucleotide will have 12 to 15
nucleotides that are completely complementary to the template on
either side of the nucleotide(s) coding for the mutation(s). This
ensures that the oligonucleotide will hybridize properly to the
single-stranded DNA template molecule. The oligonucleotides are
readily synthesized using techniques known in the art such as that
described by Crea et al., Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA, 75:5765
(1978).
[0262] The DNA template is generated by those vectors that are
either derived from bacteriophage M13 vectors (the commercially
available M13mp18 and M13mp19 vectors are suitable), or those
vectors that contain a single-stranded phage origin of replication
as described by Viera et al., Meth. Enzymol., 153:3 (1987). Thus,
the DNA that is to be mutated can be inserted into one of these
vectors in order to generate a single-stranded template. Production
of the single-stranded template is described in sections 4.21-4.41
of Sambrook et al., above.
[0263] To alter the native DNA sequence, the oligonucleotide is
hybridized to the single stranded template under suitable
hybridization conditions. A DNA polymerizing enzyme, usually T7 DNA
polymerase or the Klenow fragment of DNA polymerase I, is then
added to synthesize the complementary strand of the template using
the oligonucleotide as a primer for synthesis. A heteroduplex
molecule is thus formed such that one strand of DNA encodes the
mutated form of gene 1, and the other strand (the original
template) encodes the native, unaltered sequence of gene 1. This
heteroduplex molecule is then transformed into a suitable host
cell, usually a prokaryote such as E. coli JM101. After growing the
cells, they are plated onto agarose plates and screened using the
oligonucleotide primer radiolabelled with a .sup.32-Phosphate to
identify the bacterial colonies that contain the mutated DNA.
[0264] The method described immediately above may be modified such
that a homoduplex molecule is created wherein both strands of the
plasmid contain the mutation(s). The modifications are as follows:
The single stranded oligonucleotide is annealed to the
single-stranded template as described above. A mixture of three
deoxyribonucleotides, deoxyriboadenosine (dATP), deoxyriboguanosine
(dGTP), and deoxyribothymidine (dTT), is combined with a modified
thiodeoxyribocytosine called dCTP-(aS) (which can be obtained from
Amersham). This mixture is added to the template-oligonucleotide
complex. Upon addition of DNA polymerase to this mixture, a strand
of DNA identical to the template except for the mutated bases is
generated. In addition, this new strand of DNA will contain
dCTP-(aS) instead of dCTP, which serves to protect it from
restriction endonuclease digestion. After the template strand of
the double-stranded heteroduplex is nicked with an appropriate
restriction enzyme, the template strand can be digested with ExoIII
nuclease or another appropriate nuclease to cut at other than the
region that contains the site(s) to be mutagenized. The reaction is
then stopped to leave a molecule that is only partially
single-stranded. A complete double-stranded DNA homoduplex is then
formed using DNA polymerase in the presence of all four
deoxyribonucleotide triphosphates, ATP, and DNA ligase. This
homoduplex molecule can then be transformed into a suitable host
cell.
[0265] As indicated previously, the sequence of the oligonucleotide
set is of sufficient length to hybridize to the template nucleic
acid and may also, but does not necessarily, contain restriction
sites. The DNA template can be generated by those vectors that are
either derived from bacteriophage M13 vectors or vectors that
contain a single-stranded phage origin of replication as described
by Viera et al. Meth. Enzymol., 153:3 (1987). Thus, the DNA that is
to be mutated must be inserted into one of these vectors in order
to generate a single-stranded template. Production of the
single-stranded template is described in sections 4.21-4.41 of
Sambrook et al., supra.
[0266] According to another method, a library can be generated by
providing upstream and downstream oligonucleotide sets, each set
having a plurality of oligonucleotides with different sequences,
the different sequences established by the codon sets provided
within the sequence of the oligonucleotides. The upstream and
downstream oligonucleotide sets, along with a variable domain
template nucleic acid sequence, can be used in a polymerase chain
reaction to generate a "library" of PCR products. The PCR products
can be referred to as "nucleic acid cassettes", as they can be
fused with other related or unrelated nucleic acid sequences, for
example, viral coat proteins and dimerization domains, using
established molecular biology techniques.
[0267] The sequence of the PCR primers includes one or more of the
designed codon sets for the solvent accessible and highly diverse
positions in a hypervariable region. As described above, a codon
set is a set of different nucleotide triplet sequences used to
encode desired variant amino acids. Antibody selectants that meet
the desired criteria, as selected through appropriate
screening/selection steps can be isolated and cloned using standard
recombinant techniques.
[0268] B. Recombinant Preparation
[0269] The invention also provides an isolated nucleic acid
encoding anti-PD-L1 antibodies, vectors and host cells comprising
such nucleic acid, and recombinant techniques for the production of
the antibody.
[0270] For recombinant production of the antibody, the nucleic acid
encoding it is isolated and inserted into a replicable vector for
further cloning (amplification of the DNA) or for expression. DNA
encoding the monoclonal antibody is readily isolated and sequenced
using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide
probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding
the heavy and light chains of the antibody). Many vectors are
available. The choice of vector depends in part on the host cell to
be used. Generally, preferred host cells are of either prokaryotic
or eukaryotic (generally mammalian) origin.
[0271] 1. Antibody Production in Prokaryotic Cells
[0272] a) Vector Construction
[0273] Polynucleotide sequences encoding polypeptide components of
the antibodies of the invention can be obtained using standard
recombinant techniques. Desired polynucleotide sequences may be
isolated and sequenced from antibody producing cells such as
hybridoma cells. Alternatively, polynucleotides can be synthesized
using nucleotide synthesizer or PCR techniques. Once obtained,
sequences encoding the polypeptides are inserted into a recombinant
vector capable of replicating and expressing heterologous
polynucleotides in prokaryotic hosts. Many vectors that are
available and known in the art can be used for the purpose of the
present invention. Selection of an appropriate vector will depend
mainly on the size of the nucleic acids to be inserted into the
vector and the particular host cell to be transformed with the
vector. Each vector contains various components, depending on its
function (amplification or expression of heterologous
polynucleotide, or both) and its compatibility with the particular
host cell in which it resides. The vector components generally
include, but are not limited to: an origin of replication, a
selection marker gene, a promoter, a ribosome binding site (RBS), a
signal sequence, the heterologous nucleic acid insert and a
transcription termination sequence.
[0274] In general, plasmid vectors containing replicon and control
sequences which are derived from species compatible with the host
cell are used in connection with these hosts. The vector ordinarily
carries a replication site, as well as marking sequences which are
capable of providing phenotypic selection in transformed cells. For
example, E. coli is typically transformed using pBR322, a plasmid
derived from an E. coli species. pBR322 contains genes encoding
ampicillin (Amp) and tetracycline (Tet) resistance and thus
provides easy means for identifying transformed cells. pBR322, its
derivatives, or other microbial plasmids or bacteriophage may also
contain, or be modified to contain, promoters which can be used by
the microbial organism for expression of endogenous proteins.
Examples of pBR322 derivatives used for expression of particular
antibodies are described in detail in Carter et al., U.S. Pat. No.
5,648,237.
[0275] In addition, phage vectors containing replicon and control
sequences that are compatible with the host microorganism can be
used as transforming vectors in connection with these hosts. For
example, bacteriophage such as GEM.TM.-11 may be utilized in making
a recombinant vector which can be used to transform susceptible
host cells such as E. coli LE392.
[0276] The expression vector of the invention may comprise two or
more promoter-cistron pairs, encoding each of the polypeptide
components. A promoter is an untranslated regulatory sequence
located upstream (5') to a cistron that modulates its expression.
Prokaryotic promoters typically fall into two classes, inducible
and constitutive. Inducible promoter is a promoter that initiates
increased levels of transcription of the cistron under its control
in response to changes in the culture condition, e.g. the presence
or absence of a nutrient or a change in temperature.
[0277] A large number of promoters recognized by a variety of
potential host cells are well known. The selected promoter can be
operably linked to cistron DNA encoding the light or heavy chain by
removing the promoter from the source DNA via restriction enzyme
digestion and inserting the isolated promoter sequence into the
vector of the invention. Both the native promoter sequence and many
heterologous promoters may be used to direct amplification and/or
expression of the target genes. In some embodiments, heterologous
promoters are utilized, as they generally permit greater
transcription and higher yields of expressed target gene as
compared to the native target polypeptide promoter.
[0278] Promoters suitable for use with prokaryotic hosts include
the PhoA promoter, the -galactamase and lactose promoter systems, a
tryptophan (trp) promoter system and hybrid promoters such as the
tac or the trc promoter. However, other promoters that are
functional in bacteria (such as other known bacterial or phage
promoters) are suitable as well. Their nucleotide sequences have
been published, thereby enabling a skilled worker operably to
ligate them to cistrons encoding the target light and heavy chains
(Siebenlist et al. (1980) Cell 20: 269) using linkers or adaptors
to supply any required restriction sites.
[0279] In one aspect, each cistron within the recombinant vector
comprises a secretion signal sequence component that directs
translocation of the expressed polypeptides across a membrane. In
general, the signal sequence may be a component of the vector, or
it may be a part of the target polypeptide DNA that is inserted
into the vector. The signal sequence selected for the purpose of
this invention should be one that is recognized and processed (i.e.
cleaved by a signal peptidase) by the host cell. For prokaryotic
host cells that do not recognize and process the signal sequences
native to the heterologous polypeptides, the signal sequence is
substituted by a prokaryotic signal sequence selected, for example,
from the group consisting of the alkaline phosphatase,
penicillinase, Ipp, or heat-stable enterotoxin II (STII) leaders,
LamB, PhoE, PelB, OmpA and MBP. In one embodiment of the invention,
the signal sequences used in both cistrons of the expression system
are STII signal sequences or variants thereof.
[0280] In another aspect, the production of the immunoglobulins
according to the invention can occur in the cytoplasm of the host
cell, and therefore does not require the presence of secretion
signal sequences within each cistron. In that regard,
immunoglobulin light and heavy chains are expressed, folded and
assembled to form functional immunoglobulins within the cytoplasm.
Certain host strains (e.g., the E. coli trxB.sup.- strains) provide
cytoplasm conditions that are favorable for disulfide bond
formation, thereby permitting proper folding and assembly of
expressed protein subunits. Proba and Pluckthun Gene, 159:203
(1995).
[0281] The present invention provides an expression system in which
the quantitative ratio of expressed polypeptide components can be
modulated in order to maximize the yield of secreted and properly
assembled antibodies of the invention. Such modulation is
accomplished at least in part by simultaneously modulating
translational strengths for the polypeptide components.
[0282] One technique for modulating translational strength is
disclosed in Simmons et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,840,523. It utilizes
variants of the translational initiation region (TIR) within a
cistron. For a given TIR, a series of amino acid or nucleic acid
sequence variants can be created with a range of translational
strengths, thereby providing a convenient means by which to adjust
this factor for the desired expression level of the specific chain
TIR variants can be generated by conventional mutagenesis
techniques that result in codon changes which can alter the amino
acid sequence, although silent changes in the nucleotide sequence
are preferred. Alterations in the TIR can include, for example,
alterations in the number or spacing of Shine-Dalgarno sequences,
along with alterations in the signal sequence. One method for
generating mutant signal sequences is the generation of a "codon
bank" at the beginning of a coding sequence that does not change
the amino acid sequence of the signal sequence (i.e., the changes
are silent). This can be accomplished by changing the third
nucleotide position of each codon; additionally, some amino acids,
such as leucine, serine, and arginine, have multiple first and
second positions that can add complexity in making the bank. This
method of mutagenesis is described in detail in Yansura et al.
(1992) METHODS: A Companion to Methods in Enzymol. 4:151-158.
[0283] Preferably, a set of vectors is generated with a range of
TIR strengths for each cistron therein. This limited set provides a
comparison of expression levels of each chain as well as the yield
of the desired antibody products under various TIR strength
combinations. TIR strengths can be determined by quantifying the
expression level of a reporter gene as described in detail in
Simmons et al. U.S. Pat. No. 5,840,523. Based on the translational
strength comparison, the desired individual TIRs are selected to be
combined in the expression vector constructs of the invention.
[0284] b) Prokaryotic Host Cells.
[0285] Prokaryotic host cells suitable for expressing antibodies of
the invention include Archaebacteria and Eubacteria, such as
Gram-negative or Gram-positive organisms. Examples of useful
bacteria include Escherichia (e.g., E. coli), Bacilli (e.g., B.
subtilis), Enterobacteria, Pseudomonas species (e.g., P.
aeruginosa), Salmonella typhimurium, Serratia marcescans,
Klebsiella, Proteus, Shigella, Rhizobia, Vitreoscilla, or
Paracoccus. In one embodiment, gram-negative cells are used. In one
embodiment, E. coli cells are used as hosts for the invention.
Examples of E. coli strains include strain W3110 (Bachmann,
Cellular and Molecular Biology, vol. 2 (Washington, D.C.: American
Society for Microbiology, 1987), pp. 1190-1219; ATCC Deposit No.
27,325) and derivatives thereof, including strain 33D3 having
genotype W3110 fhuA ( tonA) ptr3 lac Iq lacL8 ompT (nmpc-fepE)
degP41 kan.sup.R (U.S. Pat. No. 5,639,635). Other strains and
derivatives thereof, such as E. coli 294 (ATCC 31,446), E. coli B,
E. coli 1776 (ATCC 31,537) and E. coli RV308(ATCC 31,608) are also
suitable. These examples are illustrative rather than limiting.
Methods for constructing derivatives of any of the above-mentioned
bacteria having defined genotypes are known in the art and
described in, for example, Bass et al., Proteins, 8:309-314 (1990).
It is generally necessary to select the appropriate bacteria taking
into consideration replicability of the replicon in the cells of a
bacterium. For example, E. coli, Serratia, or Salmonella species
can be suitably used as the host when well known plasmids such as
pBR322, pBR325, pACYC177, or pKN410 are used to supply the
replicon.
[0286] Typically the host cell should secrete minimal amounts of
proteolytic enzymes, and additional protease inhibitors may
desirably be incorporated in the cell culture.
[0287] c) Antibody Production
[0288] Host cells are transformed with the above-described
expression vectors and cultured in conventional nutrient media
modified as appropriate for inducing promoters, selecting
transformants, or amplifying the genes encoding the desired
sequences. Transformation means introducing DNA into the
prokaryotic host so that the DNA is replicable, either as an
extrachromosomal element or by chromosomal integrant. Depending on
the host cell used, transformation is done using standard
techniques appropriate to such cells. The calcium treatment
employing calcium chloride is generally used for bacterial cells
that contain substantial cell-wall barriers. Another method for
transformation employs polyethylene glycol/DMSO. Yet another
technique used is electroporation.
[0289] Prokaryotic cells used to produce the antibodies of the
invention are grown in media known in the art and suitable for
culture of the selected host cells. Examples of suitable media
include luria broth (LB) plus necessary nutrient supplements. In
some embodiments, the media also contains a selection agent, chosen
based on the construction of the expression vector, to selectively
permit growth of prokaryotic cells containing the expression
vector. For example, ampicillin is added to media for growth of
cells expressing ampicillin resistant gene.
[0290] Any necessary supplements besides carbon, nitrogen, and
inorganic phosphate sources may also be included at appropriate
concentrations introduced alone or as a mixture with another
supplement or medium such as a complex nitrogen source. Optionally
the culture medium may contain one or more reducing agents selected
from the group consisting of glutathione, cysteine, cystamine,
thioglycollate, dithioerythritol and dithiothreitol.
[0291] The prokaryotic host cells are cultured at suitable
temperatures. For E. coli growth, for example, the preferred
temperature ranges from about 20.degree. C. to about 39.degree. C.,
more preferably from about 25.degree. C. to about 37.degree. C.,
even more preferably at about 30.degree. C. The pH of the medium
may be any pH ranging from about 5 to about 9, depending mainly on
the host organism. For E. coli, the pH is preferably from about 6.8
to about 7.4, and more preferably about 7.0.
[0292] If an inducible promoter is used in the expression vector of
the invention, protein expression is induced under conditions
suitable for the activation of the promoter. In one aspect of the
invention, PhoA promoters are used for controlling transcription of
the polypeptides. Accordingly, the transformed host cells are
cultured in a phosphate-limiting medium for induction. Preferably,
the phosphate-limiting medium is the C.R.A.P medium (see, e.g.,
Simmons et al., J. Immunol. Methods (2002), 263:133-147). A variety
of other inducers may be used, according to the vector construct
employed, as is known in the art.
[0293] The expressed antibody proteins of the present invention are
secreted into and recovered from the periplasm of the host cells.
Protein recovery typically involves disrupting the microorganism,
generally by such means as osmotic shock, sonication or lysis. Once
cells are disrupted, cell debris or whole cells may be removed by
centrifugation or filtration. The proteins may be further purified,
for example, by affinity resin chromatography. Alternatively,
proteins can be transported into the culture media and isolated
therein. Cells may be removed from the culture and the culture
supernatant being filtered and concentrated for further
purification of the proteins produced. The expressed polypeptides
can be further isolated and identified using commonly known methods
such as polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (PAGE) and Western blot
assay.
[0294] Alternatively, antibody production is conducted in large
quantity by a fermentation process. Various large-scale fed-batch
fermentation procedures are available for production of recombinant
proteins. Large-scale fermentations have at least 1000 liters of
capacity, preferably about 1,000 to 100,000 liters of capacity.
These fermentors use agitator impellers to distribute oxygen and
nutrients, especially glucose (the preferred carbon/energy source).
Small scale fermentation refers generally to fermentation in a
fermentor that is no more than approximately 100 liters in
volumetric capacity, and can range from about 1 liter to about 100
liters.
[0295] During the fermentation process, induction of protein
expression is typically initiated after the cells have been grown
under suitable conditions to a desired density, e.g., an OD.sub.550
of about 180-220, at which stage the cells are in the early
stationary phase. A variety of inducers may be used, according to
the vector construct employed, as is known in the art and described
above. Cells may be grown for shorter periods prior to induction.
Cells are usually induced for about 12-50 hours, although longer or
shorter induction time may be used.
[0296] To improve the production yield and quality of the
antibodies of the invention, various fermentation conditions can be
modified. For example, to improve the proper assembly and folding
of the secreted antibody polypeptides, additional vectors
overexpressing chaperone proteins, such as Dsb proteins (DsbA,
DsbB, DsbC, DsbD and or DsbG) or FkpA (a peptidylprolyl
cis,trans-isomerase with chaperone activity) can be used to
co-transform the host prokaryotic cells. The chaperone proteins
have been demonstrated to facilitate the proper folding and
solubility of heterologous proteins produced in bacterial host
cells. Chen et al. (1999) J Bio Chem 274:19601-19605; Georgiou et
al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,083,715; Georgiou et al., U.S. Pat. No.
6,027,888; Bothmann and Pluckthun (2000) J. Biol. Chem.
275:17100-17105; Ramm and Pluckthun (2000) J. Biol. Chem.
275:17106-17113; Arie et al. (2001) Mol. Microbiol. 39:199-210.
[0297] To minimize proteolysis of expressed heterologous proteins
(especially those that are proteolytically sensitive), certain host
strains deficient for proteolytic enzymes can be used for the
present invention. For example, host cell strains may be modified
to effect genetic mutation(s) in the genes encoding known bacterial
proteases such as Protease III, OmpT, DegP, Tsp, Protease I,
Protease Mi, Protease V, Protease VI and combinations thereof. Some
E. coli protease-deficient strains are available and described in,
for example, Joly et al. (1998), supra; Georgiou et al., U.S. Pat.
No. 5,264,365; Georgiou et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,508,192; Hara et
al., Microbial Drug Resistance, 2:63-72 (1996).
[0298] E. coli strains deficient for proteolytic enzymes and
transformed with plasmids overexpressing one or more chaperone
proteins may be used as host cells in the expression system
encoding the antibodies of the invention.
[0299] d) Antibody Purification
[0300] The antibody protein produced herein is further purified to
obtain preparations that are substantially homogeneous for further
assays and uses. Standard protein purification methods known in the
art can be employed. The following procedures are exemplary of
suitable purification procedures: fractionation on immunoaffinity
or ion-exchange columns, ethanol precipitation, reverse phase HPLC,
chromatography on silica or on a cation-exchange resin such as
DEAE, chromatofocusing, SDS-PAGE, ammonium sulfate precipitation,
and gel filtration using, for example, Sephadex G-75.
[0301] In one aspect, Protein A immobilized on a solid phase is
used for immunoaffinity purification of the full length antibody
products of the invention. Protein A is a 4 1 kD cell wall protein
from Staphylococcus aureas which binds with a high affinity to the
Fc region of antibodies. Lindmark et al (1983) J. Immunol. Meth.
62:1-13. The solid phase to which Protein A is immobilized is
preferably a column comprising a glass or silica surface, more
preferably a controlled pore glass column or a silicic acid column.
In some applications, the column has been coated with a reagent,
such as glycerol, in an attempt to prevent nonspecific adherence of
contaminants. The solid phase is then washed to remove contaminants
non-specifically bound to the solid phase. Finally the antibody of
interest is recovered from the solid phase by elution.
[0302] 2. Antibody Production in Eukaryotic Cells
[0303] For Eukaryotic expression, the vector components generally
include, but are not limited to, one or more of the following, a
signal sequence, an origin of replication, one or more marker
genes, and enhancer element, a promoter, and a transcription
termination sequence.
[0304] a) Signal Sequence Component
[0305] A vector for use in a eukaryotic host may also an insert
that encodes a signal sequence or other polypeptide having a
specific cleavage site at the N-terminus of the mature protein or
polypeptide. The heterologous signal sequence selected preferably
is one that is recognized and processed (i.e., cleaved by a signal
peptidase) by the host cell. In mammalian cell expression,
mammalian signal sequences as well as viral secretory leaders, for
example, the herpes simplex gD signal, are available.
[0306] The DNA for such precursor region is ligated in reading
frame to DNA encoding the antibodies of the invention.
[0307] b) Origin of Replication
[0308] Generally, the origin of replication component is not needed
for mammalian expression vectors (the SV40 origin may typically be
used only because it contains the early promoter).
[0309] c) Selection Gene Component
[0310] Expression and cloning vectors may contain a selection gene,
also termed a selectable marker. Typical selection genes encode
proteins that (a) confer resistance to antibiotics or other toxins,
e.g., ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexate, or tetracycline, (b)
complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or (c) supply critical
nutrients not available from complex media, e.g., the gene encoding
D-alanine racemase for Bacilli.
[0311] One example of a selection scheme utilizes a drug to arrest
growth of a host cell. Those cells that are successfully
transformed with a heterologous gene produce a protein conferring
drug resistance and thus survive the selection regimen. Examples of
such dominant selection use the drugs neomycin, mycophenolic acid
and hygromycin.
[0312] Another example of suitable selectable markers for mammalian
cells are those that enable the identification of cells competent
to take up nucleic acid encoding the antibodies of the invention,
such as DHFR, thymidine kinase, metallothionein-I and -II,
preferably primate metallothionein genes, adenosine deaminase,
ornithine decarboxylase, etc.
[0313] For example, cells transformed with the DHFR selection gene
are first identified by culturing all of the transformants in a
culture medium that contains methotrexate (Mtx), a competitive
antagonist of DHFR. An appropriate host cell when wild type DHFR is
employed is the Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cell line deficient in
DHFR activity (e.g., ATCC CRL-9096).
[0314] Alternatively, host cells (particularly wild-type hosts that
contain endogenous DHFR) transformed or co-transformed with the
antibody encoding-DNA sequences, wild-type DHFR protein, and
another selectable marker such as aminoglycoside
3'-phosphotransferase (APH) can be selected by cell growth in
medium containing a selection agent for the selectable marker such
as an aminoglycosidic antibiotic, e.g., kanamycin, neomycin, or
G418. See U.S. Pat. No. 4,965,199.
[0315] d) Promoter Component
[0316] Expression and cloning vectors usually contain a promoter
that is recognized by the host organism and is operably linked to
the nucleic acid encoding the desired antibody sequences. Virtually
all eukaryotic genes have an AT-rich region located approximately
25 to 30 based upstream from the site where transcription is
initiated. Another sequence found 70 to 80 bases upstream from the
start of the transcription of many genes is a CNCAAT region where N
may be any nucletotide. A the 3' end of most eukaryotic is an
AATAAA sequence that may be the signal for addition of the poly A
tail to the 3' end of the coding sequence. All of these sequences
may be inserted into eukaryotic expression vectors.
[0317] Other promoters suitable for use with prokaryotic hosts
include the phoA promoter, -lactamase and lactose promoter systems,
alkaline phosphatase promoter, a tryptophan (trp) promoter system,
and hybrid promoters such as the tac promoter. However, other known
bacterial promoters are suitable. Promoters for use in bacterial
systems also will contain a Shine-Dalgarno (S.D.) sequence operably
linked to the DNA encoding the antibody polypeptide.
[0318] Antibody polypeptide transcription from vectors in mammalian
host cells is controlled, for example, by promoters obtained from
the genomes of viruses such as polyoma virus, fowlpox virus,
adenovirus (such as Adenovirus 2), bovine papilloma virus, avian
sarcoma virus, cytomegalovirus, a retrovirus, hepatitis-B virus and
most preferably Simian Virus 40 (SV40), from heterologous mammalian
promoters, e.g., the actin promoter or an immunoglobulin promoter,
from heat-shock promoters, provided such promoters are compatible
with the host cell systems.
[0319] The early and late promoters of the SV40 virus are
conveniently obtained as an SV40 restriction fragment that also
contains the SV40 viral origin of replication. The immediate early
promoter of the human cytomegalovirus is conveniently obtained as a
HindIII E restriction fragment. A system for expressing DNA in
mammalian hosts using the bovine papilloma virus as a vector is
disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,419,446. A modification of this system
is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,601,978. See also Reyes et al.,
Nature 297:598-601 (1982) on expression of human-interferon cDNA in
mouse cells under the control of a thymidine kinase promoter from
herpes simplex virus. Alternatively, the Rous Sarcoma Virus long
terminal repeat can be used as the promoter.
[0320] e) Enhancer Element Component
[0321] Transcription of a DNA encoding the antibodies of this
invention by higher eukaryotes is often increased by inserting an
enhancer sequence into the vector. Many enhancer sequences are now
known from mammalian genes (globin, elastase, albumin,
.alpha.-fetoprotein, and insulin) Typically, however, one will use
an enhancer from a eukaryotic cell virus. Examples include the SV40
enhancer on the late side of the replication origin (bp 100-270),
the cytomegalovirus early promoter enhancer, the polyoma enhancer
on the late side of the replication origin, and adenovirus
enhancers. See also Yaniv, Nature 297:17-18 (1982) on enhancing
elements for activation of eukaryotic promoters. The enhancer may
be spliced into the vector at a position 5' or 3' to the antibody
encoding sequence, but is preferably located at a site 5' from the
promoter.
[0322] f) Transcription Termination Component
[0323] Expression vectors used in eukaryotic host cells (yeast,
fungi, insect, plant, animal, human, or nucleated cells from other
multicellular organisms) will also contain sequences necessary for
the termination of transcription and for stabilizing the mRNA. Such
sequences are commonly available from the 5' and, occasionally 3',
untranslated regions of eukaryotic or viral DNAs or cDNAs. These
regions contain nucleotide segments transcribed as polyadenylated
fragments in the untranslated portion of the antobdy-encoding mRNA.
One useful transcription termination component is the bovine growth
hormone polyadenylation region. See WO94/11026 and the expression
vector disclosed therein.
[0324] g) Selection and Transformation of Host Cells
[0325] Suitable host cells for cloning or expressing the DNA in the
vectors herein include higher eukaryote cells described herein,
including vertebrate host cells. Propagation of vertebrate cells in
culture (tissue culture) has become a routine procedure. Examples
of useful mammalian host cell lines are monkey kidney CV1 line
transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL 1651); human embryonic kidney
line (293 or 293 cells subcloned for growth in suspension culture,
Graham et al., J. Gen Vivol. 36:59 (1977)); baby hamster kidney
cells (BHK, ATCC CCL 10); Chinese hamster ovary cells/-DHFR (CHO,
Urlaub et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:4216 (1980)); mouse
sertoli cells (TM4, Mather, Biol. Reprod. 23:243-251 (1980));
monkey kidney cells (CV1 ATCC CCL 70); African green monkey kidney
cells (VERO-76, ATCC CRL-1587); human cervical carcinoma cells
(HELA, ATCC CCL 2); canine kidney cells (MDCK, ATCC CCL 34);
buffalo rat liver cells (BRL 3A, ATCC CRL 1442); human lung cells
(W138, ATCC CCL 75); human liver cells (Hep G2, HB 8065); mouse
mammary tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51); TRI cells (Mather et al.,
Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci. 383:44-68 (1982)); MRC 5 cells; FS4 cells;
and a human hepatoma line (Hep G2).
[0326] Host cells are transformed with the above-described
expression or cloning vectors for antibody production and cultured
in conventional nutrient media modified as appropriate for inducing
promoters, selecting transformants, or amplifying the genes
encoding the desired sequences. Examples of useful mammalian host
celllines are
[0327] h) Culturing the Host Cells
[0328] The host cells used to produce the antibody of this
invention may be cultured in a variety of media. Commercially
available media such as Ham's F10 (Sigma), Minimal Essential Medium
((MEM), (Sigma), RPMI-1640 (Sigma), and Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's
Medium ((DMEM), Sigma) are suitable for culturing the host cells.
In addition, any of the media described in Ham et al., Meth. Enz.
58:44 (1979), Barnes et al., Anal. Biochem. 102:255 (1980), U.S.
Pat. No. 4,767,704; 4,657,866; 4,927,762; 4,560,655; or 5,122,469;
WO 90/03430; WO 87/00195; or U.S. patent Re. 30,985 may be used as
culture media for the host cells. Any of these media may be
supplemented as necessary with hormones and/or other growth factors
(such as insulin, transferrin, or epidermal growth factor), salts
(such as sodium chloride, calcium, magnesium, and phosphate),
buffers (such as HEPES), nucleotides (such as adenosine and
thymidine), antibiotics (such as GENTAMYCIN.TM. drug), trace
elements (defined as inorganic compounds usually present at final
concentrations in the micromolar range), and glucose or an
equivalent energy source. Any other necessary supplements may also
be included at appropriate concentrations that would be known to
those skilled in the art. The culture conditions, such as
temperature, pH, and the like, are those previously used with the
host cell selected for expression, and will be apparent to the
ordinarily skilled artisan.
[0329] i) Purification of Antibody
[0330] When using recombinant techniques, the antibody can be
produced intracellularly, in the periplasmic space, or directly
secreted into the medium. If the antibody is produced
intracellularly, as a first step, the particulate debris, either
host cells or lysed fragments, are removed, for example, by
centrifugation or ultrafiltration. Carter et al., Bio/Technology
10:163-167 (1992) describe a procedure for isolating antibodies
which are secreted to the periplasmic space of E. coli. Briefly,
cell paste is thawed in the presence of sodium acetate (pH 3.5),
EDTA, and phenylmethylsulfonylfluoride (PMSF) over about 30 min.
Cell debris can be removed by centrifugation. Where the antibody is
secreted into the medium, supernatants from such expression systems
are generally first concentrated using a commercially available
protein concentration filter, for example, an Amicon or Millipore
Pellicon ultrafiltration unit. A protease inhibitor such as PMSF
may be included in any of the foregoing steps to inhibit
proteolysis and antibiotics may be included to prevent the growth
of adventitious contaminants.
[0331] The antibody composition prepared from the cells can be
purified using, for example, hydroxylapatite chromatography, gel
electrophoresis, dialysis, and affinity chromatography, with
affinity chromatography being the preferred purification technique.
The suitability of protein A as an affinity ligand depends on the
species and isotype of any immunoglobulin Fc domain that is present
in the antibody. Protein A can be used to purify antibodies that
are based on human immunoglobulins containing 1, 2, or 4 heavy
chains (Lindmark et al., J. Immunol. Meth. 62:1-13 (1983)). Protein
G is recommended for all mouse isotypes and for human 3 (Guss et
al., EMBO J. 5:15671575 (1986)). The matrix to which the affinity
ligand is attached is most often agarose, but other matrices are
available. Mechanically stable matrices such as controlled pore
glass or poly(styrene-divinyl)benzene allow for faster flow rates
and shorter processing times than can be achieved with agarose.
Where the antibody comprises a C.sub.H3 domain, the Bakerbond
ABX.TM.resin (J. T. Baker, Phillipsburg, N.J.) is useful for
purification. Other techniques for protein purification such as
fractionation on an ion-exchange column, ethanol precipitation,
Reverse Phase HPLC, chromatography on silica, chromatography on
heparin SEPHAROSE.TM. chromatography on an anion or cation exchange
resin (such as a polyaspartic acid column), chromatofocusing,
SDS-PAGE, and ammonium sulfate precipitation are also available
depending on the antibody to be recovered.
[0332] Following any preliminary purification step(s), the mixture
comprising the antibody of interest and contaminants may be
subjected to low pH hydrophobic interaction chromatography using an
elution buffer at a pH between about 2.5-4.5, preferably performed
at low salt concentrations (e.g., from about 0-0.25M salt).
[0333] C. Antibody Preparation
[0334] 1) Polyclonal Antibodies
[0335] Polyclonal antibodies are generally raised in animals by
multiple subcutaneous (sc) or intraperitoneal (ip) injections of
the relevant antigen and an adjuvant. It may be useful to conjugate
the relevant antigen to a protein that is immunogenic in the
species to be immunized, e.g., keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH),
serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, or soybean trypsin inhibitor,
using a bifunctional or derivatizing agent, e.g., maleimidobenzoyl
sulfosuccinimide ester (conjugation through cysteine residues),
N-hydroxysuccinimide (through lysien residues), glutaraldehyde,
succinic anhydride, SOCl.sub.2, or R'N.dbd.C.dbd.NR, where R and
R.sup.1 are independently lower alkyl groups. Examples of adjuvants
which may be employed include Freund's complete adjuvant and
MPL-TDM adjuvant (monophosphoryl Lipid A, synthetic trehalose
dicorynomycolate). The immunization protocol may be selected by one
skilled in the art without undue experimentation.
[0336] The animals are immunized against the antigen, immunogenic
conjugates, or derivatives by combining, e.g., 100 .mu.g or 5 .mu.g
or the protein or conjugate (for rabbits or mice, respectively)
with 3 volumes of Freund's complete adjuvant and injecting the
solution intradermally at multiple sites. One month later, the
animals are boosted with 1/5 to 1/10 the original amount of peptide
or conjugate in Freund's complete adjuvant by subcutaneous
injection at multiple sites. Seven to fourteen days later, the
animals are bled and the serum is assayed for antibody titer.
Animals are boosted until the titer plateaus. Conjugates also can
be made in recombinant cell culture as protein fusions. Also,
aggregating agents such as alum are suitable to enhance the immune
response.
[0337] 2) Monoclonal Antibodies
[0338] Monoclonal antibodies are obtained from a population of
substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e., the individual
antibodies comprising the population are identical except for
possible naturally occurring mutations and/or post-translational
modifications (e.g., isomerizations, amidations) that may be
present in minor amounts. Thus, the modifier "monoclonal" indicates
the character of the antibody as not being a mixture of discrete
antibodies.
[0339] For example, the monoclonal antibodies may be made using the
hybridoma method first described by Kohler et al., Nature, 256:495
(1975), or may be made by recombinant DNA methods (U.S. Pat. No.
4,816,567).
[0340] In the hybridoma method, a mouse or other appropriate host
animal, such as a hamster, is immunized as hereinabove described to
elicit lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing
antibodies that will specifically bind to the protein used for
immunization. Alternatively, lymphocytes may be immunized in vitro.
Lymphocytes then are fused with myeloma cells using a suitable
fusing agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to form a hybridoma cell
(Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, pp. 59-103
(Academic Press, 1986).
[0341] The immunizing agent will typically include the antigenic
protein or a fusion variant thereof. Generally either peripheral
blood lymphocytes ("PBLs") are used if cells of human origin are
desired, or spleen cells or lymph node cells are used if non-human
mammalian sources are desired. The lymphocytes are then fused with
an immortalized cell line using a suitable fusing agent, such as
polyethylene glycol, to form a hybridoma cell. Goding, Monoclonal
Antibodies: Principles and Practice, Academic Press (1986), pp.
59-103.
[0342] Immortalized cell lines are usually transformed mammalian
cells, particularly myeloma cells of rodent, bovine and human
origin. Usually, rat or mouse myeloma cell lines are employed. The
hybridoma cells thus prepared are seeded and grown in a suitable
culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that
inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, parental myeloma
cells. For example, if the parental myeloma cells lack the enzyme
hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase (HGPRT or HPRT),
the culture medium for the hybridomas typically will include
hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine (HAT medium), which are
substances that prevent the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells.
[0343] Preferred immortalized myeloma cells are those that fuse
efficiently, support stable high-level production of antibody by
the selected antibody-producing cells, and are sensitive to a
medium such as HAT medium. Among these, preferred are murine
myeloma lines, such as those derived from MOPC-21 and MPC-11 mouse
tumors available from the Salk Institute Cell Distribution Center,
San Diego, Calif. USA, and SP-2 cells (and derivatives thereof,
e.g., X63-Ag8-653) available from the American Type Culture
Collection, Manassas, Va. USA. Human myeloma and mouse-human
heteromyeloma cell lines also have been described for the
production of human monoclonal antibodies (Kozbor, J. Immunol.,
133:3001 (1984); Brodeur et al., Monoclonal Antibody Production
Techniques and Applications, pp. 51-63 (Marcel Dekker, Inc., New
York, 1987)).
[0344] Culture medium in which hybridoma cells are growing is
assayed for production of monoclonal antibodies directed against
the antigen. Preferably, the binding specificity of monoclonal
antibodies produced by hybridoma cells is determined by
immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as
radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
(ELISA).
[0345] The culture medium in which the hybridoma cells are cultured
can be assayed for the presence of monoclonal antibodies directed
against the desired antigen. Preferably, the binding affinity and
specificity of the monoclonal antibody can be determined by
immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as
radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked assay (ELISA). Such
techniques and assays are known in the in art. For example, binding
affinity may be determined by the Scatchard analysis of Munson et
al., Anal. Biochem., 107:220 (1980).
[0346] After hybridoma cells are identified that produce antibodies
of the desired specificity, affinity, and/or activity, the clones
may be subcloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by
standard methods (Goding, supra). Suitable culture media for this
purpose include, for example, D-MEM or RPMI-1640 medium. In
addition, the hybridoma cells may be grown in vivo as tumors in a
mammal.
[0347] The monoclonal antibodies secreted by the subclones are
suitably separated from the culture medium, ascites fluid, or serum
by conventional immunoglobulin purification procedures such as, for
example, protein A-Sepharose, hydroxylapatite chromatography, gel
electrophoresis, dialysis, or affinity chromatography.
[0348] Monoclonal antibodies may also be made by recombinant DNA
methods, such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567, and as
described above. DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies is readily
isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by
using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding
specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of murine
antibodies). The hybridoma cells serve as a preferred source of
such DNA. Once isolated, the DNA may be placed into expression
vectors, which are then transfected into host cells such as E. coli
cells, simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or
myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein,
in order to synthesize monoclonal antibodies in such recombinant
host cells. Review articles on recombinant expression in bacteria
of DNA encoding the antibody include Skerra et al., Curr. Opinion
in Immunol., 5:256-262 (1993) and Pluckthun, Immunol. Revs.
130:151-188 (1992).
[0349] In a further embodiment, antibodies can be isolated from
antibody phage libraries generated using the techniques described
in McCafferty et al., Nature, 348:552-554 (1990). Clackson et al.,
Nature, 352:624-628 (1991) and Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol.,
222:581-597 (1991) describe the isolation of murine and human
antibodies, respectively, using phage libraries. Subsequent
publications describe the production of high affinity (nM range)
human antibodies by chain shuffling (Marks et al., Bio/Technology,
10:779-783 (1992)), as well as combinatorial infection and in vivo
recombination as a strategy for constructing very large phage
libraries (Waterhouse et al., Nucl. Acids Res., 21:2265-2266
(1993)). Thus, these techniques are viable alternatives to
traditional monoclonal antibody hybridoma techniques for isolation
of monoclonal antibodies.
[0350] The DNA also may be modified, for example, by substituting
the coding sequence for human heavy- and light-chain constant
domains in place of the homologous murine sequences (U.S. Pat. No.
4,816,567; Morrison, et al., Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 81:6851
(1984)), or by covalently joining to the immunoglobulin coding
sequence all or part of the coding sequence for a
non-immunoglobulin polypeptide. Typically such non-immunoglobulin
polypeptides are substituted for the constant domains of an
antibody, or they are substituted for the variable domains of one
antigen-combining site of an antibody to create a chimeric bivalent
antibody comprising one antigen-combining site having specificity
for an antigen and another antigen-combining site having
specificity for a different antigen.
[0351] The monoclonal antibodies described herein may by
monovalent, the preparation of which is well known in the art. For
example, one method involves recombinant expression of
immunoglobulin light chain and a modified heavy chain. The heavy
chain is truncated generally at any point in the Fc region so as to
prevent heavy chain crosslinking. Alternatively, the relevant
cysteine residues may be substituted with another amino acid
residue or are deleted so as to prevent crosslinking. In vitro
methods are also suitable for preparing monovalent antibodies.
Digestion of antibodies to produce fragments thereof, particularly
Fab fragments, can be accomplished using routine techniques known
in the art.
[0352] Chimeric or hybrid antibodies also may be prepared in vitro
using known methods in synthetic protein chemistry, including those
involving crosslinking agents. For example, immunotoxins may be
constructed using a disulfide-exchange reaction or by forming a
thioether bond. Examples of suitable reagents for this purpose
include iminothiolate and methyl-4-mercaptobutyrimidate.
[0353] 3) Humanized Antibodies.
[0354] The antibodies of the invention may further comprise
humanized or human antibodies. Humanized forms of non-human (e.g.,
murine) antibodies are chimeric immunoglobulins, immunoglobulin
chains or fragments thereof (such as Fv, Fab, Fab', F(ab').sub.2 or
other antigen-binding subsequences of antibodies) which contain
minimal sequence derived from non-human immunoglobulin. Humanized
antibodies include human immunoglobulins (recipient antibody) in
which residues from a complementarity determining region (CDR) (HVR
as used herein) of the recipient are replaced by residues from a
CDR of a non-human species (donor antibody) such as mouse, rat or
rabbit having the desired specificity, affinity and capacity. In
some instances, Fv framework residues of the human immunoglobulin
are replaced by corresponding non-human residues. Humanized
antibodies may also comprise residues which are found neither in
the recipient antibody nor in the imported CDR or framework
sequences. In general, the humanized antibody will comprise
substantially all of at least one, and typically two, variable
domain, in which all or substantially all of the CDR regions
correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin and all or
substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human
immunoglobulin consensus sequence. The humanized antibody optimally
also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant
region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin. Jones et
al., Nature 321: 522-525 (1986); Riechmann et al., Nature 332:
323-329 (1988) and Presta, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 2: 593-596
(1992).
[0355] Methods for humanizing non-human antibodies are well known
in the art. Generally, a humanized antibody has one or more amino
acid residues introduced into it from a source which is non-human.
These non-human amino acid residues are often referred to as
"import" residues, which are typically taken from an "import"
variable domain. Humanization can be essentially performed
following the method of Winter and co-workers, Jones et al., Nature
321:522-525 (1986); Riechmann et al., Nature 332:323-327 (1988);
Verhoeyen et al., Science 239:1534-1536 (1988), or through
substituting rodent CDRs or CDR sequences for the corresponding
sequences of a human antibody. Accordingly, such "humanized"
antibodies are chimeric antibodies (U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567),
wherein substantially less than an intact human variable domain has
been substituted by the corresponding sequence from a non-human
species. In practice, humanized antibodies are typically human
antibodies in which some CDR residues and possibly some FR residues
are substituted by residues from analogous sites in rodent
antibodies.
[0356] The choice of human variable domains, both light and heavy,
to be used in making the humanized antibodies is very important to
reduce antigenicity. According to the so-called "best-fit" method,
the sequence of the variable domain of a rodent antibody is
screened against the entire library of known human variable-domain
sequences. The human sequence which is closest to that of the
rodent is then accepted as the human framework (FR) for the
humanized antibody. Sims et al., J. Immunol., 151:2296 (1993);
Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol., 196:901 (1987). Another method uses
a particular framework derived from the consensus sequence of all
human antibodies of a particular subgroup of light or heavy chains.
The same framework may be used for several different humanized
antibodies. Carter et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89:4285
(1992); Presta et al., J. Immunol., 151:2623 (1993).
[0357] It is further important that antibodies be humanized with
retention of high affinity for the antigen and other favorable
biological properties. To achieve this goal, according to a
preferred method, humanized antibodies are prepared by a process of
analysis of the parental sequences and various conceptual humanized
products using three-dimensional models of the parental and
humanized sequences. Three-dimensional immunoglobulin models are
commonly available and are familiar to those skilled in the art.
Computer programs are available which illustrate and display
probable three-dimensional conformational structures of selected
candidate immunoglobulin sequences. Inspection of these displays
permits analysis of the likely role of the residues in the
functioning of the candidate immunoglobulin sequence, i.e., the
analysis of residues that influence the ability of the candidate
immunoglobulin to bind its antigen. In this way, FR residues can be
selected and combined from the recipient and import sequences so
that the desired antibody characteristic, such as increased
affinity for the target antigen(s), is achieved. In general, the
CDR residues are directly and most substantially involved in
influencing antigen binding.
[0358] Various forms of the humanized antibody are contemplated.
For example, the humanized antibody may be an antibody fragment,
such as an Fab, which is optionally conjugated with one or more
cytotoxic agent(s) in order to generate an immunoconjugate.
Alternatively, the humanized antibody may be an intact antibody,
such as an intact IgG1 antibody.
[0359] 4) Human Antibodies
[0360] As an alternative to humanization, human antibodies can be
generated. For example, it is now possible to produce transgenic
animals (e.g., mice) that are capable, upon immunization, of
producing a full repertoire of human antibodies in the absence of
endogenous immunoglobulin production. For example, it has been
described that the homozygous deletion of the antibody heavy-chain
joining region (J.sub.H) gene in chimeric and germ-line mutant mice
results in complete inhibition of endogenous antibody production.
Transfer of the human germ-line immunoglobulin gene array in such
germ-line mutant mice will result in the production of human
antibodies upon antigen challenge. See, e.g., Jakobovits et al.,
Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 90:2551 (1993); Jakobovits et al.,
Nature, 362:255-258 (1993); Bruggermann et al., Year in Immuno.,
7:33 (1993); U.S. Pat. No. 5,591,669 and WO 97/17852.
[0361] Alternatively, phage display technology can be used to
produce human antibodies and antibody fragments in vitro, from
immunoglobulin variable (V) domain gene repertoires from
unimmunized donors. McCafferty et al., Nature 348:552-553 (1990);
Hoogenboom and Winter, J. Mol. Biol. 227: 381 (1991). According to
this technique, antibody V domain genes are cloned in-frame into
either a major or minor coat protein gene of a filamentous
bacteriophage, such as M13 or fd, and displayed as functional
antibody fragments on the surface of the phage particle. Because
the filamentous particle contains a single-stranded DNA copy of the
phage genome, selections based on the functional properties of the
antibody also result in selection of the gene encoding the antibody
exhibiting those properties. Thus, the phage mimics some of the
properties of the B-cell. Phage display can be performed in a
variety of formats, reviewed in, e.g., Johnson, Kevin S. and
Chiswell, David J., Curr. Opin Struct. Biol. 3:564-571 (1993).
Several sources of V-gene segments can be used for phage display.
Clackson et al., Nature 352:624-628 (1991) isolated a diverse array
of anti-oxazolone antibodies from a small random combinatorial
library of V genes derived from the spleens of immunized mice. A
repertoire of V genes from unimmunized human donors can be
constructed and antibodies to a diverse array of antigens
(including self-antigens) can be isolated essentially following the
techniques described by Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol. 222:581-597
(1991), or Griffith et al., EMBO J. 12:725-734 (1993). See also,
U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,565,332 and 5,573,905.
[0362] The techniques of Cole et al., and Boerner et al., are also
available for the preparation of human monoclonal antibodies (Cole
et al., Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, p.
77 (1985) and Boerner et al., J. Immunol. 147(1): 86-95 (1991).
Similarly, human antibodies can be made by introducing human
immunoglobulin loci into transgenic animals, e.g., mice in which
the endogenous immunoglobulin genes have been partially or
completely inactivated. Upon challenge, human antibody production
is observed, which closely resembles that seen in humans in all
respects, including gene rearrangement, assembly and antibody
repertoire. This approach is described, for example, in U.S. Pat.
Nos. 5,545,807; 5,545,806, 5,569,825, 5,625,126, 5,633,425,
5,661,016 and in the following scientific publications: Marks et
al., Bio/Technology 10: 779-783 (1992); Lonberg et al., Nature 368:
856-859 (1994); Morrison, Nature 368: 812-13 (1994), Fishwild et
al., Nature Biotechnology 14: 845-51 (1996), Neuberger, Nature
Biotechnology 14: 826 (1996) and Lonberg and Huszar, Intern. Rev.
Immunol. 13: 65-93 (1995).
[0363] Finally, human antibodies may also be generated in vitro by
activated B cells (see U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,567,610 and 5,229,275).
[0364] 5) Antibody Fragments
[0365] In certain circumstances there are advantages to using
antibody fragments, rather than whole antibodies. Smaller fragment
sizes allow for rapid clearance, and may lead to improved access to
solid tumors.
[0366] Various techniques have been developed for the production of
antibody fragments. Traditionally, these fragments were derived via
proteolytic digestion of intact antibodies (see, e.g., Morimoto et
al., J Biochem Biophys. Method. 24:107-117 (1992); and Brennan et
al., Science 229:81 (1985)). However, these fragments can now be
produced directly by recombinant host cells. Fab, Fv and scFv
antibody fragments can all be expressed in and secreted from E.
coli, thus allowing the facile production of large amounts of these
fragments. Antibody fragments can be isolated from the antibody
phage libraries discussed above. Alternatively, Fab'-SH fragments
can be directly recovered from E. coli and chemically coupled to
form F(ab').sub.2 fragments (Carter et al., Bio/Technology
10:163-167 (1992)). According to another approach, F(ab').sub.2
fragments can be isolated directly from recombinant host cell
culture. Fab and F(ab').sub.2 with increase in vivo half-life is
described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,869,046. In other embodiments, the
antibody of choice is a single chain Fv fragment (scFv). See WO
93/16185; U.S. Pat. No. 5,571,894 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,587,458. The
antibody fragment may also be a "linear antibody", e.g., as
described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,870. Such linear antibody
fragments may be monospecific or bispecific.
[0367] 6) Antibody Dependent Enzyme Mediated Prodrug Therapy
(ADEPT)
[0368] The antibodies of the present invention may also be used in
ADEPT by conjugating the antibody to a prodrug-activating enzyme
which converts a prodrug (e.g. a peptidyl chemotherapeutic agent,
see WO 81/01145) to an active anti-cancer drug. See, for example,
WO 88/07378 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,975,278.
[0369] The enzyme component of the immunoconjugate useful for ADEPT
includes any enzyme capable of acting on a prodrug in such a way so
as to convert it into its more active, cytotoxic form.
[0370] Enzymes that are useful in the method of this invention
include, but are not limited to, glycosidase, glucose oxidase,
human lysozyme, human glucuronidase, alkaline phosphatase useful
for converting phosphate-containing prodrugs into free drugs;
arylsulfatase useful for converting sulfate-containing prodrugs
into free drugs; cytosine deaminase useful for converting non-toxic
5-fluorocytosine into the anti-cancer drug 5-fluorouracil;
proteases, such as serratia protease, thermolysin, subtilisin,
carboxypeptidases (e.g., carboxypeptidase G2 and carboxypeptidase
A) and cathepsins (such as cathepsins B and L), that are useful for
converting peptide-containing prodrugs into free drugs;
D-alanylcarboxypeptidases, useful for converting prodrugs that
contain D-amino acid substituents; carbohydrate-cleaving enzymes
such as .beta.-galactosidase and neuraminidase useful for
converting glycosylated prodrugs into free drugs; .beta.-lactamase
useful for converting drugs derivatized with .beta.-lactams into
free drugs; and penicillin amidases, such as penicillin Vamidase or
penicillin G amidase, useful for converting drugs derivatized at
their amine nitrogens with phenoxyacetyl or phenylacetyl groups,
respectively, into free drugs. Alternatively, antibodies with
enzymatic activity, also known in the art as "abzymes" can be used
to convert the prodrugs of the invention into free active drugs
(see, e.g., Massey, Nature 328: 457-458 (1987)). Antibody-abzyme
conjugates can be prepared as described herein for delivery of the
abzyme to a tumor cell population.
[0371] The above enzymes can be covalently bound to the polypeptide
or antibodies described herein by techniques well known in the art
such as the use of the heterobifunctional cross-linking agents
discussed above. Alternatively, fusion proteins comprising at least
the antigen binding region of the antibody of the invention linked
to at least a functionally active portion of an enzyme of the
invention can be constructed using recombinant DNA techniques well
known in the art (see, e.g. Neuberger et al., Nature 312: 604-608
(1984)).
[0372] 7) Bispecific and Polyspecific Antibodies
[0373] Bispecific antibodies (BsAbs) are antibodies that have
binding specificities for at least two different epitopes,
including those on the same or another protein. Alternatively, one
arm can bind to the target antigen, and another arm can be combined
with an arm that binds to a triggering molecule on a leukocyte such
as a T-cell receptor molecule (e.g., CD3), or Fc receptors for IgG
(Fc.gamma.R) such as Fc.gamma.R1 (CD64), Fc.gamma.RII (CD32) and
Fc.gamma.RIII (CD16), so as to focus and localize cellular defense
mechanisms to the target antigen-expressing cell. Such antibodies
can be derived from full length antibodies or antibody fragments
(e.g. F(ab').sub.2 bispecific antibodies).
[0374] Bispecific antibodies may also be used to localize cytotoxic
agents to cells which express the target antigen. Such antibodies
possess one arm that binds the desired antigen and another arm that
binds the cytotoxic agent (e.g., saporin, anti-interferon-.alpha.,
vinca alkoloid, ricin A chain, methotrexate or radioactive isotope
hapten). Examples of known bispecific antibodies include
anti-ErbB2/anti-FcgRIII (WO 96/16673), anti-ErbB2/anti-FcgRI (U.S.
Pat. No. 5,837,234), anti-ErbB2/anti-CD3 (U.S. Pat. No.
5,821,337).
[0375] Methods for making bispecific antibodies are known in the
art. Traditional production of full length bispecific antibodies is
based on the coexpression of two immunoglobulin heavy-chain/light
chain pairs, where the two chains have different specificities.
Millstein et al., Nature, 305:537-539 (1983). Because of the random
assortment of immunoglobulin heavy and light chains, these
hybridomas (quadromas) produce a potential mixture of 10 different
antibody molecules, of which only one has the correct bispecific
structure. Purification of the correct molecule, which is usually
done by affinity chromatography steps, is rather cumbersome, and
the product yields are low. Similar procedures are disclosed in WO
93/08829 and in Traunecker et al., EMBO 1, 10:3655-3659 (1991).
[0376] According to a different approach, antibody variable domains
with the desired binding specificities (antibody-antigen combining
sites) are fused to immunoglobulin constant domain sequences. The
fusion preferably is with an immunoglobulin heavy chain constant
domain, comprising at least part of the hinge, CH2, and CH3
regions. It is preferred to have the first heavy-chain constant
region (CH1) containing the site necessary for light chain binding,
present in at least one of the fusions. DNAs encoding the
immunoglobulin heavy chain fusions and, if desired, the
immunoglobulin light chain, are inserted into separate expression
vectors, and are co-transfected into a suitable host organism. This
provides for great flexibility in adjusting the mutual proportions
of the three polypeptide fragments in embodiments when unequal
ratios of the three polypeptide chains used in the construction
provide the optimum yields. It is, however, possible to insert the
coding sequences for two or all three polypeptide chains in one
expression vector when the expression of at least two polypeptide
chains in equal ratios results in high yields or when the ratios
are of no particular significance.
[0377] In a preferred embodiment of this approach, the bispecific
antibodies are composed of a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain with
a first binding specificity in one arm, and a hybrid immunoglobulin
heavy chain-light chain pair (providing a second binding
specificity) in the other arm. It was found that this asymmetric
structure facilitates the separation of the desired bispecific
compound from unwanted immunoglobulin chain combinations, as the
presence of an immunoglobulin light chain in only one half of the
bispecific molecules provides for an easy way of separation. This
approach is disclosed in WO 94/04690. For further details of
generating bispecific antibodies, see, for example, Suresh et al.,
Methods in Enzymology 121: 210 (1986).
[0378] According to another approach described in WO 96/27011 or
U.S. Pat. No. 5,731,168, the interface between a pair of antibody
molecules can be engineered to maximize the percentage of
heterodimers which are recovered from recombinant cell culture. The
preferred interface comprises at least a part of the CH3 region of
an antibody constant domain. In this method, one or more small
amino acid side chains from the interface of the first antibody
molecule are replaced with larger side chains (e.g., tyrosine or
tryptophan) Compensatory "cavities" of identical or similar size to
the large side chains(s) are created on the interface of the second
antibody molecule by replacing large amino acid side chains with
smaller ones (e.g., alanine or threonine). This provides a
mechanism for increasing the yield of the heterodimer over other
unwanted end-products such as homodimers.
[0379] Techniques for generating bispecific antibodies from
antibody fragments have been described in the literature. For
example, bispecific antibodies can be prepared using chemical
linkage. Brennan et al., Science 229: 81 (1985) describe a
procedure wherein intact antibodies are proteolytically cleaved to
generate F(ab').sub.2 fragments. These fragments are reduced in the
presence of the dithiol complexing agent sodium arsenite to
stabilize vicinal dithiols and prevent intermolecular disulfide
formation. The Fab' fragments generated are then converted to
thionitrobenzoate (TNB) derivatives. One of the Fab'-TNB
derivatives is then reconverted to the Fab'-TNB derivative to form
the bispecific antibody. The bispecific antibodies produced can be
used as agents for the selective immobilization of enzymes.
[0380] Fab' fragments may be directly recovered from E. coli and
chemically coupled to form bispecific antibodies. Shalaby et al.,
J. Exp. Med. 175: 217-225 (1992) describes the production of fully
humanized bispecific antibody F(ab').sub.2 molecules. Each Fab'
fragment was separately secreted from E. coli and subjected to
directed chemical coupling in vitro to form the bispecific
antibody. The bispecific antibody thus formed was able to bind to
cells overexpressing the ErbB2 receptor and normal human T cells,
as well as trigger the lytic activity of human cytotoxic
lymphocytes against human breast tumor targets.
[0381] Various techniques for making and isolating bivalent
antibody fragments directly from recombinant cell culture have also
been described. For example, bivalent heterodimers have been
produced using leucine zippers. Kostelny et al., J. Immunol.,
148(5):1547-1553 (1992). The leucine zipper peptides from the Fos
and Jun proteins were linked to the Fab' portions of two different
antibodies by gene fusion. The antibody homodimers were reduced at
the hinge region to form monomers and then re-oxidized to form the
antibody heterodimers. The "diabody" technology described by
Hollinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 90: 6444-6448 (1993)
has provided an alternative mechanism for making
bispecific/bivalent antibody fragments. The fragments comprise a
heavy-chain variable domain (V.sub.H) connected to a light-chain
variable domain (V.sub.L) by a linker which is too short to allow
pairing between the two domains on the same chain. Accordingly, the
V.sub.H and V.sub.L domains of one fragment are forced to pair with
the complementary V.sub.L and V.sub.H domains of another fragment,
thereby forming two antigen-binding sites. Another strategy for
making bispecific/bivalent antibody fragments by the use of
single-chain Fv (sFv) dimers has also been reported. See Gruber et
al., J. Immunol., 152:5368 (1994).
[0382] Antibodies with more than two valencies are contemplated.
For example, trispecific antibodies can be prepared. Tutt et al.,
J. Immunol. 147: 60 (1991).
[0383] Exemplary bispecific antibodies may bind to two different
epitopes on a given molecule. Alternatively, an anti-protein arm
may be combined with an arm which binds to a triggering molecule on
a leukocyte such as a T-cell receptor molecule (e.g., CD2, CD3,
CD28 or B7), or Fc receptors for IgG (Fc.gamma.R), such as
Fc.gamma.RI (CD64), Fc.gamma.RII (CD32) and Fc.gamma.RIII (CD16) so
as to focus cellular defense mechanisms to the cell expressing the
particular protein. Bispecific antibodies may also be used to
localize cytotoxic agents to cells which express a particular
protein. Such antibodies possess a protein-binding arm and an arm
which binds a cytotoxic agent or a radionuclide chelator, such as
EOTUBE, DPTA, DOTA or TETA. Another bispecific antibody of interest
binds the protein of interest and further binds tissue factor
(TF).
[0384] 8) Multivalent Antibodies
[0385] A multivalent antibody may be internalized (and/or
catabolized) faster than a bivalent antibody by a cell expressing
an antigen to which the antibodies bind. The antibodies of the
present invention can be multivalent antibodies (which are other
than of the IgM class) with three or more antigen binding sites
(e.g. tetravalent antibodies), which can be readily produced by
recombinant expression of nucleic acid encoding the polypeptide
chains of the antibody. The multivalent antibody can comprise a
dimerization domain and three or more antigen binding sites. The
preferred dimerization domain comprises (or consists of) an Fc
region or a hinge region. In this scenario, the antibody will
comprise an Fc region and three or more antigen binding sites
amino-terminal to the Fc region. The preferred multivalent antibody
herein comprises (or consists of) three to about eight, but
preferably four, antigen binding sites. The multivalent antibody
comprises at least one polypeptide chain (and preferably two
polypeptide chains), wherein the polypeptide chain(s) comprise two
or more variable domains. For instance, the polypeptide chain(s)
may comprise VD1-(X1).sub.n-VD2-(X2).sub.n-Fc, wherein VD1 is a
first variable domain, VD2 is a second variable domain, Fc is one
polypeptide chain of an Fc region, X1 and X2 represent an amino
acid or polypeptide, and n is 0 or 1. For instance, the polypeptide
chain(s) may comprise: VH-CH1-flexible linker-VH-CH1-Fc region
chain; or VH-CH1-VH-CH1-Fc region chain. The multivalent antibody
herein preferably further comprises at least two (and preferably
four) light chain variable domain polypeptides. The multivalent
antibody herein may, for instance, comprise from about two to about
eight light chain variable domain polypeptides. The light chain
variable domain polypeptides contemplated here comprise a light
chain variable domain and, optionally, further comprise a CL
domain.
[0386] 9) Heteroconjugate Antibodies
[0387] Heteroconjugate antibodies are also within the scope of the
present invention. Heteroconjugate antibodies are composed of two
covalently joined antibodies. For example, one of the antibodies in
the heteroconjugate can be coupled to avidin, the other to biotin.
Such antibodies have, for example, been proposed to target immune
system cells to unwanted cells, U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980, and for
treatment of HIV infection. WO 91/00360, WO 92/200373 and EP
0308936. It is contemplated that the antibodies may be prepared in
vitro using known methods in synthetic protein chemistry, including
those involving crosslinking agents. For example, immunotoxins may
be constructed using a disulfide exchange reaction or by forming a
thioether bond. Examples of suitable reagents for this purpose
include iminothiolate and methyl-4-mercaptobutyrimidate and those
disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980. Heteroconjugate
antibodies may be made using any convenient cross-linking methods.
Suitable cross-linking agents are well known in the art, and are
disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980, along with a number of
cross-linking techniques.
[0388] 10) Effector Function Engineering
[0389] It may be desirable to modify the antibody of the invention
with respect to Fc effector function, e.g., so as to modify (e.g.,
enhance or eliminate) antigen-dependent cell-mediated cyotoxicity
(ADCC) and/or complement dependent cytotoxicity (CDC) of the
antibody. In a preferred embodiment, Fc effector function of the
anti-PD-L1 antibodies is reduced or eliminated. This may be
achieved by introducing one or more amino acid substitutions in an
Fc region of the antibody. Alternatively or additionally, cysteine
residue(s) may be introduced in the Fc region, thereby allowing
interchain disulfide bond formation in this region. The homodimeric
antibody thus generated may have improved internalization
capability and/or increased complement-mediated cell killing and
antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC). See Caron et al.,
J. Exp Med. 176:1191-1195 (1992) and Shopes, B. J. Immunol.
148:2918-2922 (1992). Homodimeric antibodies with enhanced
anti-tumor activity may also be prepared using heterobifunctional
cross-linkers as described in Wolff et al., Cancer Research
53:2560-2565 (1993). Alternatively, an antibody can be engineered
which has dual Fc regions and may thereby have enhanced complement
lysis and ADCC capabilities. See Stevenson et al., Anti-Cancer Drug
Design 3:219-230 (1989).
[0390] To increase the serum half life of the antibody, one may
incorporate a salvage receptor binding epitope into the antibody
(especially an antibody fragment) as described in U.S. Pat. No.
5,739,277, for example. As used herein, the term "salvage receptor
binding epitope" refers to an epitope of the Fc region of an IgG
molecule (e.g., IgG.sub.1, IgG.sub.2, IgG.sub.3, or IgG.sub.4) that
is responsible for increasing the in vivo serum half-life of the
IgG molecule.
[0391] 11) Other Amino Acid Sequence Modifications
[0392] Amino acid sequence modification(s) of the antibodies
described herein are contemplated. For example, it may be desirable
to improve the binding affinity and/or other biological properties
of the antibody. Amino acid sequence variants of the antibody are
prepared by introducing appropriate nucleotide changes into the
antibody nucleic acid, or by peptide synthesis. Such modifications
include, for example, deletions from, and/or insertions into and/or
substitutions of, residues within the amino acid sequences of the
antibody. Any combination of deletion, insertion, and substitution
is made to arrive at the final construct, provided that the final
construct possesses the desired characteristics. The amino acid
changes also may alter post-translational processes of the
antibody, such as changing the number or position of glycosylation
sites.
[0393] A useful method for identification of certain residues or
regions of the antibody that are preferred locations for
mutagenesis is called "alanine scanning mutagenesis" as described
by Cunningham and Wells in Science, 244:1081-1085 (1989). Here, a
residue or group of target residues are identified (e.g., charged
residues such as arg, asp, his, lys, and glu) and replaced by a
neutral or negatively charged amino acid (most preferably alanine
or polyalanine) to affect the interaction of the amino acids
antigen. Those amino acid locations demonstrating functional
sensitivity to the substitutions then are refined by introducing
further or other variants at, or for, the sites of substitution.
Thus, while the site for introducing an amino acid sequence
variation is predetermined, the nature of the mutation per se need
not be predetermined. For example, to analyze the performance of a
mutation at a given site, ala scanning or random mutagenesis is
conducted at the target codon or region and the expressed antibody
variants are screened for the desired activity.
[0394] Amino acid sequence insertions include amino- and/or
carboxyl-terminal fusions ranging in length from one residue to
polypeptides containing a hundred or more residues, as well as
intrasequence insertions of single or multiple amino acid residues.
Examples of terminal insertions include an antibody with an
N-terminal methionyl residue or the antibody fused to a cytotoxic
polypeptide. Other insertional variants of the antibody molecule
include the fusion to the N- or C-terminus of the antibody to an
enzyme (e.g. for ADEPT) or a polypeptide which increases the serum
half-life of the antibody.
[0395] Another type of variant is an amino acid substitution
variant. These variants have at least one amino acid residue in the
antibody molecule replaced by a different residue. The sites of
greatest interest for substitutional mutagenesis include the
hypervariable regions, but FR alterations are also contemplated.
Conservative substitutions are shown in the Table A below under the
heading of "preferred substitutions". If such substitutions result
in a change in biological activity, then more substantial changes,
denominated "exemplary substitutions" in Table A, or as further
described below in reference to amino acid classes, may be
introduced and the products screened.
TABLE-US-00019 TABLE A Amino Acid Substitutions Original Exemplary
Preferred Residue Substitutions Substitutions Ala (A) val; leu; ile
val Arg (R) lys; gln; asn lys Asn (N) gln; his; asp, lys; arg gln
Asp (D) glu; asn glu Cys (C) ser; ala ser Gln (Q) asn; glu asn Glu
(E) asp; gln asp Gly (G) ala ala His (H) asn; gln; lys; arg arg Ile
(I) leu; val; met; ala; phe; norleucine leu Leu (L) norleucine;
ile; val; met; ala; phe ile Lys (K) arg; gln; asn arg Met (M) leu;
phe; ile leu Phe (F) leu; val; ile; ala; tyr tyr Pro (P) Ala ala
Ser (S) Thr thr Thr (T) Ser ser Trp (W) tyr; phe tyr Tyr (Y) trp;
phe; thr; ser phe Val (V) ile; leu; met; phe; ala; norleucine
leu
[0396] Substantial modifications in the biological properties of
the antibody are accomplished by selecting substitutions that
differ significantly in their effect on maintaining (a) the
structure of the polypeptide backbone in the area of the
substitution, for example, as a sheet or helical conformation, (b)
the charge or hydrophobicity of the molecule at the target site, or
(c) the bulk of the side chain. Naturally occurring residues are
divided into groups based on common side-chain properties:
[0397] (1) hydrophobic: norleucine, met, ala, val, leu, ile;
[0398] (2) neutral hydrophilic: cys, ser, thr;
[0399] (3) acidic: asp, glu;
[0400] (4) basic: asn, gln, his, lys, arg;
[0401] (5) residues that influence chain orientation: gly, pro;
and
[0402] (6) aromatic: trp, tyr, phe.
[0403] Non-conservative substitutions will entail exchanging a
member of one of these classes for another class.
[0404] Any cysteine residue not involved in maintaining the proper
conformation of the antibody also may be substituted, generally
with serine, to improve the oxidative stability of the molecule and
prevent aberrant crosslinking. Conversely, cysteine bond(s) may be
added to the antibody to improve its stability (particularly where
the antibody is an antibody fragment such as an Fv fragment).
[0405] A particularly preferred type of substitutional variant
involves substituting one or more hypervariable region residues of
a parent antibody (e.g. a humanized or human antibody). Generally,
the resulting variant(s) selected for further development will have
improved biological properties relative to the parent antibody from
which they are generated. A convenient way for generating such
substitutional variants involves affinity maturation using phage
display. Briefly, several hypervariable region sites (e.g. 6-7
sites) are mutated to generate all possible amino substitutions at
each site. The antibody variants thus generated are displayed in a
monovalent fashion from filamentous phage particles as fusions to
the gene III product of M13 packaged within each particle. The
phage-displayed variants are then screened for their biological
activity (e.g. binding affinity) as herein disclosed. In order to
identify candidate hypervariable region sites for modification,
alanine scanning mutagenesis can be performed to identify
hypervariable region residues contributing significantly to antigen
binding. Alternatively, or additionally, it may be beneficial to
analyze a crystal structure of the antigen-antibody complex to
identify contact points between the antibody and its target (e.g.,
PD-L1, B7.1). Such contact residues and neighboring residues are
candidates for substitution according to the techniques elaborated
herein. Once such variants are generated, the panel of variants is
subjected to screening as described herein and antibodies with
superior properties in one or more relevant assays may be selected
for further development.
[0406] Another type of amino acid variant of the antibody alters
the original glycosylation pattern of the antibody. By altering is
meant deleting one or more carbohydrate moieties found in the
antibody, and/or adding one or more glycosylation sites that are
not present in the antibody.
[0407] Glycosylation of antibodies is typically either N-linked or
O-linked. N-linked refers to the attachment of the carbohydrate
moiety to the side chain of an asparagine residue. The tripeptide
sequences asparagine-X-serine and asparagine-X-threonine, where X
is any amino acid except proline, are the recognition sequences for
enzymatic attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the asparagine
side chain Thus, the presence of either of these tripeptide
sequences in a polypeptide creates a potential glycosylation site.
O-linked glycosylation refers to the attachment of one of the
sugars N-aceylgalactosamine, galactose, or xylose to a hydroxyamino
acid, most commonly serine or threonine, although 5-hydroxyproline
or 5-hydroxylysine may also be used.
[0408] Addition of glycosylation sites to the antibody is
conveniently accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence such
that it contains one or more of the above-described tripeptide
sequences (for N-linked glycosylation sites). The alteration may
also be made by the addition of, or substitution by, one or more
serine or threonine residues to the sequence of the original
antibody (for O-linked glycosylation sites).
[0409] Nucleic acid molecules encoding amino acid sequence variants
to the antibodies of the invention are prepared by a variety of
methods known in the art. These methods include, but are not
limited to, isolation from a natural source (in the case of
naturally occurring amino acid sequence variants) or preparation by
oligonucleotide-mediated (or site-directed) mutagenesis, PCR
mutagenesis, and cassette mutagenesis of an earlier prepared
variant or a non-variant versions.
[0410] 12) Other Antibody Modifications
[0411] The antibodies of the present invention can be further
modified to contain additional nonproteinaceous moieties that are
known in the art and readily available. Preferably, the moieties
suitable for derivatization of the antibody are water-soluble
polymers. Non-limiting examples of water-soluble polymers include,
but are not limited to, polyethylene glycol (PEG), copolymers of
ethylene glycol/propylene glycol, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran,
polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, poly-1, 3-dioxolane,
poly-1,3,6-trioxane, ethylene/maleic anhydride copolymer,
polyaminoacids (either homopolymers or random copolymers), and
dextran or poly(n-vinyl pyrrolidone)polyethylene glycol,
polypropylene glycol homopolymers, polypropylene oxide/ethylene
oxide co-polymers, polyoxyethylated polyols (e.g., glycerol),
polyvinyl alcohol, and mixtures thereof. Polyethylene glycol
propionaldehyde may have advantages in manufacturing due to its
stability in water. The polymer may be of any molecular weight, and
may be branched or unbranched. The number of polymers attached to
the antibody may vary, and if more than one polymer is attached,
they can be the same or different molecules. In general, the number
and/or type of polymers used for derivatization can be determined
based on considerations including, but not limited to, the
particular properties or functions of the antibody to be improved,
whether the antibody derivative will be used in a therapy under
defined conditions, etc. Such techniques and other suitable
formulations are disclosed in Remington: The Science and Practice
of Pharmacy, 20th Ed., Alfonso Gennaro, Ed., Philadelphia College
of Pharmacy and Science (2000).
[0412] D. Pharmaceutical Formulations
[0413] Therapeutic formulations are prepared for storage by mixing
the active ingredient having the desired degree of purity with
optional pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients or
stabilizers (Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th
Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wiklins, Pub., Gennaro Ed.,
Philadelphia, Pa. 2000). Acceptable carriers, excipients, or
stabilizers are nontoxic to recipients at the dosages and
concentrations employed, and include buffers, antioxidants
including ascorbic acid, methionine, Vitamin E, sodium
metabisulfite; preservatives, isotonicifiers, stabilizers, metal
complexes (e.g. Zn-protein complexes); chelating agents such as
EDTA and/or non-ionic surfactants.
[0414] When the therapeutic agent is an antibody fragment, the
smallest inhibitory fragment which specifically binds to the
binding domain of the target protein is preferred. For example,
based upon the variable region sequences of an antibody, antibody
fragments or even peptide molecules can be designed which retain
the ability to bind the target protein sequence. Such peptides can
be synthesized chemically and/or produced by recombinant DNA
technology (see, e.g., Marasco et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA
90: 7889-7893 [1993]).
[0415] Buffers are used to control the pH in a range which
optimizes the therapeutic effectiveness, especially if stability is
pH dependent. Buffers are preferably present at concentrations
ranging from about 50 mM to about 250 mM. Suitable buffering agents
for use with the present invention include both organic and
inorganic acids and salts thereof. For example, citrate, phosphate,
succinate, tartrate, fumarate, gluconate, oxalate, lactate,
acetate. Additionally, buffers may be comprised of histidine and
trimethylamine salts such as Tris.
[0416] Preservatives are added to retard microbial growth, and are
typically present in a range from 0.2%-1.0% (w/v). Suitable
preservatives for use with the present invention include
octadecyldimethylbenzyl ammonium chloride; hexamethonium chloride;
benzalkonium halides (e.g., chloride, bromide, iodide),
benzethonium chloride; thimerosal, phenol, butyl or benzyl alcohol;
alkyl parabens such as methyl or propyl paraben; catechol;
resorcinol; cyclohexanol, 3-pentanol, and m-cresol.
[0417] Tonicity agents, sometimes known as "stabilizers" are
present to adjust or maintain the tonicity of liquid in a
composition. When used with large, charged biomolecules such as
proteins and antibodies, they are often termed "stabilizers"
because they can interact with the charged groups of the amino acid
side chains, thereby lessening the potential for inter and
intra-molecular interactions. Tonicity agents can be present in any
amount between 0.1% to 25% by weight, preferably 1 to 5%, taking
into account the relative amounts of the other ingredients.
Preferred tonicity agents include polyhydric sugar alcohols,
preferably trihydric or higher sugar alcohols, such as glycerin,
erythritol, arabitol, xylitol, sorbitol and mannitol.
[0418] Additional excipients include agents which can serve as one
or more of the following: (1) bulking agents, (2) solubility
enhancers, (3) stabilizers and (4) and agents preventing
denaturation or adherence to the container wall. Such excipients
include: polyhydric sugar alcohols (enumerated above); amino acids
such as alanine, glycine, glutamine, asparagine, histidine,
arginine, lysine, ornithine, leucine, 2-phenylalanine, glutamic
acid, threonine, etc.; organic sugars or sugar alcohols such as
sucrose, lactose, lactitol, trehalose, stachyose, mannose, sorbose,
xylose, ribose, ribitol, myoinisitose, myoinisitol, galactose,
galactitol, glycerol, cyclitols (e.g., inositol), polyethylene
glycol; sulfur containing reducing agents, such as urea,
glutathione, thioctic acid, sodium thioglycolate, thioglycerol,
.alpha.-monothioglycerol and sodium thio sulfate; low molecular
weight proteins such as human serum albumin, bovine serum albumin,
gelatin or other immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as
polyvinylpyrrolidone; monosaccharides (e.g., xylose, mannose,
fructose, glucose; disaccharides (e.g., lactose, maltose, sucrose);
trisaccharides such as raffinose; and polysaccharides such as
dextrin or dextran.
[0419] Non-ionic surfactants or detergents (also known as "wetting
agents") are present to help solubilize the therapeutic agent as
well as to protect the therapeutic protein against
agitation-induced aggregation, which also permits the formulation
to be exposed to shear surface stress without causing denaturation
of the active therapeutic protein or antibody. Non-ionic
surfactants are present in a range of about 0.05 mg/ml to about 1.0
mg/ml, preferably about 0.07 mg/ml to about 0.2 mg/ml.
[0420] Suitable non-ionic surfactants include polysorbates (20, 40,
60, 65, 80, etc.), polyoxamers (184, 188, etc.), PLURONIC.RTM.
polyols, TRITON.RTM., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoethers
(TWEEN.RTM.-20, TWEEN.RTM.-80, etc.), lauromacrogol 400, polyoxyl
40 stearate, polyoxyethylene hydrogenated castor oil 10, 50 and 60,
glycerol monostearate, sucrose fatty acid ester, methyl celluose
and carboxymethyl cellulose. Anionic detergents that can be used
include sodium lauryl sulfate, dioctyle sodium sulfosuccinate and
dioctyl sodium sulfonate. Cationic detergents include benzalkonium
chloride or benzethonium chloride.
[0421] In order for the formulations to be used for in vivo
administration, they must be sterile. The formulation may be
rendered sterile by filtration through sterile filtration
membranes. The therapeutic compositions herein generally are placed
into a container having a sterile access port, for example, an
intravenous solution bag or vial having a stopper pierceable by a
hypodermic injection needle.
[0422] The route of administration is in accordance with known and
accepted methods, such as by single or multiple bolus or infusion
over a long period of time in a suitable manner, e.g., injection or
infusion by subcutaneous, intravenous, intraperitoneal,
intramuscular, intraarterial, intralesional or intraarticular
routes, topical administration, inhalation or by sustained release
or extended-release means.
[0423] The formulation herein may also contain more than one active
compound as necessary for the particular indication being treated,
preferably those with complementary activities that do not
adversely affect each other. Alternatively, or in addition, the
composition may comprise a cytotoxic agent, cytokine or growth
inhibitory agent. Such molecules are suitably present in
combination in amounts that are effective for the purpose
intended.
[0424] The active ingredients may also be entrapped in
microcapsules prepared, for example, by coascervation techniques or
by interfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethylcellulose
or gelatin-microcapsules and poly-(methylmethacylate)
microcapsules, respectively, in colloidal drug delivery systems
(for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions,
nano-particles and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions. Such
techniques are disclosed in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences
18th edition, supra.
[0425] Stability of the proteins and antibodies described herein
may be enhanced through the use of non-toxic "water-soluble
polyvalent metal salts". Examples include Ca.sup.2+, Mg.sup.2+,
Zn.sup.2+, Fe.sup.2+, Fe.sup.3+, Cu.sup.2+, Sn.sup.2+, Sn.sup.4+,
Al.sup.2+ and Al.sup.3+. Example anions that can form water soluble
salts with the above polyvalent metal cations include those formed
from inorganic acids and/or organic acids. Such water-soluble salts
have a solubility in water (at 20.degree. C.) of at least about 20
mg/ml, alternatively at least about 100 mg/ml, alternatively at
least about 200 mg/ml.
[0426] Suitable inorganic acids that can be used to form the "water
soluble polyvalent metal salts" include hydrochloric, acetic,
sulfuric, nitric, thiocyanic and phosphoric acid. Suitable organic
acids that can be used include aliphatic carboxylic acid and
aromatic acids. Aliphatic acids within this definition may be
defined as saturated or unsaturated C.sub.2-9 carboxylic acids
(e.g., aliphatic mono-, di- and tri-carboxylic acids). For example,
exemplary monocarboxylic acids within this definition include the
saturated C.sub.2-9 monocarboxylic acids acetic, proprionic,
butyric, valeric, caproic, enanthic, caprylic pelargonic and
capryonic, and the unsaturated C.sub.2-9 monocarboxylic acids
acrylic, propriolic methacrylic, crotonic and isocrotonic acids.
Exemplary dicarboxylic acids include the saturated C.sub.2-9
dicarboxylic acids malonic, succinic, glutaric, adipic and pimelic,
while unsaturated C.sub.2-9 dicarboxylic acids include maleic,
fumaric, citraconic and mesaconic acids. Exemplary tricarboxylic
acids include the saturated C.sub.2-9 tricarboxylic acids
tricarballylic and 1,2,3-butanetricarboxylic acid. Additionally,
the carboxylic acids of this definition may also contain one or two
hydroxyl groups to form hydroxy carboxylic acids. Exemplary hydroxy
carboxylic acids include glycolic, lactic, glyceric, tartronic,
malic, tartaric and citric acid. Aromatic acids within this
definition include benzoic and salicylic acid.
[0427] Commonly employed water soluble polyvalent metal salts which
may be used to help stabilize the encapsulated polypeptides of this
invention include, for example: (1) the inorganic acid metal salts
of halides (e.g., zinc chloride, calcium chloride), sulfates,
nitrates, phosphates and thiocyanates; (2) the aliphatic carboxylic
acid metal salts (e.g., calcium acetate, zinc acetate, calcium
proprionate, zinc glycolate, calcium lactate, zinc lactate and zinc
tartrate); and (3) the aromatic carboxylic acid metal salts of
benzoates (e.g., zinc benzoate) and salicylates.
[0428] E. Methods of Treatment:
[0429] For the prevention or treatment of disease, the appropriate
dosage of an active agent, will depend on the type of disease to be
treated, as defined above, the severity and course of the disease,
whether the agent is administered for preventive or therapeutic
purposes, previous therapy, the patient's clinical history and
response to the agent, and the discretion of the attending
physician. The agent is suitably administered to the patient at one
time or over a series of treatments.
[0430] In a particular embodiment, the invention relates to
costimulation resulting from attenuating signaling through PD-1,
specifically by the application of PD-L1 antibodies that prevent
binding to PD-1 and/or B7.1, as well to the therapeutic treatment
of T-cell dysfunctional disorders.
[0431] 1. Infections
[0432] PD-1 and its ligands ("PD-1:PD-L") plays an important role
in regulating immune defenses against pathogens that cause acute
and chronic infections. PD-1:PD-L signaling plays a key role in
regulating the balance between an effective antimicrobial immune
defense and immune-mediated tissue damage. For example, while PD-1
knock-out mice clear adenovirus infection more rapidly than their
wild type counterparts, they develop more severe hepatocellular
injury. Iwai et al., J. Exp. Med. 198: 39-50 (2003). In a mouse
model of herpes stromal keratitis, blocking anti-PD-L1 antibody
exacerbated keratitis, increasing HSV-1 specific effector CD4 T
cell expansion and IFN-.gamma. production and survival. Jun et al.,
FEBS Lett. 579: 6259-64 (2005).
[0433] Microorganisms that cause chronic infection have exploited
the PD-1:PD-L signaling pathway to evade the host immune responses
that results in chronic infections. Viruses that cause chronic
infection can render virus-specific T cells non-functional and
thereby silence the antiviral T cell response. Barber et al.,
Nature 439: 682-87 (2006); Wherry et al., J. Virol. 78: 5535-45
(2004). Exhaustion of T cells or anergy, of CD8.sup.+ T cells is an
important reason for ineffective viral control during chronic
infections and is characteristic of chronic LCMV infections in mice
as well as HIV, HBV, HCV and HTLV infection in human and SIV
infection in primates. There appears to be a hierarchical,
progressive loss of function within the phenotype of exhausted
virus-specific CD8.sup.+ T cells, with cytotoxicity and IL-2
production lost first, followed by effector cytokine
production.
[0434] PD-1 is upregulated upon activation, and expression is
maintained at a high level by exhausted CD8.sup.+ T cells in mice
with LCMV chronic infection. Barber et al., supra. Administration
of antibodies that blocked PD-1: PD-L1 binding resulted in enhanced
T cell responses and a substantial reduction in viral burden. In
persistently infected mice with ineffective CD4.sup.+ T.sub.H
response, blockade of PD-1:PD-L1 restored CD8.sup.+ T cells from an
dysfunctional state resulting in proliferation, secretion of
cytokines, killing of infected cells, and decreased viral load,
strongly suggesting a therapeutic approach for the treatment of
chronic viral infections.
[0435] As a result of the role of PD-1:PD-L in LCMV, strong
interest has been shown in targeting this pathway to the treatment
of chronic infection in humans. PD-1 expression is high on
HIV-specific [Petrovas et al., J. Exp. Med. 203: 2281-92 (2006);
Day et al., Nature 443: 350-54 (2006); Traumann et al., Nat. Med.
12: 1198-202 (2006)], HBV-specific [Boettler et al., J. Virol. 80:
3532-40 (2006); Boni et al., J. Virol. 81: 4215-25 (2007)], and
HCV-specific T cells [Urbani et al., J. Virol. 80: 11398-403
(2006)]. PD-L1 is also upregulated on peripheral blood CD14.sup.+
monocytes and myeloid DC's in patients with chronic HBV infection
[Chen et al., J. Immunol. 178: 6634-41 (2007); Geng et al., J.
Viral Hepat. 13: 725-33 (2006)], and on CD14+ cells and T cells in
HIV patients [Trabattoni et al., Blood 101: 2514-20 (2003)].
Blocking PD-1:PD-L1 interactions in vitro reverses the exhaustion
of HIV-specific, HBV-specific, HCV-specific and SIV-specific CD8+
and CD4+ T cells and restores proliferation and cytokine
production. Petrovas et al., J. Exp. Med. 203: 2281-92 (2006); Day
et al., supra; Trautmann et al., supra; Boni et al., supra; Urbani
et al., supra; Velu et al., J. Virol. 81: 5819-28 (2007).
[0436] The degree of PD-1 expression may also be a useful
diagnostic marker on virus-specific CD8.sup.+ T cells to indicate
the degree of T cell exhaustion and disease severity. The level of
PD-1 expression on HIV-specific CD8.sup.+ T cells correlates with
viral load, declining CD4.sup.+ counts, and decreased capacity of
CD8.sup.+ T cells to prolifeate in response to HIV antigen in
vitro. Corresponding to in vivo observations, there is a direct
correlation between PD-1 expression on HIV-specific CD4.sup.+ T
cells and viral load. D'Souza et al., J. Immunol. 179: 1979-87
(2007). Long-term nonprogressors have functional HIV-specific
memory CD8.sup.+ T cells with markedly lower PD-1 expression, in
contrast to typical progressors who express significantly
upregulated PD-1, which correlates with reduced CD4+ T cell number,
decreased CD4.sup.+ T cell number, decreased HIV-specific effector
memory CD8.sup.+ T cell function, and elevated plasma viral load.
Zhang et al., Blood 109: 4671-78 (2007).
[0437] The PD-1:PD-L pathway has also been implicated in the
chronicity of bacterial infections. Helicobacter pylori causes
chronic gastritis and gastroduodenal ulcers and is a risk factor
for the development of gastric cancer. During a H. pylori
infection, T cell responses are insufficient to clear infection,
leading to persistent infection. Following exposure to H. pylori in
vitro or in vivo, PD-L1 is upregulated on gastric epithelial cells.
Gastric epithelial cells express MHC class II molecules and are
thought to play in important APC function during H. pylori
infection. Anti-PD-L1 antibodies that block PD-1 to PD-L1
interaction enhance T cell proliferation and IL-2 production in
cultures of gastric epithelial cells explosed to H. pylori and CD4
T cells. Blocking PD-L1 with either antibodies or siRNA prevented
the generation of the regulatory T cells, suggesting that PD-L1 may
promote T cell suppression and persisting infections by controling
the dynamic between regulatory and effector T cells during H.
pylori infection. Beswick et al., Infect. Immun. 75: 4334-41
(2007).
[0438] Parasitic worms have also exploited the PD-1:PD-L1 pathway
to induce macrophages that suppress the immune response. During
Taenia crassiceps (i.e., tapeworm) infections in mice, PD-1 and
PD-L2 are upregulated on activated macrophages, and CD4+ T cells
express PD-1. Blockade of PD-1, PD-L1 or PD-L2 significantly
decreased suppression of in vitro T cell proliferation by
macrophages from tapeworm infected mice. Terrazas et al., Int. J.
Parasitol. 35: 1349-58 (2005). During Shistosoma mansoni infection
in mice, macrophages express high levels of PD-L1 and more modest
levels of PD-L2. Anti-PD-L1 removed the ability of these
macrophages to suppress T cell proliferation in vitro, whereas
anti-PD-L2 had no effect. PD-L1 expression on macrophages from
infected mice declines after 12 weeks of infection, correlating
with a break in T cell anergy. Smith et al., J. Immunol. 173:
1240-48 (2004).
[0439] 2. Tumor Immunity
[0440] Empirical evidence for tumor immunity includes (i) the
observance of spontaneous remission, (ii) the presence of
detectable, but ineffective host immune response to tumors, (iii)
the increased prevalence of primary and secondary malignancies in
immunodeficient patients, (iv) the detection of increased levels of
antibodies and T-lymphocytes in tumor patients, and (v) the
observation that test animals can be immunized against various
types of tumors.
[0441] Studies have shown that most human tumors express
tumor-associated antigens (TAAs) that can be recognized by T cells
and thus are potentially capable of inducing immune response. Boon
et al., Immunol. Today 16:334-336 (1995). Early phase clinical
trials have been initiated by vaccinating cancer patients with TAA
or professional antigen-presenting cells pulsed with TAA. Dudley et
al., Science 298: 850-854 (2002); Gajewski et al., Clin. Cancer
Res. 7: 895s-901s (2001); Marincola et al., Adv. Immunol. 74:
181-273 (2000); Peterson et al., J. Clin. Oncol. 21: 2342-2348
(2003). Induction of tumor antigen-specific CD8+ T cells has been
achieved in many of these trials. Mackensen et al., Eur. Cytokine
Netw 10: 329-336 (1999); Peterson et al., supra. Adoptive transfer
of tumor antigen-specific T cells into patients also has been
pursued and has revealed homing of the expanded cytotoxic T
lymphocytes (CTLs) to tumor sites. Meidenbauer et al., J. Immunol.
170: 2161-2169 (2003). However, despite tumor infiltration of
immune effector cells, tumor growth was seldom controlled.
[0442] It is well established that the tumor microenvironment can
protect tumor cells from immune destruction. Ganss et al., Cancer
Res. 58: 4673-4681 (1998); Singh et al., J. Exp. Med. 175: 139-146
(1992). Soluble factors, as well as membrane-bound molecules
including transforming growth factor .beta. (TGF-.beta.),
interleukin (IL)-10, prostaglandin E.sub.2, FASL, CTLA-4 ligands,
tumor necrosis factor-related apoptosis-inducing ligand (TRAIL),
and programmed death receptor ligand 1 (PD-L1, aka B7-H1) have been
found to be expressed by tumors and are believed to mediate immune
evasion. Thus, blockade of this negative immune regulatory signals
on tumor cells is a promising approach to enhance tumor-specific
CD8+ T-cell immunity in vivo.
[0443] PD-L1 expression on many tumors is a component to this
suppression and may act in concert with other immunosuppressive
signals. PD-L1 negatively regulates T-cell receptor signaling.
PD-L1 expression has been shown in situ on a wide varity of solid
tumors, including breast, lung, colon, ovarian, melanoma, bladder,
liver, salivary, stomach, gliomas, thyroid, thymic, epithelian,
head and neck cancers. Brown et al., J. Immunol. 170: 1257-66
(2003); Dong et al., Nat. Med. 8: 793-800 (2002); Hamanishi et al.,
PNAS 104: 3360-65 (2007); Strome et al., Cancer Res. 63: 6501-5
(2003); Inman et al., Cancer 109: 1499-505 (2007); Konishi et al.,
Clin. Cancer Res. 10: 5094-100 (2004); Nakanishi et al., Cancer
Immunol. Immunother. 56: 1173-82 (2007); Nomi et al., Clin. Cancer
Res. 13: 2151-57 (2004); Thompson et al., PNAS 101: 17174-79
(2004); Wu et al., Acta Histochem. 108: 19-24 (2006).
[0444] Immunological staining also reveals the expression of
PD-1:PD-L expression on various cancers.
[0445] Interestingly, cancer has also been characterized as a
chronic inflammatory disease. Coussens et al., Nature 420: 860-867
(2002). While up to 15% of cancers worldwide have a direct
infectious origin [Kuper et al., J. Intern. Med. 248: 171-183
(2000)], many human tumors are related to chronic irritation and
inflammation. Zou et al., Ntu. Rev. Cancer 5: 263-274 (2005).
[0446] Studies relating to PD-L1 expression on tumors to disease
outcome show that PD-L1 expression strongly correlates with
unfavorable prognosis in kidney, ovarian, bladder, breast, gastric,
and pancreatic cancer, but perhaps not small cell lung cancer.
Hamanishi et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 104: 3360-65 (2007),
Inman et al., Cancer 109: 1499-505 (2007), Konishi et al., Clin.
Cancer Res. 10:5094-100 (2004); Nakanishi et al., Cancer Immunol.
Immunother. 56: 1173-82 (2007); Nomi et al., Clin. Cancer Res. 13:
2151-57 (2007); Thompson et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 101:
17174-79 (2004); Wu et al., Acta Histochem. 108: 19-24 (2006). In
addition, these studies suggest that higher levels of PD-L1
expression on tumors may facilitate advancement of tumor stage and
invasion into deeper tissue structures.
[0447] The PD-1:PD-L pathway may also play a role in hematologic
malignancies. PD-1 or PD-L1 are rarely expressed B cell
malignancies, but PD-L2 is overexpressed in mantle cell
malignancies. Brown et al., supra; Rosenwald et al., J. Exp. Med.
198: 851-62 (2003). PD-L1 is expressed on multiple myeloma cells,
but not on normal plasma cells. T cell expansion in response to
myeloma cells is enhanced in vitro by PD-L1 blockade. Liu et al.,
Blood 110: 296-304 (2007). PD-L1 is expressed on some primary T
cell lymphomas, particularly anaplastic large cell T lymphomas, and
PD-L1 is expressed on the associated follicular dendritic cell
network. Dorfman et al., Am. J. Surg. Pathol. 30: 802-10 (2006).
Microarray analysis further suggests that tumor-associated T cells
are responding to PD-1 signals in situ in Hodgkin lymphoma.
Chemnitz et al., Blood 110: 3226-33 (2007). PD-1 and PD-L1 are
expressed on CD4.sup.+ T cells in HTLV-1 mediated adult T cell
leukemia and lymphoma. Shimauchi et al., Int. J. Cancer 121:
2585-90 (2007). These tumor cells are hyporesponsive to TCR
signals, and PD-1 blockade increased their expression of
TNF-.alpha., but not IFN-.gamma.. Studies in animal models
demonstrate that PD-L1 expression on tumors inhibits T cell
activation and lysis of tumor cells and in some cases leads to
increased tumor-specific T cell death. Dong et al., Nat. Med. 8:
793-800 (2006); Hirano et al., Cancer Res. 65: 1089-96 (2005).
[0448] Thus, the suppression of signaling through PD-L1 with the
anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention, so as to enhance T cell
function, shows promise to attenuate tumor immunity, and as a
result, can be effective treatment for cancer.
[0449] F. Combination Therapies
[0450] The method of the invention can be combined with known
methods of treatment chronic infection or cancer, either as
combined or additional treatment steps or as additional components
of a therapeutic formulation.
[0451] 1. Cancer:
[0452] Enhancing the host's immune function to combat tumors is the
subject of increasing interest. Conventional methods include (i)
APC enchancement, such as (a) injection into the tumor of DNA
encoding foreign MHC alloantigens, or (b) transfecting biopsied
tumor cells with genes that increase the probability of immune
antigen recognition (e.g., immune stimulatory cytokines, GM-CSF,
co-stimulatory molecules B7.1, B7.2) of the tumor, (iii) adoptive
cellular immunotherapy, or treatment with activated tumor-specific
T-cells. Adoptive cellular immunotherapy includes isolating
tumor-infiltrating host T-lymphocytes, expanding the population in
vitro, such as through stimulation by IL-2 or tumor or both.
Additionally, isolated T-cells that are dysfunctional may be also
be activated by in vitro application of the anti-PD-L1 antibodies
of the invention. T-cells that are so-activated may then be
readministered to the host.
[0453] Traditional therapies for cancer include the following: (i)
radiation therapy (e.g., radiotherapy, X-ray therapy, irradiation)
or the use of ionizing radiation to kill cancer cells and shrink
tumors. Radiation therapy can be administered either externally via
external beam radiotherapy (EBRT) or internally via brachytherapy;
(ii) chemotherapy, or the application of cytotoxic drug which
generally affect rapidly dividing cells; (iii) targeted therapies,
or agents which specifically affect the deregulated proteins of
cancer cells (e.g., tyrosine kinase inhibitors imatinib, gefitinib;
monoclonal antibodies, photodynamic therapy); (iv) immunotherapy,
or enhancement of the host's immune response (e.g., vaccine); (v)
hormonal therapy, or blockade of hormone (e.g., when tumor is
hormone sensitive), (vi) angiogenesis inhibitor, or blockade of
blood vessel formation and growth, and (vii) palliative care, or
treatment directed to improving the quality of care to reduce pain,
nausea, vomiting, diarrhea and hemorrhage. Pain medication such as
morphine and oxycodone, anti-emetics such as ondansetron and
aprepitant, can permit more aggressive treatment regimens.
[0454] In the treatment of cancer, any of the previously described
conventional treatments for the treatment of cancer immunity may be
conducted, prior, subsequent or simultaneous with the
administration of the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention.
Additionally, the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention may be
adminstrered prior, subsequent or simultaneous with conventional
cancer treatments, such as the adminstration of tumor-binding
antibodies (e.g., monoclonal antibodies, toxin-conjugated
monoclonal antibodies) and/or the administration of
chemotherapeutic agents.
[0455] 2. Infection:
[0456] In the treatment of infection (e.g., acute and/or chronic),
administration of the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention can be
combined with conventional treatments in addition to or in lieu of
stimulating natural host immune defenses to infection. Natural host
immune defenses to infection include, but are not limited to
inflammation, fever, antibody-mediated host defense,
T-lymphocyte-mediated host defenses, including lymphokine secretion
and cytotoxic T-cells (especially during viral infection),
complement mediated lysis and opsonization (facilitated
phagocytosis), and phagocytosis. The ability of the anti-PD-L1
antibodies of the invention to reactivate dysfunctional T-cells
would be particularly useful to treat chronic infections, in
particular those in which cell-mediated immunity is critical for
complete recovery.
[0457] a. bacteria
[0458] For infections resulting from a bacterial infection, the
anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention may be combined by
administration simultaneous with, prior or subsequent to standard
therapies for treating bacterial infection. Bacterial infections
are most commonly treated today with antibacterial antibiotics, but
serum containing pathogen-specific antibodies from immunized hosts
can also be effective.
[0459] Bacteria that are pathogenic as a result of the secretion of
toxins, (toxogenic bacteria), vaccination with inactive toxin
and/or the administration of therapeutic agents that block the
toxicity of the toxins are usually effective (e.g., polyclonal
serum, antibodies, antibiotics etc.). These organisms include
Clostridium spp., bacillus spp., Corynebacterium spp., Vibrio
chloerae, Bordetella pertussis, Staphylococcus spp., Streptococcus
spp. Gram negative bacteria that also typically respond to such
traditional therapies include Enterobacteria (E.g., Escherichia,
Klebsiella, Proteus, Yersinia, Erwina), Salmonella, and Pseudomonas
aeruginosa. Encapsulated bacteria, which are resistant to
phagocytosis and opsonization, and thus often prevent a more
significant challenge to immune clearance include: Streptococcus
spp., Haemophilus spp. Neisseria spp., Klebsiella spp. and
Bacterioides fragillis.
[0460] Bacteria that evade host defenses by invading cells so as to
evade serum antibody and complement post a particular challenge.
The clearance of these infections is almost entirely dependent upon
T-lymphocyte mediated immunity, and are especially prone to
becoming chronic infections. Specific examples include Salmonella
(S. typhi, S. choleraesuis, S. enteritidis), Legionella spp.,
Listeria spp., Brucella spp. and Mycobacterium, including M.
tuberculosis, M. avium and M. leprae.
[0461] Spirochetes, including Treponema spp., Borrelia spp. and
Leptospira spp. are bacteria that cause persistent and latent
infections. Treponema palladium, the pathogen causing the disease
syphilis is a sexually transmitted disease which can have severe
pathological consequences if left untreated. The disease progresses
through distinct stages. The initial clinical stage is an ulcer or
chancre at the site treponemal inoculation. Following this is a
period of spirochetemia and metastatic distribution of
microorganisms that continues, including repeating cycles of
infection and resolution in a condition known as secondary
syphilis. Following the resolution of secondary syphilis, the
disease enters an asymptomatic latency period which may conclude in
tertiary syphilis, which is a serious and often fatal condition.
Tertiary syphilis may manifest in (i) the heart as aortisis with
aneurysis formation and secondary aortic value insufficiency, (ii)
central nervous system (tabes dorsalis, general paresis), (iii)
eyes (interstitial keratitis) or (iv) ears (nerve deafness).
Non-venereal forms resemble the clinical manifestations of the
venereal forms, but are transmitted primary by direct contact and
poor hygiene. They include yaws (T. pallidum subp. pertenue) pinta
(T. carateum) and bejel (T. pallidum subsp. endemicum).
[0462] Treatments for syphilis include penicillin (E.g., penicillin
G.), tetracycline, doxycycline, ceftriaxone and azithromycin. The
anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention would be most advantaneously
administered to treat the latent infection period.
[0463] Lyme disease, caused by Borrelia burgdorferi is transmitted
into humans through tick bites. The disease manifests initially as
a localized rash, followed by flu-like symptoms including malaise,
fever, headache, stiff neck and arthralgias. Later manifestations
can include migratory and polyarticular arthritis, neurologic and
cardiac involvement with cranial nerve palsies and radiculopathy,
myocarditis and arrhythmias. Some cases of Lyme disease become
persistent, resulting in irreversible damage analogous to tertiary
syphilis.
[0464] Current therapy for Lyme disease includes primarily the
administration of antibiotics. Antibiotic-resistent strains may be
treated with hydroxychloroquine or methotrexate. Antibiotic
refractory patients with neuropathic pain can be treated with
gabapentin. Minocycline may be helpful in late/chronic Lyme disease
with neurological or other inflammatory manifestations. The
anti-PD-L1 antibodies would be most advantaneously administered to
treat the latent infection period.
[0465] Other forms of borreliois, such as those resulting from B.
recurentis, B. hermsii, B. turicatae, B. parikeri., B. hispanica,
B. duttonii and B. persica, as well leptospirosis (E.g., L.
interrogans), typically resolve spontaneously unless blood titers
reach concentrations to cause intrahepatic obstruction.
[0466] b. virus
[0467] For infections resulting from viral causes, the anti-PD-L1
antibodies of the invention may be combined by application
simulatenous with, prior to or subsequent to application of
standard therapies for treating viral infections. Such standard
therapies vary depending upon type of virus, although in almost all
cases, adminstration of human serum containing antitibodies (e.g.,
IgA, IgG) specific to the virus can be effective.
[0468] 1) Influenza
[0469] Influenza infection results in fever, cough, myalgia,
headache and malaise, which often occur in seasonal epidemics
Influenza is also associated with a number of postinfectious
disorders, such as encephalitis, myopericarditis, Goodpasture's
syndrome, and Reye's syndrome Influenza infection also suppresses
normal pulmonary antibacterial defenses, such that patient's
recovering from influenza have an increased risk of developing
bacterial pneumonia.
[0470] Influenza viral surface proteins show marked antigenic
variation, resulting from mutation and recombination. Thus,
cytolytic T lymphocytes are the host's primary vehicle for the
elimination of virus after infection. Influenza is classified into
three primary types: A, B and C Influenza A is unique in that it
infects both humans and many other animals (e.g., pigs, horses,
birds and seals) and is the principal cause of pandemic influenza.
Also, when a cell is infected by two different influenza A strains,
the segmented RNA genomes of two parental virus types mix during
replication to create a hybrid replicant, resulting in new epidemic
strains. Influenza B does not replicate in animals and thus has
less genetic variation and influenza C has only a single
serotype.
[0471] Most conventional therapies are palliatives of the symptoms
resulting from infection, while the host's immune response actually
clears the disease. However, certain strains (e.g., influenza A)
can cause more serious illness and death. Influenza A may be
treated both clinically and prophylactically by the administration
of the cyclic amines inhibitors amantadine and rimantadine, which
inhibit viral replication. However, the clinical utility of these
drugs is limited due to the relatively high incidence of adverse
reactions, their narrow anti-viral spectrum (influenza A only), and
the propensity of the virus to become resistant. The administration
of serum IgG antibody to the major influenza surface proteins,
hemagglutinin and neuraminidase can prevent pulmonary infection,
whereas mucosal IgA is required to prevent infection of the upper
respiratory tract and trachea. The most effective current treatment
for influenza is vaccination with the administration of virus
inactivated with formalin or .beta.-propiolactone.
[0472] 2) Measles Virus
[0473] After an incubation of 9-11 days, hosts infected with the
measles virus develope fever, cough, coryza and conjunctivitis.
Within 1-2 days, an erythematous, maculopapular rash develop, which
quickly spreads over the entire body. Because infection also
suppresses cellular immunity, the host is at greater risk for
developing bacterial superinfections, including otitis media,
pneumonia and postinfectious encephalomyelitis. Acute infection is
associated with significant morbidity and mortality, especially in
malnourished adolescents.
[0474] Treatment for measles includes the passive administration of
pooled human IgG, which can prevent infection in non-immune
subjects, even if given up to one week after exposure. However,
prior immunization with live, attenuated virus is the most
effective treatment and prevents disease in more than 95% of those
immunized. As there is one serotype of this virus, a single
immunization or infection typically results in protection for life
from subsequent infection.
[0475] In a small proportion of infected hosts, measles can develop
into SSPE, which is a chronic progressive neurologic disorder
resulting from a persistent infection of the central nervous
system. SSPE is caused by clonal variants of measles virus with
defects that interfere with virion assembly and budding. For these
patients, reactivation of T-cells with the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of
the invention so as to facilitate viral clearance would be
desirable.
[0476] 3) Hepatitis B Virus
[0477] Hepatitis B virus (HB-V) is the most infectious known
bloodborne pathogen. It is a major cause of acute and chronic
heptatis and hepatic carcinoma, as well as life-long, chronic
infection. Following infection, the virus replicates in
hepatocytes, which also then shed the surface antigen HBsAg. The
detection of excessive levels of HBsAg in serum is used a standard
method for diagnosing a hepatitis B infection. An acute infection
may resolve or it can develop into a chronic persistent
infection.
[0478] Current treatments for chronic HBV include
.alpha.-interferon, which increases the expression of class I human
leukocyte antigen (HLA) on the surface of hepatocytes, thereby
facilitating their recognition by cytotoxic T lymphocytes.
Additionally, the nucleoside analogs ganciclovir, famciclovir and
lamivudine have also shown some efficacy in the treatment of HBV
infection in clinical trials. Additional treatments for HBV include
pegylated .alpha.-interferon, adenfovir, entecavir and telbivudine.
While passive immunity can be conferred through parental
administration of anti-HBsAg serum antibodies, vaccination with
inactivated or recombinant HBsAg also confers resistance to
infection. The anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention may be
combined with conventional treatments for hepatitis B infections
for therapeutic advantage.
[0479] 4) Hepatitis C Virus
[0480] Hepatitis C virus (HC-V) infection may lead to a chronic
form of hepatitis, resulting in cirrosis. While symptoms are
similar to infections resulting from Hepatitis B, in distinct
contrast to HB-V, infected hosts can be asymptomatic for 10-20
years. Treatment for HC-V infection includes the administration of
a combination of .alpha.-interferon and ribavirin. A promising
potential therapy for HC-V infection is the protease inhibitor
telaprevir (VX-960). Additional treatments include: anti-PD-1
antibody (MDX-1106, Medarex), bavituximab (an antibody that binds
anionic phospholipid phosphatidylserine in a B2-glycoprotein I
dependent manner, Peregrine Pharmaceuticals), anti-HPV viral coat
protein E2 antibod(y)(ies) (E.g., ATL 6865-Ab68+Ab65, XTL
Pharmaceuticals) and Civacir.RTM. (polyclonal anti-HCV human immune
globulin). The anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention may be
combined with one or more of these treatments for hepatitis C
infections for therapeutic advantage.
[0481] Protease, polymerase and NS5A inhibitors which may be used
in combination with the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention to
specifically treat Hepatitis C infection include the following
identified in Table B
TABLE-US-00020 TABLE B Hepatitis C protease and polymerase
inhibitors Type of inhibitor Inhibitor Name Manufacturer(s)
Protease R7227/ITMN 191 Roche/InterMune CTS-1027 Roche Biosciences
VX500, VX813, VX985 Vertex Telaprevir (VX950) Vertex/Tibotec
TMC435350/TMC 435 Medivir/Tibotec Boceprevir (SCH503034),
Schering-Plough Narlaprevir (SCH900518/SP900518) BI201335, BILN
2061 Boehringer Ingelheim MK7009 Merck IDX-136, IDX-316 Idenix
BMS-790052, BMS-791325 Bristol Myers Squibb PHX-1766 Phenomix
ACH-806 Achillion/Gilead ACH-1625 Achillion ABT-450 Abbott Labs VBY
376 Virobay Polymerase R1626 Roche Inhibitors R7128
Roche/Pharmasset NM283 Idenix HCV796 Wyeth BILB 1941, BI-207127
Boehringer Ingelheim GL60667, GS9190 Gilead PF-00868554 Pfizer
VCH757, VCH916 Virochem VX222, VX759 Vertex MK-3281 Merck ANA598
Anadys IDX184, IDX375 Idenix PSI-7851 Pharmasset ABT-072, ABT-333
Abbott Labs BMS650032 Bristol Myers Squibb NS5A BMS790052,
BMX824393 Bristol Myers Squibb Inhibitors AZD 2836, AZD 7295 Arrow
Therapeutics GSK 625433 Glaxo Smith Kline
[0482] 5) Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV)
[0483] HIV attacks CD4+ cells, including T-lymphocytes,
monocyte-macrophages, follicular dendritic cells and Langerhan's
cells, and CD4+ helper/inducer cells are depleted. As a result, the
host acquires a severe defect in cell-mediated immunity. Infection
with HIV results in AIDS in at least 50% of individuals, and is
transmitted via sexual contact, administration of infected blood or
blood products, artificial insemination with infected semen,
exposure to blood-containing needles or syringes and transmission
from an infected mother to infant during childbirth.
[0484] A host infected with HIV may be asymptomatic, or may develop
an acute illness that resembling mononucleosis--fever, headache,
sore throat, malaise and rash. Symptoms can progress to progressive
immune dysfunction, including persistent fever, night sweats,
weight loss, unexplained diarrhea, eczema, psoriasis, seborrheic
dermatitis, herpes zoster, oral candidiasis and oral hairy
leukoplakia. Opportunistic infections by a host of parasites are
common in patients whose infections develop into AIDS.
[0485] Treatments for HIV include antiviral therapies including
nucleoside analogs, zidovudine (AST) either alone or in combination
with didanosine or zalcitabine, dideoxyinosine, dideoxycytidine,
lamidvudine, stavudine; reverse transcriptive inhibitors such as
delavirdine, nevirapine, loviride, and proteinase inhibitors such
as saquinavir, ritonavir, indinavir and nelfinavir. The anti-PD-L1
antibodies of the invention may be combined with conventional
treatments for HIV infections for therapeutic advantage.
[0486] 6) Cytomegalovirus
[0487] Cytomegalovirus (CMV) infection is often associated with
persistent, latent and recurrent infection. CMV infects and remains
latent in monocytes and granulocyte-monocyte progenitor cells. The
clinical symptoms of CMV include mononucleosis-like symptoms (i.e.,
fever, swollen glands, malaise), and a tendancy to develop allergic
skin rashes to antibiotics. The virus is spread by direct contact.
The virus is shed in the urine, saliva, semen and to a lesser
extent in other body fluids. Transmission can also occur from an
infected mother to her fetus or newborn and by blood transfusion
and organ transplants. CMV infection results in general impairment
of cellular immunity, characterized by impaired blastogenic
responses to nonspecific mitogens and specific CMV antigens,
diminished cytotoxic ability and elevation of CD8 lymphocyte number
of CD4+ lymphocytes.
[0488] Treatments of CMV infection include the anti-virals
ganciclovir, foscarnet and cidovir, but these druges are typically
only prescribed in immunocompromised patients. The anti-PD-L1
antibodies of the invention may be combined with conventional
treatments for cytomegalovirus infections for therapeutic
advantage.
[0489] 7) Epstein-Barr Virus
[0490] Epstein-Barr virus (EBV) can establish persistent and latent
infections and primarily attacks B cells. Infection with EBV
results in the clinical condition of infectious mononucleosis,
which includes fever, sore throat, often with exudate, generalized
lymphadenopathy and splenomegaly. Hepatitis is also present, which
can develop into jaundice.
[0491] While typical treatments for EBV infections are palliative
of symptoms, EBV is associated with the development of certain
cancers such as Burkitt's lymphoma and nasopharyngeal cancer. Thus,
clearance of viral infection before these complications result
would be of great benefit. The anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the
invention may be combined with conventional treatments for
Epstein-Barr virus infections for therapeutic advantage.
[0492] 8) Herpes Virus
[0493] Herpes simplex virus (HSV) is transmitted by direct contact
with an infected host. A direct infection may be asymptomatic, but
typically result in blisters containing infectious particles. The
disease manifests as cycles of active periods of disease, in which
lesions appear and disappear as the viral latently infect the nerve
ganglion for subsequent outbreaks. Lesions may be on the face,
genitals, eyes and/or hands. In some case, an infection can also
cause encephalitis.
[0494] Treatments for herpes infections are directed primarily to
resolving the symptomatic outbreaks, and include systemic antiviral
medicines such as: acyclovir (e.g., Zovirax.RTM.), valaciclovir,
famciclovir, penciclovir, and topical medications such as docosanol
(Abreva.RTM.), tromantadine and zilactin. The clearance of latent
infections of herpes would be of great clinical benefit. The
anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention may be combined with
conventional treatments for herpes virus infections for therapeutic
advantage.
[0495] 9) HTLV
[0496] Human T-lymphotrophic virus (HTLV-1, HTLV-2) is transmitted
via sexual contact, breast feeding or exposure to contaminated
blood. The virus activates a subset of T.sub.H cells called Th1
cells, resulting in their over proliferation and overproduction of
Th1 related cytokines (e.g., IFN-.gamma. and TNF-.alpha.). This in
turn results in a suppression of Th2 lymphocytes and reduction of
Th2 cytokine production (e.g., IL-4, IL-5, IL-10 and IL-13),
causing a reduction in the ability of an infected host to mount an
adequate immune response to invading organisms requiring a
Th2-dependent response for clearnance (e.g., parasitic infections,
production of mucosal and humoral antibodies).
[0497] HTLV infections cause lead to opportunistic infections
resulting in bronchiectasis, dermatitis and superinfections with
Staphylococcus spp. and Strongyloides spp. resulting in death from
polymicrobial sepsis. HTLV infection can also lead directly to
adult T-cell leukemia/lymphoma and progressive demyelinating upper
motor neuron disease known as HAM/TSP. The clearance of HTLV latent
infections would be of great clinical benefit. The anti-PD-L1
antibodies of the invention may be combined with conventional
treatments for HTLV infections for therapeutic advantage.
[0498] 10) HPV
[0499] Human papilloma virus (HPV) primarily affects keratinocytes
and occurs in two forms: cutaneous and genital. Transmission it
believed to occurs through direct contact and/or sexual activity.
Both cutaneous and genital HPV infection, can result in warts and
latent infections and sometimes recurring infections, which are
controlled by host immunity which controls the symptoms and blocks
the appearance of warts, but leaves the host capable of
transmitting the infection to others.
[0500] Infection with HPV can also lead to certain cancers, such as
cervical, anal, vulvar, penile and oropharynial cancer. There are
no known cures for HPV infection, but current treatment is topical
application of Imiquimod, which stimulates the immune system to
attack the affected area. The clearance of HPV latent infections
would be of great clinical benefit. The anti-PD-L1 antibodies of
the invention may be combined with conventional treatments for HPV
infections for therapeutic advantage.
[0501] c. Fungus
[0502] Fungal infections, or mycoses, can result as either a
primary infection or as opportunistic colonization of hosts with
compromised immune systems by endogenous flora. Immunity to mycoses
is principally cellular, involving neutrophils, macrophages,
lymphocytes and probably natural killer (NK) cells. Mycoses are
typically not susceptible to direct killing by antibody and
complement. Systemic invasive mycoses resulting from primary
infection include blastomycosis, coccidioiodomycosis,
histoplamosis, and paracoccidioiodmycosis. For chronic infections
results from fungal infections, the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the
invention may be administered prior to simultaneous with or
subsequent to any of the conventionally known treatments for these
mycoses.
[0503] Blastomycosis, caused by Blastomyces dermatitis is
inhalation-acquired and produces a primary pulmonary infection or
hematogenously disseminated disease involving predominantly skin,
bones, and the male genitourinary tract. Primary exposure may be
asymptomatic, or it may produce an influenza-like syndrome. This
disease can manifest in a chronic indolent form. The disease is
also associated with compromised immune such as in patients with
AIDS. Conventional therapy for B. dermatitis infection include
itraconazole, ketoconazole or intravenous injection of amphotericin
B.
[0504] Coccidioiodmycosis, caused by Coccidioides immitis, is
inhalation-acquired and can cause primary pulmonary infection,
progressive pulmonary disease, or hematogenously disseminated
disease involving predominantly skin, subcutaneous tissues, bones,
joints, and meninges. Primary exposure may be asymptomatic (60%) or
associated with an influenza-like syndrome. Pneumonia, pleuritis,
and pulmonary cavitation may occur. Metastatic manisfestations
include skin lesions, including nodules, ulcers, sinus tracts from
deeper loci and verrucouse granulomas, bones, joints, tendon
sheaths and meninges, including meningitis. The disease is also
associated with compromised immunity such as in patients with AIDS.
Treatment for coccidioidiomycosis includes ketoconazole,
intraconazole and fluconazole, especially for long-term maintenance
therapy of nonmeningial disease. Meningial forms are treated
usually with intrathecal administration of Amphotericin B.
[0505] Histoplasmosis, caused by Histoplasma capsulatum, is an
inhalation-acquired disease of the reticuloendothelial system in
which tiny yeasts reside in macrophages. It can produce primary
pulmonary infection, progressive pulmonary disease or
hematogenously disseminated disease involving predominantly the
reticuloendothelial system, mucosal surfaces, and adrenal glands.
Reactivation of latent infections often occur in patients with
compromised immunity, such as in patients with AIDS. Primary
exposure may be asymptomatic or associated with a flu-like
syndrome, including pneumonia, pleuritis, pulmonary cavitation and
mediastinal adenopathy. Metastatic sites include the
reticuloendothelial system (hepatosplenomegaly, lymphadenopathy,
anemia, leucopenia and thrombocytopenia), mucous membranes
(oronasopharnygeal ulcerations), gastrointestinal tract
(malabsorption), and adrenal insufficiency. While most primary
infections resolve spontaneously, when associated with compromised
immunity such as in patients with AIDS, relapse is ongoing and is
often associated with hematogenous pneumonia, ARDS, disseminated
intravascular coagulation (DIC), hematogenously distributed
papulopustules and meningitis. Histoplasmosis is treated with
Amphotericin B (especially in immunocompromised patients acutely
ill with hematogenous dissemination), intraconzoles and
ketoconazole.
[0506] Paracoccidioiomycosis, caused by Paracoccidioides
brasiliensis, is an inhalation-acquired mycosis that can produce
primary pulmonary infection or hematogenously disseminated disease
involving predominantly the skin, mucouse membranes,
reticulendothelial system and adrenals. Infection may be initially
asymptomatic but dormant, and then revive. Treatment of this
infection uses ketoconazole, intraconzole and sulfonamides.
[0507] Systemic invasive mycoses resulting from opportunistic
pathogens, which occur in immunocompromised hosts, include
candidiasis, cryptococcosis, aspergillossi, mucomycosis and
pneumocystosis. By heightening immune response in a compromised
immune system, the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention may also
have therapeutic value in the treatment of these conditions,
especially when combined with conventional therapies.
[0508] Treatments for candidiasis (caused by Candida albicans, C.
tropicalis, C. glabrata), crytococcosis (caused by Cryptococcus
neoformans), aspergillosis (caused by Aspergillus flavus, A.
fumigatus, A. tereus and A. niger) and mucormycosis (caused by
Rhizopus arrhizus, Rhizomuco, Absidia, Cunninghamella, Mortierella,
Saksenaea spp.) may be treated by one or more of the following
imidazole, ketoconazole, intraconazole, fluconazole, amphotericin B
with and without flucytosine. Pneumocystitis (caused by
penumocystis carnii) recently reclassified from protozoan to fungi
is treated with trimethoprim-sulfamethoxole (TMP-SMZ) and
intravenous pentamidine isethionate, as well as dapsone,
TMP-dapson, trimetrexate, clindamycin-primaquine and
atovagnone.
[0509] Microsporidiosis caused by Microsporidia parasites, was
recently reclassified from protozoan to fungi. They are unicellular
organisms which have mitosomes instead of mitochondria. Organisims
that can cause disease in humans include: sp Enterocytozoon
bieneusi, Encephalitozoon hellem, Encephalitozoon intestinalis,
Encephalitozoon cuniculi, Pleistophora spp, Trachipleistophora
hominis, Trachipleistophora anthropophthera, Nosema connori, Nosema
ocularum, Brachiola vesicularum, Vittaforma corneae, Microsporidium
ceylonensis, Microsporidium africanum, Brachiola algerae.
[0510] Infections are believed to be transmitted to humans from
direct contact with animals, contaminated water or another infected
host. After infecting host cells, the sporoplasm grows, dividing or
forming a multinucleate plasmodium which can have complex life
cycles including both asexual and sexual reproduction.
Autoinfection by successive generations and chronic, debilitating
diseases often characterize Microsporidial infections.
[0511] The clinical manifestations of the disease can vary
depending on the species and the host's immune status, and include
conjunctivitis (e.g., V. corneae), chronic diarrhea, malabsorption
and wasting (e.g., E. bieneusi, E. intestinalis).
[0512] Treatments for ocular, intestinal and disseminated
microsporosis includes administration of albendazole. Topical
application of fumagillin may also be used effectively to treat
microsporidial keratoconjunctivitis. Other drugs include
antihelminthics (e.g., albendazole), antibiotics (e.g.,
fumagillin), immunomodulators (e.g., thalidomide), antiprotozoals,
(e.g., metronidazole).
[0513] d. Protozoan
[0514] Disease resulting from parasitic disorders such as malaria,
schistosomiasis and leishmaniasis are among the most prevalent and
important health problems in developing countries. These diseases
pose particular challenges because they may evade host immunity
through various means, including: 1) living inside host cells
(e.g., Leishmania), 2) rapidly change surface antigens (e.g.,
trypansomes) and 3) "disguising" themselves as host cells by
displaying host antigens (e.g., schistosomisasis). The use of
immunosuppressive drugs in the treatment of cancer and in
conjunction with organ transplants, as well the global prevalence
of AIDs can reactivate latent or subclinical infections from
Plasmodium spp., Toxoplasma spp., Leishmania spp., Cryptosporidium
spp., Trypanosoma spp. and helminths.
[0515] For chronic infections resulting from infections with
protozoan parasites, the anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention may
be combined by administration in combination with, prior to or
subsequent with standard anti-protozoan therapies.
[0516] Malaria, caused by parasites of genus Plasmodium (E.g., P.
ovale, P. malariae, P. falciparum, P. vivax), begins the infectious
cycle as a sporozite which developes in the gut of the female
anopheline mosquito. Upon transmission into humans, these
sporozites invade and multiply within hepatic cells without
inducing an inflammatory reaction. The progeny of these organisms,
called merozoites, then invade erythrocytic cells and initiate the
clinical phase of the disease, typically characterized by fever and
chills. In areas of the world where infection is endemic, nearly
all residents harbor continuous low level chronic infections of low
to moderate pathogenicity, with increasing levels of IgG antibodies
providing protection from merozoite entry into erythrocytes.
[0517] Currently available anti-malarial drugs for both treatment
of clinical disease and prophylaxic include:
Artemether-lumefantrine (therapy, E.g., Coartem.RTM. and
Riamet.RTM.), artesunate-amodiaquine (therapy),
artesunate-mefloquine (therapy),
artesunate-Sulfadoxine/pyrimethamine (therapy),
atovaquone-proguanil, (therapy and prophylaxis, E.g.,
Malarone.RTM.), quinine (therapy), chloroquine (therapy and
prophylaxis), cotrifazid (therapy and prophylaxis), doxycycline
(therapy and prophylaxis), mefloquine, (therapy and prophylaxis,
E.g., Lariam.RTM.), primaquine (Therapy in P. vivax and P. ovale
only; not for prophylaxis), proguanil (prophylaxis),
sulfadoxine-pyrimethamine (therapy and prophylaxis),
hydroxychloroquine, (therapy and prophylaxis, E.g.,
Plaquenil.RTM.).
[0518] Through reactivating anerigic T-cells, the anti-PD-L1
antibodies of the invention may particularly therapeutic in aiding
clearance of malarial parasites.
[0519] Toxoplasmosis, caused by parasites of the genus Toxoplasma,
is often asymptomatic, but a small fraction can develop clinical
disease, which can range from benign lymphadenopathy acute to fatal
infections of the central nervous system. The sources of infection
include cysts in raw or partially cooked pork or mutton and oocytes
passed in feces of infected cats. Infection occus in humans usually
through the gastrointestinal tract, and the protozoa can penetrate
and proliferate (as tachyzoites) in virtually every cell of the
body. These tachyzoites can produce cysts filled with minute
slow-growing infective bodies (bradyzoites) that remain viable for
long periods of time, resulting in a latent chronic infection.
Hosts with compromised immune systems, such as those taking
immunosuppressive drugs or suffering from HIV are particularly
prone to suffering from toxicoplasmosis.
[0520] Medications that are used to treat primary toxoplasmosis
include the following: pyrimethamine, both with and without an
accompanying antibiotics (E.g., sulfadiazine, clindamycin,
spiramycin and minocycline). Latent toxoplasmosis may be treated
with the antibiotics atovaquone, both with and without
clindamycin.
[0521] Leishmaniasis, caused by parasites of the genus Leishmania,
infect macrophages of the skin and viscera, and is transmitted into
humans through sandflies. As there is little or no specific serum
antibody, cell-mediation immunity through activated T-cells appears
to be a critical route by which infection is cleared. Old World
Leishmaniasis, also known as tropical sore, is caused by several
species of Leishmania: L. tropica, L. major and L. aethiopica. New
World Leishmaniasis is caused by various subspecies of L. Mexicana
and L. braziliensis. These parasites induce a strong cell-mediated
immune response, but the outcome of the clinical disease results
also in part to the host response. If the host mounts in a
suppressed or inadequate cell-mediated response, the result is
diffuse chronic cutaneous leishmaniasis, with little hope for
spontaneous cure (E.g. L. aethiopica, L. Mexicana). If the host
mounts an excessive cell-mediated response, the response is a
lupoid or recidiva leishmaniasis, with persistent nonulcerated
lymphoid nodules appearing at the edge of primary lesions (E.g., L.
tropica). Recidiva leishmaniasis can appear from 1 to 10 years
after the initial lesion. There are two forms of the disease,
cutaneous and visceral, with the cutaneous form manifesting in
cutaneous lesions with cell mediated immunity is critical to
clearance. In the visceral form, cell-mediated immunity is
insufficient or non-existent, and the disease manifest clinically
as polyclonal B-cell hypergammaglobulinemia, leukopenia,
splenomegaly and elevated production of TNF-.alpha..
[0522] Miltefosine (E.g., Impavido.RTM.) and paramyocin are
currently available treatments for both cutaneous and visceral
leishmaniasis.
[0523] Crytosporidiosis, caused by infections from protozoans of
the genus Crytosporidia and results from direct human contact with
fecal excrement of infected hosts. The infection of intestinal
mucosal tissue can result in diarrhea. The disease typically
manifests as an acute infection, but it can become chronic,
especially in immunocompromised individuals. Treatments are
typically palliative, especially hydration, but paromomycin,
azithromycin and serum Ig (e.g., LactobinR.RTM.) have been
successful in clearing infection.
[0524] Trypanosomiasis, caused by the parasite Trypanosoma (E.g.,
T. Brucei, subsp. gambiense, rodesiense infects humans and cattle
through bites from the Tsetse-fly. The challenge that this pathogen
poses results from successive generations of populations with
displaying different surface antigens. Infections are characterized
by elevated levels of non-specific and non-protective serum
immunoglobulins.
[0525] Treatments for Trypanosomiasis include intravenous
administration of the following: pentamidine (for T.b. gambiense),
intravenous suramin (for T.b. rhodesiense), eflornithine,
melarsoprol both with and without nifurtimox.
[0526] Helminthic infection, resulting from trematodes (E.g.,
Schistomsoma spp.), cestodes and nemotodes share the common immune
responses of eosinophila and reaginic antibody, responses which are
T-cell dependent.
[0527] Schistosomiasis (aka bilharzia), caused by Shistosoma
mansoni, S. japonicum, S. haematobium and S. mekongi start their
life cyle as eggs in water, which then hatch into miracidia, which
penetrate snails and create multiple generations of sporocysts.
These in turn produce fork-tailed cercariae which can infect the
bloodstream of a human host as a shistosomula, which migrate
initially to the lungs, and then to the liver. These flukes
eventually pair, mate, and lay eggs in the mesenteric venules.
While many of these eggs travels to the intestines and are
excreted, some are trapped in the submucosa, portal venules of the
liver and other organs of the body. The granulomatous inflammation
associated with the trapped eggs is the definitive symptom of
chronic schistomsomiasis.
[0528] Treatments for schistosomiasis include adminisriaton of
Praziquantel.RTM., antimony, Oxamniquine (S. mansoni) and
Mirazid.RTM..
[0529] Cestode infections can be classified into two groups, one is
the intestinal dwelling adult tapeworms such as Diphyllobothrium
latum and Taenia saginata, which have a restricted, non-humoral
immune effect. The second group describes a migratory
tissue-encysting larval tapeworms such as Hymenolepis nana,
Echinococcus granulosus and Taenia solium, which induce strong
parenteral host responses and protective serum antibodies. The most
serious cestode infection in human is Echinococcosis, which when
implanted in the liver, lungs, brain, kidneys or other parts of the
body can result in the formation of hydatid cysts.
[0530] Treatments for Echinococcosis include adminstration of
metronidazole, albendazole and surgical intervention, such as
removal, aspiration, marsupialization or omentopexy.
[0531] Nematodes are the most common varied and widely distributed
helminths that infect humans, caused disorders such as trichinosis,
ascariasis, filariosis and strongylodiosis. Trichinosis, caused by
Trichinella spiralis, can result from ingestion of the larvae of T.
spiralis in raw meat or partially cooked meat such as pork. In
humans, infections elicit strong humoral response with elevated
IgM, followed by IgG production, followed by rapid expulsion of
antibody-damaged worms by T-lymphocytes.
[0532] The only known treatment for killing adult worms in the
intestine is thiabendazole, while there is no known treatment to
kill the larvae.
[0533] Ascaris, also known as giant roundworm (Ascaris
lumbricoides), is a common parasite in humans resulting from
ingestion of fecally-contaminated substances. While patients can
remain asymptomatic for very long periods of time, as larval stages
travel through the body, they may cause visceral damage,
peritonitis and inflammation, enlargement of the liver or spleen,
toxicity, and pneumonia.
[0534] Treatments for ascariasis include administration of
mebendazole (E.g., Vermox.RTM.), piperazine, pyrantel pamoate
(E.g., Antiminth.RTM., Pin-X.RTM.), albendazole, thiabendazole with
or without piperazine, hexylresorcinol, santonin and oil of
Chenopodium. The anti-PD-L1 antibodies of the invention may be
administered in combination with, prior or subsequent to
administration of these therapies for the treatment of
ascariasis.
[0535] Filariosis, caused by filarid nematodes, are introduced into
humans by insect vectors. Onchocerca volvulus, which caused
onchoceriasis or river blindness, is transmitted by bites from the
blackfly. Infectious larvae lodge themselves subcutaneously and
develop into adults, induce a fibrogenic host response, and shed
large amount of microfilariae, which disperse subcutaneously and
throughout the eyes, further inducing a keratisis or retininitis
which then causes the cornea to become opaque. Lymphatic filariasis
results from infection by Brugia spp. and Wuchereria spp. Over
time, scarring of the lymph tissue, especially in the groin, may
prevent draining, resulting in the disfiguring condition
elephantiasis.
[0536] The primary treatment for filariosis is the administration
of the antibiotic ivermectin, abendazole and diethylcarbamazine
citrate (DEC, Hetrazan.RTM.) with or without ivermectin or
albendazole. Other treatment prospects includes doxycycline, which
kills a symbiotic bacteria, wolbochia.
[0537] Strongylodiosis, caused by parasites of the genus
Strongyloides (E.g., S. stercoralis, S. fulleborni), is a disease
that is passed to humans through fecally contaminated soil. They
can exist in both a free living cycle (rabditiform larvae maturing
into adult worms) as well as a parasitic cycle (filariform larvae
maturing into adult worms) which penetrates the skin, travel to the
lungs, then the pharynx and ultimately reside in the intestine.
Autoinfection with Strongyloides is also known to occur, which is
essentially repeated infection by successive generations of
filariform larvae.
[0538] Infections may be aymptomatic, or can be characterized by
pain and diarrhea in the gastrointestinal tract, Loftler's syndrome
in the lungs (i.e., eosinophila) and urticaria. Blood eosinophila
may also be present. As persistent infection of Strongyloides can
mimic peptic ulcer, gallbladder disease and Crohn's disease,
misdiagnosis is common. It is a particular problem in
immunocompromised hosts.
[0539] Known treatments for Strongyloidiosis is ivermectin,
albenazole or thiabendazole but as this mediation only kills adult
worms, repeated administration is necessary.
[0540] e. Vaccination
[0541] Vaccination or the administration of antigenic material to
induce immunity to disease is routinely used to prevent or
ameliorate the effects of infection by a pathogen Enhancing host
immunity can be used on undesired antigens found not only on
infectious pathogens, but also host tissue that has become diseased
(e.g., cancerous). Traditionally, vaccines are derived from
weakened or dead whole pathogens, but they can also be peptides
representing epitopes on the intact pathogen that are specifically
recognized by human class I or class II major histocompatability
complex (MHC) molecules. Peptide antigens of particular interest
are those which are specifically recognized by T cells.
[0542] Recently, it has been shown that combining a therapeutic
vaccination with adminstriation of PD-L1 blockade on exhausted CD8+
T cells resulted in enhanced function and viral control in a
chronic infection mouse model. Ha et al., J. Exp. Med. 205(3):
543-555 (2008). As a result, the anti-PD-L1 antibodies described
herein may also be combined with antigen vaccination (e.g.,
administered prior, simultaneous or after) to treat infection
(e.g., acute and chronic) resulting from viral, bacterial, fungal
or protozoan invasion as well as tumor immunity.
[0543] G. Pharmaceutical Dosages:
[0544] Dosages and desired drug concentration of pharmaceutical
compositions of the present invention may vary depending on the
particular use envisioned. The determination of the appropriate
dosage or route of administration is well within the skill of an
ordinary artisan. Animal experiments provide reliable guidance for
the determination of effective doses for human therapy.
Interspecies scaling of effective doses can be performed following
the principles laid down by Mordenti, J. and Chappell, W. "The Use
of Interspecies Scaling in Toxicokinetics," In Toxicokinetics and
New Drug Development, Yacobi et al., Eds, Pergamon Press, New York
1989, pp. 42-46.
[0545] When in vivo administration of the polypeptides or
antibodies described herein are used, normal dosage amounts may
vary from about 10 ng/kg up to about 100 mg/kg of mammal body
weight or more per day, preferably about 1 mg/kg/day to 10
mg/kg/day, depending upon the route of administration. Guidance as
to particular dosages and methods of delivery is provided in the
literature; see, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,657,760; 5,206,344;
or 5,225,212. It is within the scope of the invention that
different formulations will be effective for different treatments
and different disorders, and that administration intended to treat
a specific organ or tissue may necessitate delivery in a manner
different from that to another organ or tissue. Moreover, dosages
may be administered by one or more separate administrations, or by
continuous infusion. For repeated administrations over several days
or longer, depending on the condition, the treatment is sustained
until a desired suppression of disease symptoms occurs. However,
other dosage regimens may be useful. The progress of this therapy
is easily monitored by conventional techniques and assays.
[0546] H. Administration of the Formulation
[0547] The formulations of the present invention, including but not
limited to reconstituted and liquid formulations, are administered
to a mammal in need of treatment with the anti-PD-L1 antibodies,
preferably a human, in accord with known methods, such as
intravenous administration as a bolus or by continuous infusion
over a period of time, by intramuscular, intraperitoneal,
intracerobrospinal, subcutaneous, intra-articular, intrasynovial,
intrathecal, oral, topical, or inhalation routes.
[0548] In preferred embodiments, the formulations are administered
to the mammal by subcutaneous (i.e. beneath the skin)
administration. For such purposes, the formulation may be injected
using a syringe. However, other devices for administration of the
formulation are available such as injection devices (e.g. the
INJECT-EASE.TM. and GENJECT.TM.devices); injector pens (such as the
GENPEN.TM.); auto-injector devices, needleless devices (e.g.
MEDIJECTOR.TM. and BIOJECTOR.TM.); and subcutaneous patch delivery
systems.
[0549] In a specific embodiment, the present invention is directed
to kits for a single dose-administration unit. Such kits comprise a
container of an aqueous formulation of therapeutic protein or
antibody, including both single or multi-chambered pre-filled
syringes. Exemplary pre-filled syringes are available from Vetter
GmbH, Ravensburg, Germany.
[0550] The appropriate dosage ("therapeutically effective amount")
of the protein will depend, for example, on the condition to be
treated, the severity and course of the condition, whether the
protein is administered for preventive or therapeutic purposes,
previous therapy, the patient's clinical history and response to
anti-PD-L1 antibody, the format of the formulation used, and the
discretion of the attending physician. The anti-PD-L1 antibody is
suitably administered to the patient at one time or over a series
of treatments and may be administered to the patient at any time
from diagnosis onwards. The anti-PD-L1 antibody may be administered
as the sole treatment or in conjunction with other drugs or
therapies useful in treating the condition in question.
[0551] For anti-PD-L1 antibodies, an initial candidate dosage can
range from about 0.1-20 mg/kg for administration to the patient,
which can take the form of one or more separate administrations.
However, other dosage regimens may be useful. The progress of such
therapy is easily monitored by conventional techniques.
[0552] I. Articles of Manufacture
[0553] In another embodiment of the invention, an article of
manufacture is provided which contains the formulation and
preferably provides instructions for its use. The article of
manufacture comprises a container. Suitable containers include, for
example, bottles, vials (e.g. dual chamber vials), syringes (such
as single or dual chamber syringes) and test tubes. The container
may be formed from a variety of materials such as glass or plastic.
The container holds the formulation. The label, which is on, or
associated with the container may indicate directions for
reconstitution and/or use. The label may further indicate that the
formulation is useful or intended for subcutaneous administration,
and/or for the treatment of a T-cell dysfunctional disorder. The
container holding the formulation may be a multi-use vial, which
allows for repeat administrations (e.g. from 2-6 administrations)
of the reconstituted formulation. The article of manufacture may
further comprise a second container comprising a suitable diluent
(e.g. BWFI). Upon mixing of the diluent and the lyophilized
formulation, the final protein concentration in the reconstituted
formulation will generally be at least 50 mg/ml. The article of
manufacture may further include other materials desirable from a
commercial and user standpoint, including other buffers, diluents,
filters, needles, syringes, and package inserts with instructions
for use.
[0554] The invention will be more fully understood by reference to
the following examples. They should not, however, be construed as
limiting the scope of the invention. All citations throughout the
disclosure are hereby expressly incorporated by reference.
[0555] In another embodiment, the invention provides for an article
of manufacture comprising the formulations described herein for
administration in an auto-injector device. An auto-injector can be
described as an injection device that upon activation, will deliver
its contents without additional necessary action from the patient
or administrator. They are particularly suited for self-medication
of therapeutic formulations when the delivery rate must be constant
and the time of delivery is greater than a few moments.
Example 1
Identification of Anti-PD-L1 Antibodies in Phage Libraries
Library Sorting and Screening to Identify Anti-PD-L1 Antibodies
[0556] Human (R&D Systems, cat#156-B7) and murine (R&D
Systems, cat#1019-B7) PD-L1-Fc fusions were used as antigens for
alternate library sorting. Specifically, phage libraries were
sorted first against human antigen, followed by murine, human, and
murine antigen in the subsequent three rounds. Nunc 96 well
Maxisorp.RTM. immunoplates were coated overnight at 4.degree. C.
with target antigen (10 .mu.g/ml) and were blocked for 1 hour at
room temperature with phage blocking buffer PBST
(phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) and 1% (w/v) bovine serum albumin
(BSA) and 0.05% (v/v) tween-20). Antibody phage libraries VH (see,
e.g., Lee et al., J. Immunol. Meth. 284:119-132, 2004) and VH/VL
(see Liang et al., J. Mol. Biol. 366: 815-829, 2007) were added to
antigen plates separately and incubated overnight at room
temperature. The following day antigen-coated plates were washed
ten times with PBT (PBS with 0.05% Tween-20), and bound phage were
eluted with 50 mM HCl and 500 mM NaCl for 30 minutes and
neutralized with an equal volume of 1 M Tris base (pH 7.5).
Recovered phages were amplified in E. coli XL-1 Blue cells. During
the subsequent selection rounds, incubation of antibody phage with
the antigen-coated plates was reduced to 2-3 hours, and the
stringency of plate washing was gradually increased.
[0557] After 4 rounds of panning, significant enrichment was
observed. 96 clones were picked each from VH and VH/VL library
sorting to determine whether they specifically bound to both human
and murine PD-L1-Fc. The variable regions of these clones were PCR
sequenced to identify unique sequence clones.
[0558] The parental clones of interest were reformatted into IgGs
by cloning V.sub.L and V.sub.H regions of individual clones into
the LPG3 and LPG4 vector (Lee et al., supra), respectively,
transiently expressing in mammalian CHO cells, and purifying with a
protein A column. The 13 Phage antibodies were evaluated for their
ability to block the interaction between soluble PD-1-Fc fusion
protein and human or mouse PD-L1 expressed in 293 cells (IC 50
values are designated in Table 1--upper half). W243.55, the
antibody with the lowest IC.sub.50 for blocking human PD-L1 binding
to PD-1 was selected for subsequent affinity maturation to improve
its affinity for both human and mouse PD-L1. (Table 1). An antibody
with comparable cross reactivity against both primate and murine
species (as well as retaining affinity to human) would provide for
a therapeutic of enhanced value, in that the same antibody that has
been well characterized in experimental models can be used in human
clinical trials. This avoids the uncertainly resulting from the use
of a model-specific surrogate.
Construct Libraries for Affinity Improvement of Clones Derived from
the V.sub.H Library
[0559] Phagemid pW0703 (derived from phagemid pV0350-2b (Lee et
al., J. Mol. Biol 340: 1073-1093 (2004)), containing stop codon
(TAA) in all CDR-L3 positions and displaying monovalent Fab on the
surface of M13 bacteriophage) served as the library template for
grafting heavy chain variable domains (V.sub.H) of clones of
interest from the V.sub.H library for affinity maturation. Both
hard and soft randomization strategies were used for affinity
maturation. For hard randomization, one light chain library with
selected positions of the three light chain CDRs was randomized
using amino acids designed to mimic natural human antibodies and
the designed DNA degeneracy was as described in Lee et al. (J. Mol.
Biol 340, 1073-1093 (2004)). For soft randomization, residues at
positions 91-94, and 96 of CDR-L3, 28-31 and 34-35 of CDR-H1, 50,
52, and 53-58 of CDR-H2, 95-99 and 100A of CDR-H3, were targeted;
and two different combinations of CDR loops, L3/H1/H2 and L3/H3,
were selected for randomization. To achieve the soft randomization
conditions, which introduced the mutation rate of approximately 50%
at the selected positions, the mutagenic DNA was synthesized with
70-10-10-10 mixtures of bases favoring the wild type nucleotides
(Gallop et al., Journal of Medicinal Chemistry 37:1233-1251
(1994)).
Phage Sorting to Generate Affinity Improvement
[0560] The phage clones previously identified were subjected to
plate sorting for the first round, followed by five or six rounds
of solution sorting. The libraries were sorted against human and
murine PD-L1-Fc separately (R&D Systems, cat. #156-B7, cat
#1019-B7, respectively). For the human PD-L1-Fc target, at the
first round of plate sorting, three libraries were sorted against
target coated plate (NUNC Maxisorp.RTM. plate) separately with
phage input about 3 O.D./ml in 1% BSA and 0.05% Tween 20 for 2
hours at room temperature. After the first round of plate sorting,
solution sorting was performed to increase the stringency of
selection. For solution sorting, 1 O.D./ml phage propagated from
the first round of plate sorting were incubated with 20 nM
biotinylated target protein (the concentration is based on parental
clone phage IC.sub.50 value) in 100 .mu.L buffer containing 1%
Superblock (Pierce Biotechnology) and 0.05% Tween-20 for 30 minutes
at room temperature. The mixture was further diluted 10.times. with
1% Superblock, and 100 .mu.L/well was applied to neutravidin-coated
wells (5 .mu.g/ml) for 15 minutes at room temperature with gentle
shaking such that biotinylated target bound phage. The wells were
washed 10.times. with PBS-0.05% Tween-20. To determine background
binding, control wells containing phage with targets that were not
biotinylated were captured on neutravidin-coated plates. Bound
phage was eluted with 0.1N HCl for 20 minutes, neutralized by 1/10
volume of 1M Tris pH-11, titered, and propagated for the next
round. Next, five more rounds of solution sorting were carried out
together with two methods of increasing selection stringency. The
first of which is for on-rate selection by decreasing biotinylated
target protein concentration from 4 nM to 0.5 nM, and the second of
which is for off-rate selection by adding excess amounts of
non-biotinylated target protein (100.about.2000 fold more) to
compete off weaker binders either at room temperature or 37.degree.
C. Also, the phage input was decreased (0.1.about.0.5 O.D/ml) to
lower background phage binding. For murine PD-L1-Fc target, phage
sorting method is similar to the one described above for the human
PD-L1 Fc antigen, with a few modifications. Specifically, 100 nM
biotinylated murine PD-L1-Fc was used for solution panning
immediately after first round of plate panning. In the four
subsequent rounds of solution panning, biotinylated target was
reduced from 10 nM to 1 nM, and 200-500 fold excess of
non-biotinylated target was added at room temperature.
[0561] The affinity matured clones were then further screened with
the High Throughput Affinity Screening ELISA procedure described in
the following example.
High Throughput Affinity Screening ELISA (Single Spot
Competition)
[0562] Colonies were picked from the seventh and sixth round
screens for the human and murine PD-L1 target, respectively.
Colonies were grown overnight at 37.degree. C. in 150 .mu.L/well of
2YT media with 50 .mu.g/ml carbenicillin and 1E10/ml KO7 in 96-well
plate (Falcon). From the same plate, a colony of XL-1 infected
parental phage was picked as control. 96-well Nunc Maxisorp.RTM.
plates were coated with 100 .mu.L/well of human and murine PD-L1-Fc
protein (2 .mu.g/ml) separately in PBS at 4.degree. C. overnight or
room temperature for 2 hours. The plates were blocked with 65 .mu.L
of 1% BSA for 30 min and 40 .mu.L of 1% Tween 20 for another 30
minutes.
[0563] The phage supernatant was diluted 1:10 in ELISA (enzyme
linked immunosorbent assay) buffer (PBS with 0.5% BSA, 0.05%
Tween-20) with or without 10 nM target protein in 100 .mu.L total
volume and incubated at least 1 hour at room temperature in an F
plate (NUNC). 75 .mu.L of mixture with or without target protein
was transferred side by side to the target protein coated plates.
The plate was gently shaken for 15 min to allow the capture of
unbound phage to the target protein-coated plate. The plate was
washed at least five times with PBS-0.05% Tween-20. The binding was
quantified by adding horseradish peroxidase (HRP)-conjugated
anti-M13 antibody in ELISA buffer (1:5000) and incubated for 30
minutes at room temperature. The plates were washed with PBS-0.05%
Tween 20 at least five times. Next, 100 .mu.L/well of a 1:1 ratio
of 3,3',5,5'-tetramethylbenzidine (TMB) Peroxidase substrate and
Peroxidase Solution B (H.sub.2O.sub.2) (Kirkegaard-Perry
Laboratories (Gaithersburg, Md.)) was added to the well and
incubated for 5 minutes at room temperature. The reaction was
stopped by adding 100 .mu.L1M Phosphoric Acid (H.sub.3PO.sub.4) to
each well and allowed to incubate for 5 minutes at room
temperature. The OD (optical density) of the yellow color in each
well was determined using a standard ELISA plate reader at 450 nm.
The OD reduction (%) was calculated by the following equation.
OD.sub.450 nmreduction (%)=[(OD.sub.450 nm of wells with
competitor)/(OD.sub.450 nm of well with no
competitor)].times.100
[0564] In comparison to the OD.sub.450 nm reduction (%) of the well
of parental phage (100%), clones that had the OD.sub.450 nm
reduction (%) lower than 50% for both the human and murine target
were picked for sequence analysis. Unique clones were selected for
phage preparation to determine binding affinity (phage IC.sub.50)
against both human and murine PD-L-Fc by comparison with parental
clones.
Materials
[0565] hPD-1-Fc, hPD-L1-Fc, hB7.1-Fc, mPD-1-Fc, mPD-L1-Fc, and
mB7.1 were purchased from R & D Systems. hPD-L1 expressing 293
cells were generated at Genentech using conventional techniques.
F(ab').sub.2 goat anti-human IgG Fc was purchased from Jackson
ImmunoResearch Laboratories.
Conjugation of Proteins
[0566] PD-1-Fc, and B7.1-Fc proteins were biotinylated with EZ-Link
sulfo-NHS-LC-LC-biotin (Pierce) for 30 minutes at room temperature
as described by the manufacturer. Excess non-reacted biotin was
removed with Quick Spin High Capacity Columns, G50-Sephadex (Roche)
as described by the manufacturer.
[0567] F(ab').sub.2 goat anti-human IgG Fc was Ruthenium labeled
with MSD Sulfo-Tag NHS-Ester (Meso Scale Discovery) as described by
the manufacturer and excess non-reacted Sulfo-Tag was removed with
Quick Spin High Capacity Column, G50-Sephadex.
ECL Cell-Binding Assay for Testing Phage Antibodies
[0568] Antibody concentrations resulting in 50% inhibition
(IC.sub.50) of the binding of hPD-1-Fc to hPD-L1 expressing 293
cells were measured by electrochemiluminescent (ECL) cell-binding
assay. hPD-L1 expression 293 cells were washed with phosphate
buffered saline (PBS) and seeded at 25,000 cells per well in 25
.mu.L PBS on 96 well High Bind plate (Meso Scale Discovery).
Incubate plate at room temperature to allow the cells to attach to
the carbon surface of the plate. Add 25 .mu.L of 30% FBS to each
well and incubate the plate for 30 minutes with mild agitation to
block non-specific binding sites. Wash plate three times with PBS
on an ELISA microplate washer (ELx405 Select, Bio-Tek Instruments)
under gentle dispense and aspiration conditions. Remove excess PBS
in the wells by blotting plate on paper towels. Add 12.5 .mu.L of
2.times. concentration of antibodies to each well in 3% FBS in PBS
(Assay Buffer) and followed by 12.5 .mu.L of 4 .mu.g/mL (2.times.
concentration) of hPD-1-biotin in Assay Buffer and incubate plate
for one hour with mild agitation. Wash plate 3.times. with PBS on a
microplate washer, and blot plate on paper towels. Add 25 .mu.L of
2 .mu.g/mL of Streptavidin-Ruthenium (Meso Scale Discovery) and
incubate in assay buffer at room temperature for 30 minutes with
gentle agitation. Wash 3.times. with PBS on microplate washer and
blot plate on paper towels. Add 150 .mu.L of 1.times.MSD Read
Buffer without surfactant (Meso Scale Discovery). Read emitted
luminescence light at 620 nm on Sector Imager 6000 reader (Meso
Scale Discovery). The ECL values were analyzed with the
concentrations of the test antibodies used in the assay, using a
four-parameter nonlinear least squares fit, to obtain the IC.sub.50
values of each competitor in the assay.
Results and Discussion:
[0569] Fifteen unique phage antibodies derived from YW243.55 that
bound both human and murine PD-L1 were chosen and reformatted to
full length IgG1 antibodies for further evaluation. The light and
heavy chain variable region sequences of these antibodies are
reported in FIG. 11A-1, FIG. 11A-2, FIG. 11A-3, FIG. 11B-1, FIG.
11B-2, and FIG. 11B-3.
[0570] The fifteen reformatted Abs were tested for their ability to
block the binding of PD-1 to 293 cells expressing either human or
mouse PD-L1 via an electrochemiluminescent (ECL) cell-binding
assay. (Table 1--lower half: In Table 1 "Format 1" describes
soluble human PD-1-Fc binding to human PD-L1-tranfected 293 cells;
"Format 2" describes murine PD-1-Fc binding to murine PD-L1
transfeced 293 cells, and "Format 3" describes human PD-1 binding
to murine PD-L1-transfected 293 cells. While all fifteen affinity
improved Abs had acquired significant cross-reactivity to mouse
PD-L1, YW243.55S70 was selected as the primary candidate to pursue
based on its ability to block binding of both human and mouse PD-L1
to PD-1 (Table 1: IC.sub.50 values of 49 pM and 22 pM,
respectively).
TABLE-US-00021 TABLE 1 Format 1 Format 2 Format 3 hPD1-Fc- mPD1-Fc-
hPD1-Fc- biotin/ biotin/ biotin/ hPDL1-293 mPDL1-293 mPDL1-293
Clone IC.sub.50 in nM IC.sub.50 in nM IC.sub.50 in nM YW251.11 8.6
YW 243.1 0.234 YW243.55 0.099 >100 YW254.1 >100 0.795 YW254.2
>100 3.76 YW254.3 >100 >100 YW254.4 1.73 15.6 YW254.9
>100 0.224 YW254.33 2.2 >100 YW262.4 50 1.42 YW262.5 90 25
YW262.16 7.5 0.626 YW262.64 0.256 100 YW243.55.5 0.104 0.141
YW243.55.8 0.061 0.063 YW243.55.30 0.108 0.100 YW243.55.34 0.084
0.049 YW243.55.49 0.08 0.032 YW243.55.51 0.078 0.031 YW243.55.62
0.096 0.066 YW243.55.84 0.124 0.051 YW243.55.89 0.066 0.13
YW243.55.H12 0.103 0.156 YW243.55.H37 0.109 0.163 YW243.55.H70
0.084 0.042 YW243.55.S1 0.114 0.074 YW243.55.S37 0.100 0.024
YW243.55.S70 0.049 0.022
Example 2
Characterization of Anti-PD-L1 Antibodies (BIAcore)
[0571] Binding affinities of anti-PD-L1 phage antibodies YW243.55
and YW243.55S70 against recombinant human and mouse PD-L1 were
measured by surface plasmon resonance (SRP) using a
BIAcore.TM.-3000 instrument. Recombinant human PD-L1-Fc (R&D
Systems, cat #156-B7) and recombinant mouse PD-L1-Fc (R&D
Systems, cat#1019-B7) were directly coated on CM5 biosensor chips
to achieve approximately 500 response units (RU). For kinetics
measurements, two-fold serial dilutions (3.9 nm to 500 nm) were
injected in PBT buffer (PBS with 0.05% Tween-20) at 25.degree. C.
with a flow rate of 30 .mu.L/min. Association rates (k.sub.on) and
dissociation rate (k.sub.off) were calculated using a simple
one-to-one Languir binding model (BIAcore Evaluation Software
version 3.2). The equilibrium dissociation constant (kD) was
calculated as the ratio k.sub.off/k.sub.on.
[0572] The binding affinities of anti-PD-L1 phage antibody clones
YW243.55 and YW243.55.570 measured are reported below in Table
2.
TABLE-US-00022 TABLE 2 BIAcore binding affinities Immobilized
rhPD-L1 Fc Immobilized rmPD-L1 Fc Clone k.sub.on/(1/Ms)
k.sub.off/(1/s) kD (M) k.sub.on/(1/Ms) k.sub.off/(1/s) kD (M)
YW243.55 (Fab) 5.80 .times. 10.sup.5 7.30 .times. 10.sup.-3 1.26
.times. 10.sup.-8 -- -- >1 .times. 10.sup.-6 YW243.55 (IgG) 2.70
.times. 10.sup.5 2.60 .times. 10.sup.-4 9.63 .times. 10.sup.-10
5.80 .times. 10.sup.4 9.20 .times. 10.sup.-3 1.59 .times. 10.sup.-7
YW243.55.S70 5.30 .times. 10.sup.5 1.00 .times. 10.sup.-4 1.89
.times. 10.sup.-10 4.80 .times. 10.sup.5 1.40 .times. 10.sup.-3
2.92 .times. 10.sup.-9 (Fab) YW243.55.S70 3.90 .times. 10.sup.5
6.30 .times. 10.sup.-5 1.62 .times. 10.sup.-10 2.80 .times.
10.sup.5 1.80 .times. 10.sup.-4 .sup. 6.43 .times. 10.sup.-10
(IgG)
Example 3A
Specificity of Anti-PD-L1 Abs for Human, Rhesus and Mouse
PD-L1--FACS and Radioligand Cell Binding Assay)
[0573] This example shows the specificity for the anti-PD-L1
antibody of the invention for human, rhesus and mouse PD-L1. In
addition, it shows the affinity of the Ab for mouse and human PD-L1
expressed at the cell membrane on 293-transfected cells.
[0574] Human and mouse PD-L1 were stably transfected into 293
cells. Cells were harvested and plated at 150,000 cells per well in
a 96-well plate for binding studies.
[0575] Rhesus blood was obtained from Southwest Foundation for
Biomedical Research (San Antonio, Tex.). Blood was diluted with an
equal volume of PBS and overlayed on 96% Ficoll-Paque (GE
Healthcare) for separation of mononuclear cells. Mononuclear cells
were lysed of red blood cells using erythrocyte lysis buffer
(Qiagen) and cultured overnight at 1.5.times.10.sup.6 cells/ml with
5 ng/ml PMA plus 1 .mu.M ionomycin in 6-well plates. Culture media
was RPMI 1640 with 10% fetal bovine serum, 20 .mu.M HEPES, and
1:100 dilutions of the following supplements from Gibco: Gluta-MAX,
sodium pyruvate, penicillin/streptomycin, and non-essential amino
acids. Cells were harvested the following day and aliquoted to a
96-well plate for binding studies (approximately 120,000 cells per
well).
[0576] The PD-L1 antibody YW243.55.570 or Herceptin.RTM. antibody
control were titrated starting at 10 .mu.g/ml, in three-fold serial
dilutions and bound to cells in 50 .mu.l volumes for 25 minutes on
ice. Cells were washed and then bound with anti-human IgG PE
(Caltag) at 20 .mu.g/ml for 25 minutes on ice. Rhesus cells were
also co-stained with CD3 FITC and CD4 APC (BD Biosciences) to
distinguish CD4+ T cells.
[0577] All samples were run on a Beckman Dickinson FACSCalibur and
Mean Fluorescence Intensity of PD-L1 binding data as a function of
anti-PD-L1 antibody concentration was analyzed using Tree Star,
Inc. FlowJo.RTM. software; EC.sub.50 values (Ab concentration
associated with half-maximal binding) were calculated using
Kaleidagraph. In addition, equilibrium binding studies were
performed to define accurate affinities (Kds) for YW24355570
binding to human and mouse PD-L1 expressed on 293 cells (Example
3B). These values are summarized below in Table 3:
TABLE-US-00023 TABLE 3 EC.sub.50 Summary EC.sub.50 (nm) Kd (nM)
Equilibrium Species FACS radioligand binding Human 0.4 0.4 Rhesus
0.3 Mouse 0.3 0.13 Rat 0.8
Example 3B
Affinity Measurement of Anti-PD-L1 Abs to Human and Mouse
PD-L1--Equilibrium Binding Radioligand Cell Binding Assay
[0578] 293 cells transfected with human or mouse PD-L1 were
cultured in growth media, which consisted of RPMI 1640 media
supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS), 2 mM L-glutamine,
1.times. penicillin-streptomycin, at 37 degrees C. in 5% CO.sub.2.
Cells were washed with binding buffer (50:50 DMEM/F12 with 2% FBS
and 50 mM Hepes, pH 7.2) and were placed into 96-well plates at
approximately 230,000 cells in 0.2 mL of binding buffer. The
anti-PD-L1 antibody, YW243.55.S70.hIgG, was iodinated using the
Iodogen method. The radiolabeled anti-PD-L1 antibodies were
purified from free .sup.125I-NA by gel filtration using a NAP-5
column; the purified Ab had a specific activity of 17.41
.mu.Ci/.mu.g. Competition reaction mixtures of 50 .mu.L volume
containing a fixed concentration of iodinated antibody and
decreasing concentrations of serially dliuted unlabeled antibody
were placed into 96-well plates. 293 stable transfectant cell lines
expressing human PD-L1 and murine PD-L1 were cultured in growth
media, which consisted of 50:50 DMEM/F12 media supplemented with
10% fetal bovine serum (FBS), 2 mM L-glutamine, lx
penicillin-streptomycin, at 37.degree. C. in 5% CO.sub.2. Cells
were washed with binding buffer (50:50 DMEM/F12 with 2% FBS, 50 mM
HEPES, pH 7.2, and 2 mM sodium azide) and were added at an
approximate density of 200,000 cells in 0.2 mL of binding buffer to
the 50 .mu.L competition reaction mixtures. The final concentration
of the iodinated antibody in each competition reaction with cells
was .about.150 pM (.about.120,000 cpms per 0.25 mL) and the final
concentration of the unlabeled antibody in the competition reaction
with cells varied, starting at 500 nM and then decreasing by 2 fold
for 10 concentrations. Competition reactions with cells were
incubated for 2 hours at room temperature. Competition reaction
with cells for each concentration of unlabeled antibody was assayed
in triplicate. After the 2 hour incubation, the competition
reactions were transferred to a Millipore Multiscreen filter plate
and washed 4.times. with binding buffer to separate the free from
bound iodinated antibody. The filters were counted on a Wallac
Wizard 1470 gamma counter (PerkinElmer Life and Analytical Sciences
Inc. Wellesley, Mass.). The binding data was evaluated using
NewLigand software (Genentech), which uses the fitting algorithm of
Munson and Robard to determine the binding affinity of the
antibody. Musson et al., Anal. Biochem. 107: 220-39 (1980).
[0579] The Kd values as determined by Scatchard analysis
corroborates the EC50 values of anti-PD-L1 antibody binding to
human and mouse PD-L1 as shown in Table 3.
Example 4
Selectivity and Affinity of Anti-PD-L1 Abs (IC.sub.50)
[0580] This example shows the binding selectivity and affinity (as
IC.sub.50) assay used to evaluate the full-length anti-PD-L1
antibodies of the present invention for their ability to block
binding of PD-L1 to both PD-1 and B7.1.
Methods:
[0581] hB7.1-Fc-biotin and hPD-1-Fc-biotin binding to hPD-L1-Fc
ELISA (Format 4): Nunc Maxisorp 384 well plate was coated with 25
.mu.L of 250 ng/mL hPD-L1-Fc in PBS overnight. Wash wells three
times with 0.05% Tween in PBS (Wash Buffer) on a microplate washer
and block wells with 0.5% BSA in PBS. Add 12.5 .mu.L of 2.times.
concentration of antibodies to each well in 0.05% Tween, 0.5% BSA
in PBS (Assay Diluent) and followed by 12.5 .mu.L of 250 ng/mL
(2.times. concentration) of hB7.1-Fc-biotin in Assay Diluent and
incubate plate for one and half hour with agitation. Wash wells six
times with Wash Buffer and add 25 .mu.L of Streptavidin-HRP
(1:40,000 in Assay Diluent, GE Healthcare). Incubate plate for 30
minutes with agitation and wash wells six times with Wash Buffer.
Add 25 .mu.L of TMB substrate (Kirkegaard and Perry Laboratories)
for one hour and stop reaction with 25 .mu.L of 1 M Phosphoric
Acid. Read absorbance at 450 nm and analyze IC.sub.50 values as
described under ECL cell-binding assay in Example 1.
[0582] Formats 5, 6, 7:
[0583] For hPD-1-Fc-biotin binding to hPD-L1-Fc (Format 5), the
format is similar to the above assay except hPD-1-Fc-biotin was
used instead of hB7.1-Fc-biotin for binding. The TMB substrate
reaction time was 17 minutes.
[0584] For mB7.1-Fc-biotin binding to mPD-L1-Fc (Format 6), the
format is similar to Format 5, except that mPD-L1-Fc was used to
coat plate instead of hPD-L1-Fc and mB7.1-Fc-biotin was used for
binding instead of hB7.1-Fc-biotin. The TMB substrate reaction time
was 7 minutes.
[0585] For mPD-1-Fc-biotin binding to mPD-L1-Fc (Format 7), the
format is similar to the mouse ELISA mentioned above except
mPD-1-Fc-biotin was used for binding instead of mB7.1-Fc-biotin.
The TMB substrate reaction time was 5 minutes.
Results:
[0586] Assessment of the IC.sub.50 of the affinity-matured phage
anti-PD-L1 Antibody YW243.55.570 to block interactions between the
designated binding pairs is reported in Table 4. YW243.55S70 was
able to block binding of human PD-L1 to hB7.1 Fc with a
half-maximal inhibitory concentration of 38 pM, a concentration
relatively comparable to its IC.sub.50 value for blocking the
PD-L1/PD-1 interaction (42 pM). Biacore studies measuring the
capacity of YW243.55S70 to block both interactions of PD-L1 with
PD-1 and B7.1 were consistent with these ELISA results (data not
shown).
TABLE-US-00024 TABLE 4 Format 4 Format 5 Format 6 Format 7
hB7.1-biotin/ hPD-1-biotin/ mB7.1-biotin/ mPD-1-biotin/ hPD-L1
hPD-L1 mPD-L1 mPD-L1 Antibody IC.sub.50 in pM IC.sub.50 in pM
IC.sub.50 in pM IC.sub.50 in pM YW243.55.S70 38 42 29 48
Example 5
Enhancement of CD4+ and CD8+ T Cell Activity In Vitro by Anti-PD-L1
Antibody YW243.55.S70 PMEL/B16 In Vitro Assay
[0587] This example shows the effect of the anti-PD-L1 antibodies
of the invention upon activation of PMEL T cell receptor transgenic
CD8.sup.+ T cells, as measured by enhancement of .gamma.-IFN
production in response to melanocyte peptide, gp100. In this
procedure, CD8+ T cells are obtained from PMEL TCR transgenic mice
whose CD8+ T cells express a TCR specific for the gp100 peptide.
Following purification of the CD8+ T cells, multiple rounds of
stimulation are performed to generate and expand the activated CD8+
T-cells, which will then in turn upregulate PD-1 expression. In
parallel, B16 melanoma cells are treated with IFN-.gamma. to
upregulate their PD-L1 expression. Then, the cells are co-cultured
in the presence of anti-PD-L1 antibody, and the effect on
IFN-.gamma. production is evaluated. B16 cells were chosen for the
tertiary stimulation because they endogenously express low levels
of gp100 peptide (as opposed to exogenous application of the
peptide). Moreover, as these cells also do not express PD-L2, B7.1
or B7.2, the effect of additional signaling unrelated to PD-L1
(e.g. signaling through CD28 or CTLA-4 or PD-L2 induced signaling
through PD-1) is minimized.
[0588] PMEL Assay:
[0589] As shown in FIG. 3, anti-PD-L1 antibodies enhance both the
percentage of IFN-.gamma.-producing PMEL CD8.sup.+ T cells and the
average levels of IFN-.gamma. produced in response to the
designated amounts of gp100 peptide.
[0590] D.011.10 In Vitro Assay:
[0591] A similar assay utilizing Ova-specific TCR Tg CD4+ T cells
shows enhanced T cell proliferation in the presence of the
anti-PD-L1 Ab following prior stimulation with Ova peptide to
induce expression of PD-1 (FIG. 4). In the final stimulation,
irradiated A20 B cells that express PD-L1 were used to present the
designated concentrations of Ova peptide to the D0.11.10 T cells.
Notably, the contribution of the PD-1/PD-L1 axis is more pronounced
at lower degrees of antigen receptor stimulation, levels that more
closely reflect the physiologically relevant magnitude of
stimulation.
Materials and Methods:
PMEL Assay
Primary Stimulation (Day 0-4)
[0592] Spleen and mesenteric lymph nodes were harvested from PMEL
transgenic T cell receptor mice. Organs were crushed into single
cell suspensions and lysed of red blood cells. CD8.sup.+ T cells
were isolated using the CD8.sup.+ T cell isolation kit and AutoMACS
cell separator (Miltenyi Biotec) as per manufacturer's
instructions.
[0593] Spleen was isolated from a non-transgenic sex-matched mouse
and crushed into a single cell suspension and red blood cell lysed.
Cells were pulsed with 0.1 .mu.g/ml of gp100-peptide for two hours
at 37.degree. C. and washed.
[0594] Cells were co-cultured in a 96-well flat-bottom plate with
200,000 PMEL CD8.sup.+ T cells and 75,000 gp100-pulsed splenocytes
for 4 days. Culture media was Iscove's Modified Dulbecco's
medium+10% fetal bovine serum+20 .mu.M HEPES, and 1:100 dilutions
of the following supplements from Gibco: Gluta-MAX, sodium
pyruvate, penicillin/streptomycin, and non-essential amino
acids.
Secondary Stimulation (Day 4-7)
[0595] PMEL cultures were spun down and the media was aspirated
using a multi-channel pipet. Fresh media was added and mixed to
wash the cells, followed by another spin. Majority of the media was
removed and antibodies (Herceptin.RTM., YW243.55.570, or none) were
added for a final concentration of 10 .mu.g/ml. Conditions were set
up in duplicate wells such that the average IFN-.gamma. production
could be assessed at the endpoint.
[0596] DC-1 cells were pulsed with 0.1 .mu.g/ml gp100 peptide for 2
hours at 37.degree. C. and washed. Gp100-pulsed DC-1 cells were
added to washed PMEL cultures at 40,000 cells/well. PMEL and DC-1+
antibody were co-cultured for 3 days.
Third Stimulation (Day 7-8)
[0597] One day prior to third stimulation on day 6, B16 melanoma
cells were incubated with 20 ng/ml of mouse IFN-.gamma. (R&D
Systems) overnight to upregulate their PD-L1 expression.
[0598] On day 7, PMEL cultures were spun down and the media was
aspirated using a multi-channel pipet. Fresh media was added and
mixed, followed by another spin. Majority of the media was removed
and antibodies were added for a final concentration of 10
.mu.g/ml.
[0599] After overnight stimulation with IFN-.gamma., B16 cells were
washed and split into three groups for a two hour incubation with
either no gp100, gp100 at 1 ng/ml (gp100 low), and gp100 at 10
ng/ml (gp100 high). Cells were washed and then added to the washed
PMEL+Ab cultures at 40,000 cells per well and incubated together
overnight.
Day 8 IFN-.gamma. Intracellular Staining
[0600] Golgi-Plug (BD Biosciences) was added for the last 5 hours
of culture as per manufacturer's instructions. IFN-.gamma.
intracellular staining was done using BD Biosciences
Cytofix/Cytoperm Fixation/Permeabilization Solution kit as per
manufacturer's instructions and all staining antibodies were also
from BD Biosciences. Cells were surface stained with CD8a PE and
Thy1.1 FITC and intracellular stained with IFN-.gamma. APC at
saturating concentrations.
[0601] All samples were run on a Beckman Dickinson FACSCalibur and
data was analyzed using Tree Star, Inc. FLOWJO.TM. software.
D011.10 In Vitro Assay
[0602] Spleen and mesenteric lymph nodes from D011.10 transgenic
mice were harvested, crushed into single cell suspensions, and
lysed of red blood cells. Cells were cultured for 72 hours at a
density of 1.times.10.sup.6 cells per ml in 6 well plates with Ova
peptide at 0.3 .mu.M. Culture media was RPMI 1640+10% fetal bovine
serum+20 .mu.M HEPES, and 1:100 dilutions of the following
supplements from Gibco: Gluta-MAX, sodium pyruvate,
penicillin/streptomycin, and non-essential amino acids.
[0603] After the primary stimulation, cells were harvested and
purified for CD4.sup.+ T cells using a mouse CD4 T cell
purification kit as per manufacturer's instructions (Miltenyi
Biotec). Purified CD4.sup.+ T cells were then rested overnight.
[0604] The next day, cells were harvested, washed, and co-cultured
with irradiated (10,000 rads) A20 cells. Co-culture was set up in
96-well U bottom plates in triplicate wells, with 50,000 CD4.sup.+
T cells to 40,000 A20 cells with titrated Ova peptide and antibody
at a final concentration of 20 .mu.g/ml. After 48 hours, cultures
were pulsed overnight with 1 .mu.Ci/well of 3H-thymidine and frozen
the next day. Plates were later thawed, harvested on a cell
harvester, and read on a beta-counter.
Example 6
Enhanced Proliferation of Human CD8+ T Cells in a Mixed Lymphocyte
Reaction by Anti-PD-L1
[0605] FIG. 5 demonstrates the ability of anti-PD-L1 (e.g.,
YW243.55.S1) to enhance proliferation of human CD8 T cells in
response to cells from an MHC-mismatched donor. Responding CD8+ T
cells were enriched from whole blood of Donor A by first using CD8+
T cell RosetteSep.RTM. (StemCell Technologies) as per
manufacturer's instructions. Cells were then diluted by an equal
volume of phosphate buffered saline (PBS) and separated by gradient
centrifugation by overlaying on Ficoll-Paque Plus (GE Healthcare).
After separation, cells were stained with CD8 APC (BD Biosciences)
and found to be 78% CD8+ T cells. Cells were fluorescently labeled
with 2.5 .mu.M CFSE tracer dye (Molecular Probes).
[0606] To serve as allogeneic antigen presenting cells (APCs),
mononuclear cells were first isolated from whole blood from Donor B
and then depleted of CD3+ T cells. Blood was diluted with an equal
volume of PBS and mononuclear cells were isolated after gradient
centrifugation over Ficoll. Cells were stained with CD3 FITC (BD
Biosciences), washed, and then incubated with anti-FITC microbeads
(Miltenyi Biotec). CD3 FITC positive cells were then depleted on
the AutoMACS cell separator (Miltenyi Biotec). Cells were then
irradiated 2500 rads in a cesium irradiator.
[0607] Cells were co-cultured in a 96-well flat-bottom plate with
150,000 CD8+ T cells and 150,000 APCs for 5 days with antibodies at
10 .mu.g/ml. Culture media was RPMI 1640+10% fetal bovine serum+20
.mu.M HEPES, and 1:100 dilutions of the following supplements from
Gibco: Gluta-MAX, sodium pyruvate, penicillin/streptomycin, and
non-essential amino acids.
[0608] On day 5, cells were harvested, washed and stained with
CD8-biotin followed by streptavidin-PerCp (BD Biosciences). Samples
were run on a Beckman Dickinson FACSCalibur and data was analyzed
using Tree Star, Inc. FlowJo software.
[0609] An approximately 45% enhancement in proliferation of CD8 T
cells responding to cells from an MHC-mismatched donor was observed
in the presence of the anti-PD-L1.
Example 7
Effects of PD-L1 Blockade on LCMV In Vivo Model
[0610] T cells under conditions of chronic stimulation have been
shown to upregulate and sustain expression of the inhibitory
receptor PD-1. Ligation of PD-1 by either of its two ligands PD-L1
and PD-L2 contributes to the refractory state of the chronically
activated T cell, attenuating its response to its cognate antigen.
In mice persistently-infected with lymphocytic choriomeningitis
virus (LCMV), blockade of PD-1 or its ligand PD-L1 is sufficient to
revitalize chronically refractory T cells, enhancing the magnitude
and functional quality of the anti-viral T cell response.
Similarly, humans chronically infected with HIV or HCV exhibit T
cells refractory to simulation whose activity can be enhanced in
vitro by blockade of PD-1 or PD-L1. Therefore, activity of PD-L1
blockade in the LCMV model suggests therapeutic potential for
enhancing anti-viral and anti-tumor immunity.
[0611] For the LCMV in vivo experiments in the mouse, we have
reformatted the humanized anti-PD-L1 antibody (YW243.55S70), by
cloning the phage-derived heavy and light chain variable region
sequences upstream of mouse IgG2a heavy chain and mouse kappa light
chain constant domains. To prevent antibody-mediated cytotoxicity
of PD-L1 expressing cells, by inhibiting Fc.gamma. receptor
binding, positions 265 (aspartic acid) and 297 (asparagine) were
changed to alanine (DANA). Shields, R L et al J. Biol Chem 2001 276
(9): 6591-6604. To test the ability of the anti-PD-L1 antibody to
enhance anti-viral immunity in a chronic infection, mice were
infected at Day 0 with 2.times.10.sup.6 plaque forming units (pfu)
of Clone 13 LCMV or the Armstrong strain of LCMV as a reference
control. The schematic of the experimental design appears in FIG.
6. Infection with Clone 13 results in a chronic infection,
characterized by T cells that expand but are unable to effectively
clear the virus, while Armstrong LCMV is cleared within 8-10 days
of infection. On day 14, mice began treatment with either
anti-PD-L1 or control mIgG delivered at 10 mg/kg doses
3.times./week. At Days 21 and 28, analysis of CD8 T cell function
and viral titers in blood and tissues were performed.
[0612] Consistent with published data of Barber et. al, Nature
439:682-7 (2006), this example shows the ability of the anti-PD-L1
Ab to enhance the cytotoxic lymphocyte response to LCMV following a
2 week treatment regimen in a chronic LCMV infection. FIG. 7A shows
the % of CD8 T cells that express CD107a on their cell surface in
response to gp33 LCMV-specific peptide. Plasma membrane expression
of CD107a, normally expressed intracellularly, accompanies the
degranulation process and therefore serves as a surrogate marker
for degranulation. Relative to the response of cells from the acute
Armstrong LCMV infection, cells from animals infected with the
chronic strain, clone 13, are impaired in degraulation (control Ig
group), while PD-L1 blockade was able to restore CD8+ degraulation
to levels comparable to those observed in the Armstrong infection.
Similarly, 7B demonstrates the increased % of IFN-.gamma.-producing
CD8 T cells in response to LCMV gp33 in the anti-PD-L1-treated
group relative to control Ig.
[0613] Next, the impact of the anti-PD-L1 Ab on reducing or
eradicating LCMV virus in blood and tissues was tested. In FIG. 8A,
the graphs show log virus titers in the indicated tissue of control
Ig and PD-L1 treated animals at day 21 and 28 after infection with
Clone 13 LCMV. Antibody treatment was initiated at Day 14
post-infection. Blockade of PD-L1 resulted in highly significant
reduction in viral titers in blood, liver, brain, lung, and kidney.
Impressively, in 3 of 5 mice, .alpha.-PD-L1 Ab reduced blood LCMV
titers to levels below detection (<1.times.10.sup.-5). In a
subsequent experiment of comparable design, virus eradication in
blood and liver was observed in 5/5 mice treated for 2 weeks with
anti-PD-L1 at doses of either 10 mg/kg or 2 mg/kg 3.times./week
(data not shown). The lower graph shows the kinetics of reduction
of viral titers in the blood and demonstrates an average reduction
of 96.8% in the anti-PD-L1 treated group at Day 28 relative to
control. These data support the importance of the PD-1/PD-L1
pathway in inhibiting T cell responses in chronic infections and
are consistent with effects of in vitro PD-L1 blockade on T cells
obtained from humans with chronic infections such as Hepatitis C
and HIV.
Materials and Methods:
Determining % IFN-Gamma Production by CD8 T Cells in Response to
LCMV Gp33 Peptide
[0614] Spleens were isolated from infected mice and a single cell
suspension was generated by crushing the organs in complete media:
IMDM (Invitrogen Inc., Carlsbad, Calif.) containing 10% heat
inactivated fetal bovine serum, 2 mM L-glutamine, 100 U/ml
Penicillin/Streptomycin and 10 mM 2-mercaptoethanol. The red blood
cells were lysed using ACK lysis buffer (0.15 M NH.sub.4Cl, 10 mM
KHCO.sub.3, 0.1 mM EDTA). To measure antigen specific CD8 T cell
responses, the splenocytes were washed in complete media and
restimulated in vitro for 4 hours with the LCMV peptide GP33
(KAVYNFATC (SEQ ID NO: 43), ProImmune Inc., Bradenton, Fla.).
1.times.10.sup.6 splenocytes were cultured in 96 well flat bottom
plates with 100 ng/ml of GP33 peptide in the presence of 100
units/ml of human interleukin-2 (Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.) 1
.mu.l/ml of brefeldin A and 1 .mu.l/ml (1:1000 dilution) of
monensin (BD pharmingen) and anti-CD107a FITC (clone ID4B, BD
Biosciences, San Jose, Calif.). After incubation, cells were washed
once in PBS containing 2% fetal bovine serum and cell surface
markers were stained using fluorochrome conjugated antibodies:
anti-CD8 APC (clone 53.67, BD Biosciences, San Jose, Calif.)
anti-CD4 PerCp-Cy5.5 (clone RM4-5, BD Biosciences, San Jose,
Calif.) and anti-PD-1 PE (clone J43, BD Biosciences, San Jose,
Calif.). Staining for intracellular IFN-.gamma. was done using the
Cytofix Cytoperm Plus kit (BD Biosciences, San Jose, Calif.)
according to the manufacturer's instructions using anti-IFN-.gamma.
PE-Cy7 (clone XMG1.2, eBioscience Inc. San Diego, Calif.). To
detect the number of GP33 specific CD8 T cells, fresh splenocytes
were stained with GP33 pentamers (H2-Db linked to APC, ProImmune
Inc., Bradenton, Fla.) according to the manufacturer's
instructions. Data was collected using a BD FACSAria (BD
Biosciences, San Jose, Calif.) and analyzed with FlowJo Software
(Tree Star Inc. Ashland Oreg.).
Determination of LCMV Viral Titers:
[0615] MC57 fibrosarcoma cells are infected with 10-fold serial
dilutions of LCMV-containing blood or tissue homogenate in complete
IMDM. The reaction is then incubated for 2-6 hours in at 37.degree.
C. in a tissue culture incubator, then overlayed with DMEM
containing 1% methylcellulose. This is followed by incubation for
3-5 days, then the methylcellulose layer is removed by aspiration.
The cells are fixed with PBS/4% paraformaldehyde, then
permeabilized with 0.5% Triton-x for 20 minutes, washed in PBS,
then blocked in 10% FCS for 1 hour with mild rocking. Staining for
LCMV is done with VL4 antibody (1 hour), washed 2.times., then
developed with anti-rat HRP (1:400) in blocking buffer. This
followed by washing 3.times., then adding o-phenylenediamine
substrate (SIGMA P8806-50TAB 3 mg/tablet) to wells to develop.
Example 8
PD-L1 Blockade in Cancer
[0616] It is now apparent that many tumors exploit expression of
PD-1 ligands as a means to attenuate anti-tumor T cells responses.
Several human cancers have been characterized to express elevated
levels of PD-L1 on both tumors and tumor-infiltrating leukocytes
and this elevated PD-L1 expression is often associated with a worse
prognosis. Mouse tumor models demonstrate similar increases in
PD-L1 expression within tumors and demonstrate a role for the
PD-1/PD-L1 pathway in inhibiting tumor immunity.
[0617] Here we present an experiment demonstrating the impact of
blocking PD-L1 on orthotopic tumor growth of MC38.Ova murine
colorectal carcinoma cells in syngeneic C57B6 mice (FIG. 9A). These
cells express ovalbumin via retroviral transduction and express
PD-L1, but not PD-L2 on their cell surface as assessed by Flow
Cytometry (histogram--FIG. 10). Mice were inoculated subcutaneously
with 0.5 million MC38.Ova cells on Day 0. On Day 1 or on Day 14
mice (when tumors had reached an average size of 250 mm.sup.3) 10
mice/group were treated with 10 mg/kg anti-PD-L1 (YW243.55S70-mouse
IgG2a-DANA), control Ig, or blocking anti-CTLA4 Ab, (UC10-4F10-11)
3.times./week for the duration of the study. Blockade of PD-L1
either early or in late intervention is highly effective as a
single agent therapy at preventing tumor growth. In contrast,
blockade of CTLA4, another inhibitory molecule expressed on T cells
showed no evidence of inhibiting tumor growth. These results
demonstrate the unique role of the PD-1/PD-L1 axis over CTLA4/B7 in
suppression of the anti-tumor immune response and support the
potential for the treatment of human cancers with antibodies that
block the PD-L1 interaction with PD-1 and B7.1.
MC38.Ova Syngeneic Tumor Model:
[0618] methods. On Day 0, 70 animals were inoculated subcutaneously
with 0.5 million MC38.Ova cell in 100 microliters of HBSS+
matrigel. Beginning on D1, 20 mice were recruited into one of 2
treatment groups (see below: group 1 or group 2). The remaining 40
mice were allowed to grow tumors until Day 14. Of these 40, 30 mice
with similar-sized tumors were recruited into one of 3 treatment
groups (Groups 3-5). The tumors were measured and the mice weighed
2.times./week. Mice not recruited into below treatment groups, due
to dissimilar tumor volume were euthanized:
Group 1: anti-gp120 antibody, 10 mg/kg IP, 100 .mu.L, D1,
3.times./week Group 2: anti-PD-L1 antibody, 10 mg/kg IP, 100 .mu.L,
D1, 3.times./week Group 3: anti-gp120 antibody, 10 mg/kg IP, 100
.mu.L, D14, 3.times./week Group 4: anti-PD-L1 antibody, 10 mg/kg
IP, 100 .mu.L, D14, 3.times./week Group 5: anti-CTLA-4 antibody, 10
mg/kg IP, 100 .mu.L, D14, 3.times./week ***Groups 1 and 2 began
dosing on D1; Groups 3, 4, and 5 on D14.
Example 9
Combinations of Anti-PD-L1 with Other Agents to Provide for
Anti-Tumor Effect or Immune-Enhancing Therapy--MC38.Ova Model
[0619] On Day 0, 150 animals are inoculated subcutaneously with 0.5
million MC38.Ova cell in 100 microliters of HBSS+ matrigel. Mice
are allowed to grow tumors. Mice are weighed and measured
2.times./week until Day 11 (when the tumor volume is between
100-200 mm.sup.3). On Day 11, following tumor measurement, mice are
recruited into 1 of the 12 treatment groups below. Mice not
recruited into below treatment groups, due to dissimilar tumor
volume are euthanized. Gemcitabine (Group 4) treatment starts on
day 12, while treatment for the remaining antibody groups starts on
day 14. All volumes are 100 .mu.l in inert vehicle, with additional
details as reported below:
Group 1: anti-gp120 antibody, 10 mg/kg IP, 100 .mu.L,
3.times./week.times.5, n=10 Group 2: anti-PD-L1 antibody, 10 mg/kg
IP, 100 .mu.L, 3.times./week.times.5, n=10 Group 3: anti-VEGF
antibody, 5 mg/kg IP, 100 .mu.L, 2.times./week.times.5, n=10 Group
4: Gemcitabine, 40 mg/kg IP, 100 .mu.l, Day 12, 16, 20, n=10 Group
5: anti-PD-L1 antibody+anti-gp120 antibody, n=10 Group 6:
anti-PD-L1 antibody+anti-VEGF antibody, n=10 Group 7: anti-PD-L1
antibody+Gemcitabine, n=10 Group 8: anti-gp120
antibody+Gemcitabine, n=10 Group 9: anti-gp120 antibody+anti-VEGF,
n=10 [0620] Day 12: Mice from group 1 are bled (100 microliters)
retro-orbitally under anaesthesia for CBC analysis. [0621] Day 14
and Day 22: Mice from group 4 are bled (100 microliters)
retro-orbitally under anaesthesia for CBC analysis. [0622] Day 19:
All mice, except group 4, are bled (100 microliters)
retro-orbitally under anaesthesia for CBC analysis. [0623] Day 26:
All mice, except group 4, are bled (100 microliters)
retro-orbitally under anaesthesia for PK analysis.
[0624] Tumors are measured and mice weighed 2.times./week. Animals
exhibiting weight loss of >15% will be weighed daily and
euthanized if they lose >20% body weight. Mice will be
euthanized when tumor volumes exceed 3,000 mm.sup.3, or after 3
months if tumors do not form.
[0625] This study shows (FIG. 10) that PD-L1 blockade was more
effective than .alpha.-VEGF and an inductive regimen of gemcitabine
alone.
Example 10
Expression of Anti-PD-L1 Antibody in Mammalian Cells
[0626] This example illustrates preparation of potentially
glycosylated forms of anti-PD-L1 antibody by recombinant expression
in mammalian cells.
[0627] The vector, pRK5 (see EP 307,247, published Mar. 15, 1989),
is employed as the expression vector. Optionally, DNA encoding the
light and/or heavy chain of the antibody is ligated into pRK5 with
selected restriction enzymes to allow insertion such DNA using
ligation methods such as described in Sambrook et al., supra.
[0628] In one embodiment, the selected host cells may be 293 cells.
Human 293 cells (ATCC CCL 1573) are grown to confluence in tissue
culture plates in medium such as DMEM supplemented with fetal calf
serum and optionally, nutrient components and/or antibiotics. About
10 .mu.g if DNA encoding the pRK5-antibody is mixed with about 1
.mu.g DNA encoding the VA RNA gene [Thimmappaya et al., Cell,
31:543 (1982)] and dissolved in 500 .mu.L of 1 mM Tris-HCl, 0.1 mM
EDTA, 0.227 M CaCl.sub.2. To this mixture is added, dropwise, 500
.mu.L of 50 mM HEPES (pH 7.35), 280 mM NaCl, 1.5 mM NaPO.sub.4, and
a precipitate is allowed to form for 10 minutes at 25.degree. C.
The precipitate is suspended and added to the 293 cells and allowed
to settle for about four hours at 37.degree. C. The culture medium
is aspirated off and 2 ml of 20% glycerol in PBS is added for 30
seconds. The 293 cells are then washed with serum free medium,
fresh medium is added and the cells are incubated for about 5
days.
[0629] Approximately 24 hours after the transfections, the culture
medium is removed and replaced with culture medium (alone) or
culture medium containing 200 .mu.Ci/ml .sup.35S-cysteine and 200
.mu.Ci/ml .sup.35S-methionine. After a 12 hour incubation, the
conditioned medium is collected, concentrated on a spin filter, and
loaded onto a 15% SDS gel. The processed gel may be dried and
exposed to film for a selected period of time to reveal the
presence of the antibody. The cultures containing transfected cells
may undergo further incubation (in serum free medium) and the
medium is tested in selected bioassays.
[0630] In an alternative technique, the antibody may be introduced
into 293 cells transiently using the dextran sulfate method
described by Somparyrac et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 12:7575
(1981). 293 cells are grown to maximal density in a spinner flask
and 700 .mu.g DNA encoding the pRK5-antibody is added. The cells
are first concentrated from the spinner flask by centrifugation and
washed with PBS. The DNA-dextran precipitate is incubated on the
cell pellet for four hours. The cells are treated with 20% glycerol
for 90 seconds, washed with tissue culture medium, and
re-introduced into the spinner flask containing tissue culture
medium, 5 .mu.g/ml bovine insulin and 0.1 .mu.g/ml bovine
transferrin. After about four days, the conditioned media is
centrifuged and filtered to remove cells and debris. The sample
containing the expressed antibody can then be concentrated and
purified by any selected method, such as dialysis and/or column
chromatography.
[0631] In another embodiment, the antibody can be expressed in CHO
cells. The DNA encoding the antibody ligated into pRK5 can be
transfected into CHO cells using known reagents such as CaPO.sub.4
or DEAE-dextran. As described above, the cell cultures can be
incubated, and the medium replaced with culture medium (alone) or
medium containing a radiolabel such as .sup.35S-methionine. After
determining the presence of the antibody, the culture medium may be
replaced with serum free medium. Preferably, the cultures are
incubated for about 6 days, and then the conditioned medium is
harvested. The medium containing the expressed antibody can then be
concentrated and purified by any selected method.
[0632] Epitope-tagged variants of the antibody may also be
expressed in host CHO cells. The DNA encoding the antibody ligated
into pRK5 may be subcloned out of the pRK5 vector. The subclone
insert can undergo PCR to fuse in frame with a selected epitope tag
such as a poly-his tag into a Baculovirus expression vector. The
poly-his tagged DNA encoding the antibody insert can then be
subcloned into a SV40 driven vector containing a selection marker
such as DHFR for selection of stable clones. Finally, the CHO cells
can be transfected (as described above) with the SV40 driven
vector. Labeling may be performed, as described above, to verify
expression. The culture medium containing the expressed poly-His
tagged antibody can then be concentrated and purified by any
selected method, such as by Ni.sup.2+-chelate affinity
chromatography.
[0633] The antibody may also be expressed in CHO and/or COS cells
by a transient expression procedure or in CHO cells by another
stable expression procedure.
[0634] Stable expression in CHO cells is performed using the
following procedure. The proteins are expressed as an IgG construct
(immunoadhesin), in which the coding sequences for the soluble
forms (e.g. extracellular domains) of the respective proteins are
fused to an IgG1 constant region sequence containing the hinge, CH2
and CH2 domains and/or is a poly-His tagged form.
[0635] Following PCR amplification, the respective DNAs are
subcloned in a CHO expression vector using standard techniques as
described in Ausubel et al., Current Protocols of Molecular
Biology, Unit 3.16, John Wiley and Sons (1997). CHO expression
vectors are constructed to have compatible restriction sites 5= and
3= of the DNA of interest to allow the convenient shuttling of
cDNA=s. The vector used expression in CHO cells is as described in
Lucas et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 24:9 (1774-1779 (1996), and uses the
SV40 early promoter/enhancer to drive expression of the cDNA of
interest and dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR). DHFR expression
permits selection for stable maintenance of the plasmid following
transfection.
[0636] Twelve micrograms of the desired plasmid DNA is introduced
into approximately 10 million CHO cells using commercially
available transfection reagents SUPERFECT.RTM. (Quiagen),
DOSPER.RTM. or FUGENE.RTM. (Boehringer Mannheim). The cells are
grown as described in Lucas et al., supra. Approximately
3.times.10.sup.-7 cells are frozen in an ampule for further growth
and production as described below.
[0637] The ampules containing the plasmid DNA are thawed by
placement into water bath and mixed by vortexing. The contents are
pipetted into a centrifuge tube containing 10 mLs of media and
centrifuged at 1000 rpm for 5 minutes. The supernatant is aspirated
and the cells are resuspended in 10 mL of selective media (0.2
.mu.m filtered PS20 with 5% 0.2 .mu.m diafiltered fetal bovine
serum). The cells are then aliquoted into a 100 mL spinner
containing 90 mL of selective media. After 1-2 days, the cells are
transferred into a 250 mL spinner filled with 150 mL selective
growth medium and incubated at 37.degree. C. After another 2-3
days, 250 mL, 500 mL and 2000 mL spinners are seeded with
3.times.10.sup.5 cells/mL. The cell media is exchanged with fresh
media by centrifugation and resuspension in production medium.
Although any suitable CHO media may be employed, a production
medium described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,122,469, issued Jun. 16, 1992
may actually be used. A 3 L production spinner is seeded at
1.2.times.10.sup.6 cells/mL. On day 0, the cell number and pH is
determined. On day 1, the spinner is sampled and sparging with
filtered air is commenced. On day 2, the spinner is sampled, the
temperature shifted to 33.degree. C., and 30 mL of 500 g/L glucose
and 0.6 mL of 10% antifoam (e.g., 35% polydimethylsiloxane
emulsion, Dow Corning 365 Medical Grade Emulsion) taken. Throughout
the production, the pH is adjusted as necessary to keep it at
around 7.2. After 10 days, or until the viability dropped below
70%, the cell culture is harvested by centrifugation and filtering
through a 0.22 .mu.m filter. The filtrate was either stored at
4.degree. C. or immediately loaded onto columns for
purification.
[0638] For the poly-His tagged constructs, the proteins are
purified using a Ni-NTA column (Qiagen). Before purification,
imidazole is added to the conditioned media to a concentration of 5
mM. The conditioned media is pumped onto a 6 ml Ni-NTA column
equilibrated at 4.degree. C., in 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.4, buffer
containing 0.3 M NaCl and 5 mM imidazole at a flow rate of 4-5
ml/min. After loading, the column is washed with additional
equilibration buffer and the protein eluted with equilibration
buffer containing 0.25 M imidazole. The highly purified protein is
subsequently desalted into a storage buffer containing 10 mM Hepes,
0.14 M NaCl and 4% mannitol, pH 6.8, with a 25 ml G25 Superfine
(Pharmacia) column and stored at -80.degree. C.
[0639] Immunoadhesin (Fc-containing) constructs are purified from
the conditioned media as follows. The conditioned medium is pumped
onto a 5 ml Protein A column (Pharmacia) which had been
equilibrated in 20 mM Na phosphate buffer, pH 6.8. After loading,
the column is washed extensively with equilibration buffer before
elution with 100 mM citric acid, pH 3.5. The eluted protein is
immediately neutralized by collecting 1 ml fractions into tubes
containing 275 (DL of 1 M Tris buffer, pH 9. The highly purified
protein is subsequently desalted into storage buffer as described
above for the poly-His tagged proteins. The homogeneity is assessed
by SDS polyacrylamide gels and by N-terminal amino acid sequencing
by Edman degradation.
Example 11
Expression of Anti-PD-L1 Antibody in E. coli
[0640] This example illustrates preparation of an unglycosylated
form of anti-PD-L1 antibody by recombinant expression in E.
coli.
[0641] The DNA sequence encoding the anti-PD-L1 antibody is
initially amplified using selected PCR primers. The primers should
contain restriction enzyme sites which correspond to the
restriction enzyme sites on the selected expression vector. A
variety of expression vectors may be employed. An example of a
suitable vector is pBR322 (derived from E. coli; see Bolivar et
al., Gene, 2:95 (1977)) which contains genes for ampicillin and
tetracycline resistance. The vector is digested with restriction
enzyme and dephosphorylated. The PCR amplified sequences are then
ligated into the vector. The vector will preferably include
sequences which encode for an antibiotic resistance gene, a trp
promoter, a polyhis leader (including the first six STII codons,
polyhis sequence, and enterokinase cleavage site), the NPOR coding
region, lambda transcriptional terminator, and an argU gene.
[0642] The ligation mixture is then used to transform a selected E.
coli strain using the methods described in Sambrook et al., supra.
Transformants are identified by their ability to grow on LB plates
and antibiotic resistant colonies are then selected. Plasmid DNA
can be isolated and confirmed by restriction analysis and DNA
sequencing.
[0643] Selected clones can be grown overnight in liquid culture
medium such as LB broth supplemented with antibiotics. The
overnight culture may subsequently be used to inoculate a larger
scale culture. The cells are then grown to a desired optical
density, during which the expression promoter is turned on.
[0644] After culturing the cells for several more hours, the cells
can be harvested by centrifugation. The cell pellet obtained by the
centrifugation can be solubilized using various agents known in the
art, and the solubilized antibody can then be purified using a
metal chelating column under conditions that allow tight binding of
the antibody.
[0645] Anti-PD-L1 antibody may also be expressed in E. coli in a
poly-His tagged form, using the following procedure. The DNA
encoding antibody is initially amplified using selected PCR
primers. The primers contain restriction enzyme sites which
correspond to the restriction enzyme sites on the selected
expression vector, and other useful sequences providing for
efficient and reliable translation initiation, rapid purification
on a metal chelation column, and proteolytic removal with
enterokinase. The PCR-amplified, poly-His tagged sequences are then
ligated into an expression vector, which is used to transform an E.
coli host based on strain 52 (W3110 fuhA(tonA) lon galE
rpoHts(htpRts) clpP(lacIq). Transformants are first grown in LB
containing 50 mg/ml carbenicillin at 30/C with shaking until an
O.D.600 of 3-5 is reached. Cultures are then diluted 50-100 fold
into CRAP media (prepared by mixing 3.57 g
(NH.sub.4).sub.2SO.sub.4, 0.71 g sodium citrateA2H.sub.2O, 1.07 g
KCl, 5.36 g Difco yeast extract, 5.36 g Sheffield hycase SF in 500
mL water, as well as 110 mM MPOS, pH 7.3, 0.55% (w/v) glucose and 7
mM MgSO.sub.4) and grown for approximately 20-30 hours at 30/C with
shaking. Samples are removed to verify expression by SDS-PAGE
analysis, and the bulk culture is centrifuged to pellet the cells.
Cell pellets are frozen until purification and refolding.
[0646] E. coli paste from 0.5 to 1 L fermentations (6-10 g pellets)
is resuspended in 10 volumes (w/v) in 7 M guanidine, 20 mM Tris, pH
8 buffer. Solid sodium sulfite and sodium tetrathionate is added to
make final concentrations of 0.1M and 0.02 M, respectively, and the
solution is stirred overnight at 4.degree. C. This step results in
a denatured protein with all cysteine residues blocked by
sulfitolization. The solution is centrifuged at 40,000 rpm in a
Beckman Ultracentifuge for 30 min. The supernatant is diluted with
3-5 volumes of metal chelate column buffer (6 M guanidine, 20 mM
Tris, pH 7.4) and filtered through 0.22 micron filters to clarify.
Depending on the condition, the clarified extract is loaded onto a
5 ml Qiagen Ni-NTA metal chelate column equilibrated in the metal
chelate column buffer. The column is washed with additional buffer
containing 50 mM imidazole (Calbiochem, Utrol grade), pH 7.4. The
protein is eluted with buffer containing 250 mM imidazole.
Fractions containing the desired protein were pooled and stored at
4/C. Protein concentration is estimated by its absorbance at 280 nm
using the calculated extinction coefficient based on its amino acid
sequence.
[0647] The proteins are refolded by diluting sample slowly into
freshly prepared refolding buffer consisting of: 20 mM Tris, pH
8.6, 0.3 M NaCl, 2.5 M urea, 5 mM cysteine, 20 mM glycine and 1 mM
EDTA. Refolding volumes are chosen so that the final protein
concentration is between 50 to 100 micrograms/ml. The refolding
solution is stirred gently at 4.degree. C. for 12-36 hours. The
refolding reaction is quenched by the addition of TFA to a final
concentration of 0.4% (pH of approximately 3). Before further
purification of the protein, the solution is filtered through a
0.22 micron filter and acetonitrile is added to 2-10% final
concentration. The refolded protein is chromatographed on a Poros
R1/H reversed phase column using a mobile buffer of 0.1% TFA with
elution with a gradient of acetonitrile from 10 to 80%. Aliquots of
fractions with A280 absorbance are analyzed on SDS polyacrylamide
gels and fractions containing homogeneous refolded protein are
pooled. Generally, the properly refolded species of most proteins
are eluted at the lowest concentrations of acetonitrile since those
species are the most compact with their hydrophobic interiors
shielded from interaction with the reversed phase resin. Aggregated
species are usually eluted at higher acetonitrile concentrations.
In addition to resolving misfolded forms of proteins from the
desired form, the reversed phase step also removes endotoxin from
the samples.
[0648] Fractions containing the desired folded anti-PD-L1
antibodies are pooled and the acetonitrile removed using a gentle
stream of nitrogen directed at the solution. Proteins are
formulated into 20 mM Hepes, pH 6.8 with 0.14 M sodium chloride and
4% mannitol by dialysis or by gel filtration using G25 Superfine
(Pharmacia) resins equilibrated in the formulation buffer and
sterile filtered.
Sequence CWU 1
1
45110PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic peptide 1Gly Phe Thr Phe Ser Xaa Ser Trp Ile His 1 5 10
218PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic peptide 2Ala Trp Ile Xaa Pro Tyr Gly Gly Ser Xaa Tyr Tyr
Ala Asp Ser Val 1 5 10 15 Lys Gly 39PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 3Arg
His Trp Pro Gly Gly Phe Asp Tyr 1 5 425PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 4Glu
Val Gln Leu Val Glu Ser Gly Gly Gly Leu Val Gln Pro Gly Gly 1 5 10
15 Ser Leu Arg Leu Ser Cys Ala Ala Ser 20 25 513PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 5Trp
Val Arg Gln Ala Pro Gly Lys Gly Leu Glu Trp Val 1 5 10
632PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic polypeptide 6Arg Phe Thr Ile Ser Ala Asp Thr Ser Lys Asn
Thr Ala Tyr Leu Gln 1 5 10 15 Met Asn Ser Leu Arg Ala Glu Asp Thr
Ala Val Tyr Tyr Cys Ala Arg 20 25 30 711PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 7Trp
Gly Gln Gly Thr Leu Val Thr Val Ser Ala 1 5 10 811PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 8Arg
Ala Ser Gln Xaa Xaa Xaa Thr Xaa Xaa Ala 1 5 10 97PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 9Ser
Ala Ser Xaa Leu Xaa Ser 1 5 109PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of
Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 10Gln Gln Xaa Xaa Xaa Xaa Pro
Xaa Thr 1 5 1123PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial
Sequence Synthetic peptide 11Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser
Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1 5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys
20 1215PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic peptide 12Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys Leu
Leu Ile Tyr 1 5 10 15 1332PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of
Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide 13Gly Val Pro Ser Arg Phe
Ser Gly Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr 1 5 10 15 Leu Thr Ile Ser
Ser Leu Gln Pro Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr Cys 20 25 30
1411PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic peptide 14Phe Gly Gln Gly Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 1 5
10 1510PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic peptide 15Gly Phe Thr Phe Ser Asp Ser Trp Ile His 1 5 10
1618PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic peptide 16Ala Trp Ile Ser Pro Tyr Gly Gly Ser Thr Tyr Tyr
Ala Asp Ser Val 1 5 10 15 Lys Gly 1711PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 17Arg
Ala Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr Ala Val Ala 1 5 10 187PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 18Ser
Ala Ser Phe Leu Tyr Ser 1 5 199PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of
Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 19Gln Gln Tyr Leu Tyr His Pro
Ala Thr 1 5 20118PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial
Sequence Synthetic polypeptide 20Glu Val Gln Leu Val Glu Ser Gly
Gly Gly Leu Val Gln Pro Gly Gly 1 5 10 15 Ser Leu Arg Leu Ser Cys
Ala Ala Ser Gly Phe Thr Phe Ser Asp Ser 20 25 30 Trp Ile His Trp
Val Arg Gln Ala Pro Gly Lys Gly Leu Glu Trp Val 35 40 45 Ala Trp
Ile Ser Pro Tyr Gly Gly Ser Thr Tyr Tyr Ala Asp Ser Val 50 55 60
Lys Gly Arg Phe Thr Ile Ser Ala Asp Thr Ser Lys Asn Thr Ala Tyr 65
70 75 80 Leu Gln Met Asn Ser Leu Arg Ala Glu Asp Thr Ala Val Tyr
Tyr Cys 85 90 95 Ala Arg Arg His Trp Pro Gly Gly Phe Asp Tyr Trp
Gly Gln Gly Thr 100 105 110 Leu Val Thr Val Ser Ala 115
21108PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic polypeptide 21Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu
Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1 5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala
Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys
Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe
Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser
Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu
Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr Cys Gln Gln Tyr Leu Tyr His Pro Ala 85 90
95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105
22113PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic polypeptide 22Glu Val Gln Leu Val Glu Ser Gly Gly Gly Leu
Val Gln Pro Gly Gly 1 5 10 15 Ser Leu Arg Leu Ser Cys Ala Ala Ser
Gly Phe Thr Phe Ser Ser Tyr 20 25 30 Ala Met Ser Trp Val Arg Gln
Ala Pro Gly Lys Gly Leu Glu Trp Val 35 40 45 Ser Val Ile Ser Gly
Asp Gly Gly Ser Thr Tyr Tyr Ala Asp Ser Val 50 55 60 Lys Gly Arg
Phe Thr Ile Ser Arg Asp Asn Ser Lys Asn Thr Leu Tyr 65 70 75 80 Leu
Gln Met Asn Ser Leu Arg Ala Glu Asp Thr Ala Val Tyr Tyr Cys 85 90
95 Ala Arg Gly Phe Asp Tyr Trp Gly Gln Gly Thr Leu Val Thr Val Ser
100 105 110 Ala 23118PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of
Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide 23Glu Val Gln Leu Val Glu
Ser Gly Gly Gly Leu Val Gln Pro Gly Gly 1 5 10 15 Ser Leu Arg Leu
Ser Cys Ala Ala Ser Gly Phe Thr Phe Ser Asp Ser 20 25 30 Trp Ile
His Trp Val Arg Gln Ala Pro Gly Lys Gly Leu Glu Trp Val 35 40 45
Ala Trp Ile Ser Pro Tyr Gly Gly Ser Thr Tyr Tyr Ala Asp Ser Val 50
55 60 Lys Gly Arg Phe Thr Ile Ser Ala Asp Thr Ser Lys Asn Thr Ala
Tyr 65 70 75 80 Leu Gln Met Asn Ser Leu Arg Ala Glu Asp Thr Ala Val
Tyr Tyr Cys 85 90 95 Ala Arg Arg His Trp Pro Gly Gly Phe Asp Tyr
Trp Gly Gln Gly Thr 100 105 110 Leu Val Thr Val Ser Ala 115
24118PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic polypeptide 24Glu Val Gln Leu Val Glu Ser Gly Gly Gly Leu
Val Gln Pro Gly Gly 1 5 10 15 Ser Leu Arg Leu Ser Cys Ala Ala Ser
Gly Phe Thr Phe Ser Gly Ser 20 25 30 Trp Ile His Trp Val Arg Gln
Ala Pro Gly Lys Gly Leu Glu Trp Val 35 40 45 Ala Trp Ile Leu Pro
Tyr Gly Gly Ser Ser Tyr Tyr Ala Asp Ser Val 50 55 60 Lys Gly Arg
Phe Thr Ile Ser Ala Asp Thr Ser Lys Asn Thr Ala Tyr 65 70 75 80 Leu
Gln Met Asn Ser Leu Arg Ala Glu Asp Thr Ala Val Tyr Tyr Cys 85 90
95 Ala Arg Arg His Trp Pro Gly Gly Phe Asp Tyr Trp Gly Gln Gly Thr
100 105 110 Leu Val Thr Val Ser Ala 115 25108PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide
25Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1
5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala Ser Gln Ser Ile Ser Asn
Tyr 20 25 30 Leu Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys
Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ala Ala Ser Ser Leu Glu Ser Gly Val Pro
Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu
Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr
Cys Gln Gln Tyr Asn Ser Leu Pro Trp 85 90 95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly
Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105 26108PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide
26Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1
5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr
Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys
Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro
Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu
Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr
Cys Gln Gln Tyr Tyr Asn Val Pro Trp 85 90 95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly
Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105 27108PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide
27Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1
5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr
Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys
Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro
Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu
Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr
Cys Gln Gln Tyr Tyr Ala Pro Pro Trp 85 90 95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly
Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105 28108PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide
28Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1
5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr
Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys
Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro
Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu
Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr
Cys Gln Gln Tyr Tyr Thr Val Pro Trp 85 90 95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly
Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105 29108PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide
29Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1
5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala Ser Gln Val Ile Asn Thr
Phe 20 25 30 Leu Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys
Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Thr Leu Ala Ser Gly Val Pro
Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu
Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr
Cys Gln Gln Tyr Tyr Thr Val Pro Arg 85 90 95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly
Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105 30108PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide
30Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1
5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr
Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys
Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro
Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu
Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr
Cys Gln Gln Gly Tyr Gly Val Pro Arg 85 90 95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly
Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105 31108PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide
31Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1
5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr
Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys
Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro
Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu
Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr
Cys Gln Gln Tyr Leu Phe Thr Pro Pro 85 90 95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly
Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105 32108PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide
32Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1
5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr
Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys
Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro
Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu
Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr
Cys Gln Gln Tyr Phe Ile Thr Pro Thr 85 90 95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly
Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105 33108PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide
33Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1
5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr
Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys
Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro
Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu
Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr
Cys Gln Gln Tyr Tyr Tyr Thr Pro Pro 85 90 95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly
Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105 34108PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic polypeptide
34Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1
5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr
Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys
Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro
Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu
Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr
Cys Gln Gln Phe Phe Tyr Thr Pro Pro
85 90 95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105
35108PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic polypeptide 35Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu
Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1 5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala
Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys
Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe
Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser
Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu
Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr Cys Gln Gln Ser Leu Phe Thr Pro Pro 85 90
95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105
36108PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic polypeptide 36Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu
Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1 5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala
Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys
Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe
Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser
Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu
Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr Cys Gln Gln Ser Leu Tyr Thr Pro Pro 85 90
95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105
37108PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic polypeptide 37Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu
Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1 5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala
Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys
Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe
Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser
Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu
Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr Cys Gln Gln Ser Trp Tyr His Pro Pro 85 90
95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105
38108PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic polypeptide 38Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu
Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1 5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala
Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys
Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe
Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser
Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu
Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr Cys Gln Gln Tyr Phe Tyr Ile Pro Pro 85 90
95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105
39108PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic polypeptide 39Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu
Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1 5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala
Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys
Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe
Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser
Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu
Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr Cys Gln Gln Tyr Trp Tyr Thr Pro Thr 85 90
95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105
40108PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic polypeptide 40Asp Ile Gln Met Thr Gln Ser Pro Ser Ser Leu
Ser Ala Ser Val Gly 1 5 10 15 Asp Arg Val Thr Ile Thr Cys Arg Ala
Ser Gln Asp Val Ser Thr Ala 20 25 30 Val Ala Trp Tyr Gln Gln Lys
Pro Gly Lys Ala Pro Lys Leu Leu Ile 35 40 45 Tyr Ser Ala Ser Phe
Leu Tyr Ser Gly Val Pro Ser Arg Phe Ser Gly 50 55 60 Ser Gly Ser
Gly Thr Asp Phe Thr Leu Thr Ile Ser Ser Leu Gln Pro 65 70 75 80 Glu
Asp Phe Ala Thr Tyr Tyr Cys Gln Gln Ser Tyr Phe Ile Pro Pro 85 90
95 Thr Phe Gly Gln Gly Thr Lys Val Glu Ile Lys Arg 100 105
4113PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence
Synthetic peptide 41His Gly Val Ser Gly His Gly Gln His Gly Val His
Gly 1 5 10 4212PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of Artificial
Sequence Synthetic peptide 42Gly Val Ser Gly His Gly Gln His Gly
Val His Gly 1 5 10 439PRTLymphocytic choriomeningitis virus 43Lys
Ala Val Tyr Asn Phe Ala Thr Cys 1 5 446PRTArtificial
SequenceDescription of Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 44Met
Tyr Pro Pro Pro Tyr1 5 454PRTArtificial SequenceDescription of
Artificial Sequence Synthetic peptide 45Tyr Tyr Tyr Tyr1
* * * * *